Mechanical engineering and materials Books

Book SynopsisIntroduces the theory and applications of the extended finite element method (XFEM) in the linear and nonlinear problems of continua, structures and geomechanics Explores the concept of partition of unity, various enrichment functions, and fundamentals of XFEM formulation. Covers numerous applications of XFEM including fracture mechanics, large deformation, plasticity, multiphase flow, hydraulic fracturing and contact problems Accompanied by a website hosting source code and examples Table of ContentsSeries Preface xv Preface xvii 1 Introduction 1 1.1 Introduction 1 1.2 An Enriched Finite Element Method 3 1.3 A Review on X-FEM: Development and Applications 5 1.3.1 Coupling X-FEM with the Level-Set Method 6 1.3.2 Linear Elastic Fracture Mechanics (LEFM) 7 1.3.3 Cohesive Fracture Mechanics 11 1.3.4 Composite Materials and Material Inhomogeneities 14 1.3.5 Plasticity, Damage, and Fatigue Problems 16 1.3.6 Shear Band Localization 19 1.3.7 Fluid–Structure Interaction 19 1.3.8 Fluid Flow in Fractured Porous Media 20 1.3.9 Fluid Flow and Fluid Mechanics Problems 22 1.3.10 Phase Transition and Solidification 23 1.3.11 Thermal and Thermo-Mechanical Problems 24 1.3.12 Plates and Shells 24 1.3.13 Contact Problems 26 1.3.14 Topology Optimization 28 1.3.15 Piezoelectric and Magneto-Electroelastic Problems 28 1.3.16 Multi-Scale Modeling 29 2 Extended Finite Element Formulation 31 2.1 Introduction 31 2.2 The Partition of Unity Finite Element Method 33 2.3 The Enrichment of Approximation Space 35 2.3.1 Intrinsic Enrichment 35 2.3.2 Extrinsic Enrichment 36 2.4 The Basis of X-FEM Approximation 37 2.4.1 The Signed Distance Function 39 2.4.2 The Heaviside Function 43 2.5 Blending Elements 46 2.6 Governing Equation of a Body with Discontinuity 49 2.6.1 The Divergence Theorem for Discontinuous Problems 50 2.6.2 The Weak form of Governing Equation 51 2.7 The X-FEM Discretization of Governing Equation 53 2.7.1 Numerical Implementation of X-FEM Formulation 55 2.7.2 Numerical Integration Algorithm 57 2.8 Application of X-FEM in Weak and Strong Discontinuities 60 2.8.1 Modeling an Elastic Bar with a Strong Discontinuity 61 2.8.2 Modeling an Elastic Bar with a Weak Discontinuity 63 2.8.3 Modeling an Elastic Plate with a Crack Interface at its Center 66 2.8.4 Modeling an Elastic Plate with a Material Interface at its Center 68 2.9 Higher Order X-FEM 70 2.10 Implementation of X-FEM with Higher Order Elements 73 2.10.1 Higher Order X-FEM Modeling of a Plate with a Material Interface 73 2.10.2 Higher Order X-FEM Modeling of a Plate with a Curved Crack Interface 75 3 Enrichment Elements 77 3.1 Introduction 77 3.2 Tracking Moving Boundaries 78 3.3 Level Set Method 81 3.3.1 Numerical Implementation of LSM 82 3.3.2 Coupling the LSM with X-FEM 83 3.4 Fast Marching Method 85 3.4.1 Coupling the FMM with X-FEM 87 3.5 X-FEM Enrichment Functions 88 3.5.1 Bimaterials, Voids, and Inclusions 88 3.5.2 Strong Discontinuities and Crack Interfaces 91 3.5.3 Brittle Cracks 93 3.5.4 Cohesive Cracks 97 3.5.5 Plastic Fracture Mechanics 99 3.5.6 Multiple Cracks 101 3.5.7 Fracture in Bimaterial Problems 102 3.5.8 Polycrystalline Microstructure 106 3.5.9 Dislocations 111 3.5.10 Shear Band Localization 113 4 Blending Elements 119 4.1 Introduction 119 4.2 Convergence Analysis in the X-FEM 120 4.3 Ill-Conditioning in the X-FEM Method 124 4.3.1 One-Dimensional Problem with Material Interface 126 4.4 Blending Strategies in X-FEM 128 4.5 Enhanced Strain Method 130 4.5.1 An Enhanced Strain Blending Element for the Ramp Enrichment Function 132 4.5.2 An Enhanced Strain Blending Element for Asymptotic Enrichment Functions 134 4.6 The Hierarchical Method 135 4.6.1 A Hierarchical Blending Element for Discontinuous Gradient Enrichment 135 4.6.2 A Hierarchical Blending Element for Crack Tip Asymptotic Enrichments 137 4.7 The Cutoff Function Method 138 4.7.1 The Weighted Function Blending Method 140 4.7.2 A Variant of the Cutoff Function Method 142 4.8 A DG X-FEM Method 143 4.9 Implementation of Some Optimal X-FEM Type Methods 147 4.9.1 A Plate with a Circular Hole at Its Centre 148 4.9.2 A Plate with a Horizontal Material Interface 149 4.9.3 The Fiber Reinforced Concrete in Uniaxial Tension 151 4.10 Pre-Conditioning Strategies in X-FEM 154 4.10.1 Béchet’s Pre-Conditioning Scheme 155 4.10.2 Menk–Bordas Pre-Conditioning Scheme 156 5 Large X-FEM Deformation 161 5.1 Introduction 161 5.2 Large FE Deformation 163 5.3 The Lagrangian Large X-FEM Deformation Method 167 5.3.1 The Enrichment of Displacement Field 167 5.3.2 The Large X-FEM Deformation Formulation 170 5.3.3 Numerical Integration Scheme 172 5.4 Numerical Modeling of Large X-FEM Deformations 173 5.4.1 Modeling an Axial Bar with a Weak Discontinuity 173 5.4.2 Modeling a Plate with the Material Interface 177 5.5 Application of X-FEM in Large Deformation Problems 181 5.5.1 Die-Pressing with a Horizontal Material Interface 182 5.5.2 Die-Pressing with a Rigid Central Core 186 5.5.3 Closed-Die Pressing of a Shaped-Tablet Component 188 5.6 The Extended Arbitrary Lagrangian–Eulerian FEM 192 5.6.1 ALE Formulation 192 5.6.1.1 Kinematics 193 5.6.1.2 ALE Governing Equations 194 5.6.2 The Weak Form of ALE Formulation 195 5.6.3 The ALE FE Discretization 196 5.6.4 The Uncoupled ALE Solution 198 5.6.4.1 Material (Lagrangian) Phase 199 5.6.4.2 Smoothing Phase 199 5.6.4.3 Convection (Eulerian) Phase 200 5.6.5 The X-ALE-FEM Computational Algorithm 202 5.6.5.1 Level Set Update 203 5.6.5.2 Stress Update with Sub-Triangular Numerical Integration 204 5.6.5.3 Stress Update with Sub-Quadrilateral Numerical Integration 205 5.7 Application of the X-ALE-FEM Model 208 5.7.1 The Coining Test 208 5.7.2 A Plate in Tension 209 6 Contact Friction Modeling with X-FEM 215 6.1 Introduction 215 6.2 Continuum Model of Contact Friction 216 6.2.1 Contact Conditions: The Kuhn–Tucker Rule 217 6.2.2 Plasticity Theory of Friction 218 6.2.3 Continuum Tangent Matrix of Contact Problem 221 6.3 X-FEM Modeling of the Contact Problem 223 6.3.1 The Gauss–Green Theorem for Discontinuous Problems 223 6.3.2 The Weak Form of Governing Equation for a Contact Problem 224 6.3.3 The Enrichment of Displacement Field 226 6.4 Modeling of Contact Constraints via the Penalty Method 227 6.4.1 Modeling of an Elastic Bar with a Discontinuity at Its Center 231 6.4.2 Modeling of an Elastic Plate with a Discontinuity at Its Center 233 6.5 Modeling of Contact Constraints via the Lagrange Multipliers Method 235 6.5.1 Modeling the Discontinuity in an Elastic Bar 239 6.5.2 Modeling the Discontinuity in an Elastic Plate 240 6.6 Modeling of Contact Constraints via the Augmented-Lagrange Multipliers Method 241 6.6.1 Modeling an Elastic Bar with a Discontinuity 244 6.6.2 Modeling an Elastic Plate with a Discontinuity 245 6.7 X-FEM Modeling of Large Sliding Contact Problems 246 6.7.1 Large Sliding with Horizontal Material Interfaces 249 6.8 Application of X-FEM Method in Frictional Contact Problems 251 6.8.1 An Elastic Square Plate with Horizontal Interface 251 6.8.1.1 Imposing the Unilateral Contact Constraint 252 6.8.1.2 Modeling the Frictional Stick–Slip Behavior 255 6.8.2 A Square Plate with an Inclined Crack 256 6.8.3 A Double-Clamped Beam with a Central Crack 259 6.8.4 A Rectangular Block with an S–Shaped Frictional Contact Interface 261 7 Linear Fracture Mechanics with the X-FEM Technique 267 7.1 Introduction 267 7.2 The Basis of LEFM 269 7.2.1 Energy Balance in Crack Propagation 270 7.2.2 Displacement and Stress Fields at the Crack Tip Area 271 7.2.3 The SIFs 273 7.3 Governing Equations of a Cracked Body 276 7.3.1 The Enrichment of Displacement Field 277 7.3.2 Discretization of Governing Equations 280 7.4 Mixed-Mode Crack Propagation Criteria 283 7.4.1 The Maximum Circumferential Tensile Stress Criterion 283 7.4.2 The Minimum Strain Energy Density Criterion 284 7.4.3 The Maximum Energy Release Rate 284 7.5 Crack Growth Simulation with X-FEM 285 7.5.1 Numerical Integration Scheme 287 7.5.2 Numerical Integration of Contour J–Integral 289 7.6 Application of X-FEM in Linear Fracture Mechanics 290 7.6.1 X-FEM Modeling of a DCB 290 7.6.2 An Infinite Plate with a Finite Crack in Tension 294 7.6.3 An Infinite Plate with an Inclined Crack 298 7.6.4 A Plate with Two Holes and Multiple Cracks 300 7.7 Curved Crack Modeling with X-FEM 304 7.7.1 Modeling a Curved Center Crack in an Infinite Plate 307 7.8 X-FEM Modeling of a Bimaterial Interface Crack 309 7.8.1 The Interfacial Fracture Mechanics 310 7.8.2 The Enrichment of the Displacement Field 311 7.8.3 Modeling of a Center Crack in an Infinite Bimaterial Plate 314 8 Cohesive Crack Growth with the X-FEM Technique 317 8.1 Introduction 317 8.2 Governing Equations of a Cracked Body 320 8.2.1 The Enrichment of Displacement Field 322 8.2.2 Discretization of Governing Equations 323 8.3 Cohesive Crack Growth Based on the Stress Criterion 325 8.3.1 Cohesive Constitutive Law 325 8.3.2 Crack Growth Criterion and Crack Growth Direction 326 8.3.3 Numerical Integration Scheme 328 8.4 Cohesive Crack Growth Based on the SIF Criterion 328 8.4.1 The Enrichment of Displacement Field 329 8.4.2 The Condition for Smooth Crack Closing 332 8.4.3 Crack Growth Criterion and Crack Growth Direction 332 8.5 Cohesive Crack Growth Based on the Cohesive Segments Method 334 8.5.1 The Enrichment of Displacement Field 334 8.5.2 Cohesive Constitutive Law 335 8.5.3 Crack Growth Criterion and Its Direction for Continuous Crack Propagation 336 8.5.4 Crack Growth Criterion and Its Direction for Discontinuous Crack Propagation 339 8.5.5 Numerical Integration Scheme 341 8.6 Application of X-FEM Method in Cohesive Crack Growth 341 8.6.1 A Three-Point Bending Beam with Symmetric Edge Crack 341 8.6.2 A Plate with an Edge Crack under Impact Velocity 343 8.6.3 A Three-Point Bending Beam with an Eccentric Crack 346 9 Ductile Fracture Mechanics with a Damage-Plasticity Model in X-FEM 351 9.1 Introduction 351 9.2 Large FE Deformation Formulation 353 9.3 Modified X-FEM Formulation 356 9.4 Large X-FEM Deformation Formulation 359 9.5 The Damage–Plasticity Model 364 9.6 The Nonlocal Gradient Damage Plasticity 368 9.7 Ductile Fracture with X-FEM Plasticity Model 369 9.8 Ductile Fracture with X-FEM Non-Local Damage-Plasticity Model 372 9.8.1 Crack Initiation and Crack Growth Direction 372 9.8.2 Crack Growth with a Null Step Analysis 375 9.8.3 Crack Growth with a Relaxation Phase Analysis 377 9.8.4 Locking Issues in Crack Growth Modeling 379 9.9 Application of X-FEM Damage-Plasticity Model 380 9.9.1 The Necking Problem 380 9.9.2 The CT Test 383 9.9.3 The Double-Notched Specimen 385 9.10 Dynamic Large X-FEM Deformation Formulation 387 9.10.1 The Dynamic X-FEM Discretization 388 9.10.2 The Large Strain Model 390 9.10.3 The Contact Friction Model 391 9.11 The Time Domain Discretization: The Dynamic Explicit Central Difference Method 393 9.12 Implementation of Dynamic X-FEM Damage-Plasticity Model 396 9.12.1 A Plate with an Inclined Crack 398 9.12.2 The Low Cycle Fatigue Test 400 9.12.3 The Cyclic CT Test 401 9.12.4 The Double Notched Specimen in Cyclic Loading 405 10 X-FEM Modeling of Saturated/Semi-Saturated Porous Media 409 10.1 Introduction 409 10.1.1 Governing Equations of Deformable Porous Media 411 10.2 The X-FEM Formulation of Deformable Porous Media with Weak Discontinuities 414 10.2.1 Approximation of Displacement and Pressure Fields 415 10.2.2 The X-FEM Spatial Discretization 418 10.2.3 The Time Domain Discretization and Solution Procedure 419 10.2.4 Numerical Integration Scheme 421 10.3 Application of the X-FEM Method in Deformable Porous Media with Arbitrary Interfaces 422 10.3.1 An Elastic Soil Column 422 10.3.2 An Elastic Foundation 424 10.4 Modeling Hydraulic Fracture Propagation in Deformable Porous Media 427 10.4.1 Governing Equations of a Fractured Porous Medium 428 10.4.2 The Weak Formulation of a Fractured Porous Medium 430 10.5 The X-FEM Formulation of Deformable Porous Media with Strong Discontinuities 434 10.5.1 Approximation of the Displacement and Pressure Fields 434 10.5.2 The X-FEM Spatial Discretization 437 10.5.3 The Time Domain Discretization and Solution Procedure 438 10.6 Alternative Approaches to Fluid Flow Simulation within the Fracture 442 10.6.1 A Partitioned Solution Algorithm for Interfacial Pressure 442 10.6.2 A Time-Dependent Constant Pressure Algorithm 444 10.7 Application of the X-FEM Method in Hydraulic Fracture Propagation of Saturated Porous Media 445 10.7.1 An Infinite Saturated Porous Medium with an Inclined Crack 446 10.7.2 Hydraulic Fracture Propagation in an Infinite Poroelastic Medium 449 10.7.3 Hydraulic Fracturing in a Concrete Gravity Dam 452 10.8 X-FEM Modeling of Contact Behavior in Fractured Porous Media 455 10.8.1 Contact Behavior in a Fractured Medium 455 10.8.2 X-FEM Formulation of Contact along the Fracture 456 10.8.3 Consolidation of a Porous Block with a Vertical Discontinuity 457 11 Hydraulic Fracturing in Multi-Phase Porous Media with X-FEM 461 11.1 Introduction 461 11.2 The Physical Model of Multi-Phase Porous Media 463 11.3 Governing Equations of Multi-Phase Porous Medium 465 11.4 The X-FEM Formulation of Multi-Phase Porous Media with Weak Discontinuities 467 11.4.1 Approximation of the Primary Variables 469 11.4.2 Discretization of Equilibrium and Flow Continuity Equations 473 11.4.3 Solution Procedure of Discretized Equilibrium Equations 476 11.5 Application of X-FEM Method in Multi-Phase Porous Media with Arbitrary Interfaces 477 11.6 The X-FEM Formulation for Hydraulic Fracturing in Multi-Phase Porous Media 482 11.7 Discretization of Multi-Phase Governing Equations with Strong Discontinuities 487 11.8 Solution Procedure for Fully Coupled Nonlinear Equations 493 11.9 Computational Notes in Hydraulic Fracture Modeling 497 11.10 Application of the X-FEM Method to Hydraulic Fracture Propagation of Multi-Phase Porous Media 499 12 Thermo-Hydro-Mechanical Modeling of Porous Media with X-FEM 509 12.1 Introduction 509 12.2 THM Governing Equations of Saturated Porous Media 511 12.3 Discontinuities in a THM Medium 513 12.4 The X-FEM Formulation of THM Governing Equations 514 12.4.1 Approximation of Displacement, Pressure, and Temperature Fields 515 12.4.2 The X-FEM Spatial Discretization 517 12.4.3 The Time Domain Discretization 520 12.5 Application of the X-FEM Method to THM Behavior of Porous Media 521 12.5.1 A Plate with an Inclined Crack in Thermal Loading 521 12.5.2 A Plate with an Edge Crack in Thermal Loading 522 12.5.3 An Impermeable Discontinuity in Saturated Porous Media 524 12.5.4 An Inclined Fault in Porous Media 527 References 533 Index 557

Read more less

Book SynopsisThe encyclopedia will be an invaluable source of information for researchers and students from diverse backgrounds including physics, chemistry, materials science and surface engineering, biotechnology, pharmacy, medical science, and biomedical engineering. .Table of Contents1 Room Temperature Vulcanized Silicone Rubber Coatings: Application in High Voltage Substations 3 Kiriakos Siderakis and Dionisios Pylarinos 1.1 Introduction 3 1.2 Pollution of High Voltage Insulators 4 1.3 Silicone Coatings for High Voltage Ceramic Insulators 5 1.4 RTV SIR Coatings Formulation 6 1.5 Hydrophobicity in RTV SIR 10 1.6 Electrical Performance of RTV SIR Coatings 13 1.7 Conclusions 13 References 13 2 Silicone Copolymers: Enzymatic Synthesis and Properties 19 Yadagiri Poojari 2.1 Introduction 19 2.2 Polysiloxanes 20 2.3 Silicone Aliphatic Polyesters 20 2.4 Silicone Aliphatic Polyesteramides 21 2.5 Silicone Fluorinated Aliphatic Polyesteramides 21 2.6 Silicone Aromatic Polyesters and Polyamides 21 2.7 Silicone Polycaprolactone 22 2.8 Silicone Polyethers 23 2.9 Silicone Sugar Conjugates 24 2.10 Stereo-Selective Esterification of Organosiloxanes 24 2.11 Conclusion and Outlook 25 Acknowledgments 25 References 25 3 Phosphorus Containing Siliconized Epoxy Resins 27 S. Ananda Kumar, M. Alagar and M. Mandhakini 3.1 Introduction 27 3.2 Preparation of Siliconized Epoxy-Bismaleimide Intercrosslinked Matrices 29 3.3 Phosphorus-Containing Siliconized Epoxy Resin as Thermal and Flame Retardant Coatings 31 3.4 High Functionality Resins for the Fabrication of Nanocomposites 33 3.5 Anticorrosive and Antifouling Coating Performance of Siloxane- and Phosphorus-Modified Epoxy Composites 39 3.6 Summary and Conclusion 46 Acknowledgement 48 References 49 4 Nanostructured Silicone Materials 51 Joanna Lewandowska-Lañcucka, Mariusz Kepczynski and Maria Nowakowska 4.1 Introduction 51 4.2 Solid Particles 52 4.3 Nanocapsules 56 4.4 Ultra-Thin Silicone Films 60 4.5 Conclusion and Outlook 61 References 62 5 High Refractive Index Silicone 65 Zulkifli Ahmad 5.1 Introduction 65 5.2 Theory of RI 66 5.3 High Refractive Index Silicone 69 5.4 Applications 71 5.5 Conclusion and Outlook 74 6 Irradiation Induced Chemical and Physical Effects in Silicones 75 R. Huszank 6.1 Introduction 75 6.2 Sources of Irradiation 76 6.3 Irradiation-Induced Chemical Effects in Silicones 77 6.4 Irradiation-Induced Physical Effects in Silicones 81 6.5 Conclusion and Outlook 83 7 Developments and Properties of Reinforced Silicone Rubber Nanocomposites 85 Suneel Kumar Srivastava and Bratati Pradhan 7.1 Introduction 85 7.2 Different Types of Nanofillers Used in Silicone Rubber (SR) 86 7.3 Preparation of Silicone Rubber (SR) Nanocomposites 89 7.4 Morphology of Silicone Rubber (SR) Nanocomposites 90 7.5 Properties of Silicone Rubber Nanocomposites 94 7.6 Conclusion and Outlook 105 References 105 8 Functionalization of Silicone Rubber Surfaces towards Biomedical Applications 111 Lígia R. Rodrigues and Fernando Dourado 8.1 Introduction 111 8.2 Silicone Rubber – Material of Excellence for Biomedical Applications? 111 8.3 Surface Modification of Silicone Rubber 113 8.4 Conclusion and Outlook 119 References 120 9 Functionalization of Colloidal Silica Nanoparticles and Their Use in Paint and Coatings 123 Peter Greenwood and Anders Törncrona 9.1 Introduction to Colloidal Silica 123 9.2 Chemistry of Silica Surface Functionalization by Organosilanes 124 9.3 Characterization and Product Properties of Silane-Modified Silica Dispersions 125 9.4 Applications for Silanized Silica Nanoparticles in Paint and Coatings 130 9.5 Conclusion and Outlook 139 References 139 10 Surface Modification of PDMS in Microfluidic Devices 141 Wenjun Qiu, Chaoqun Wu and Zhigang Wu 10.1 Introduction 141 10.2 PDMS Surface Modification Techniques 142 10.3 Characterization Techniques 147 10.4 Discussion and Perspectives 148 Part 2: Characterization 151 11 The Development and Application of NMR Methodologies for the Study of Degradation in Complex Silicones 153 Robert S. Maxwell, James Lewicki, Brian P. Mayer, Amitesh Maiti and Stephen J. Harley 11.1 Introduction 153 11.2 Applications of NMR for Characterizing Silicones 155 11.3 Highlights of Recent Advances in NMR Methodology 159 11.4 Conclusions and Outlook 173 Acknowledgements 173 12 Applications of Some Spectroscopic Techniques on Silicones and Precursor to Silicones 177 Atul Tiwari 12.1 Introduction 177 12.2 Fourier Transformation Infrared and Spectroscopy of Silicones 178 12.3 Raman Spectroscopy of Silicones 181 12.4 FTIR-Assisted Chemical Component Analysis in Thermal Degradation of Silicones 182 12.5 X-ray Photoelectron Spectroscopy of Silicones 183 12.6 Secondary Ion Mass Spectroscopy 187 12.7 Conclusion and Outlook 187 Acknowledgement 187 References 188 13 Degradative Thermal Analysis of Engineering Silicones 191 James P. Lewicki and Robert S. Maxwell 13.1 Degradative Thermal Analysis of Engineering Silicones 191 13.2 Conclusions and Outlook 209 Acknowledgments 209 References 209 14 High Frequency Properties and Applications of Elastomeric Silicones 211 Charan M. Shah, Withawat Withayachumnankul, Madhu Bhaskaran and Sharath Sriram 14.1 Introduction 211 14.2 Silicone Microdevice Fabrication 212 14.3 Properties of Silicone at Radio Frequencies (1–20 GHz) 213 14.4 Properties of Silicone at Terahertz Frequencies (0.2 THz – 4.0 THz) 220 14.5 Conclusion and Outlook 223 Acknowledgements 223 References 223 15 Mathematical Modeling of Drug Delivery from Silicone Devices Used in Bovine Estrus Synchronization 225 Ignacio M. Helbling, Juan C.D. Ibarra and Julio A. Luna 15.1 Introduction 225 15.2 Bovine Estrous Cycle 226 15.3 Bovine Estrus Synchronization 228 15.4 Controlled Release Silicone Devices 230 15.5 Mathematical Modeling 232 15.6 Conclusion and Outlook 237 References 238 16 Safety and Toxicity Aspects of Polysiloxanes (Silicones) Applications 243 Krystyna Mojsiewicz-Pieñkowska 16.1 Introduction 243 16.2 Business Strategy for Manufacturing and Sale of Polysiloxanes 243 16.3 Chemical Aspects 244 16.4 Speciation Analysis 245 16.5 Application Areas and Direct Human Contact with Polysiloxanes (Silicones) 246 16.6 Toxicological Aspects 247 16.7 Conclusion and Outlook 249 References 249 17 Structure Properties Interrelations of Silicones for Optimal Design in Biomedical Prostheses 253 Petroula A. Tarantili 17.1 Introduction 253 17.2 Materials and Methods 259 17.3 Discussion of Results 260 17.4 Conclusions and Outlook 267 References 269 Part 3: Applications 273 18 Silicone-Based Soft Electronics 275 Shi Cheng 18.1 Introduction 275 18.2 Silicone-Based Passive Soft Electronics 276 18.3 Silicone-Based Integrated Active Soft Electronics 284 18.4 Conclusion 292 Acknowledgements 292 References 292 19 Silicone Hydrogels Materials for Contact Lens Applications 293 José M. González-Meijome, Javier González-Pérez, Paulo R.B. Fernandes, Daniela P. Lopes-Ferreira, Sergio Mollá and Vicente Compañ 19.1 Introduction 293 19.2 Synthesis and Development of Materials 294 19.3 Surface Properties 295 19.4 Bulk Properties 298 19.5 Biological Interactions 301 19.6 Load and Release of Products from Contact Lenses 304 19.7 Conclusions 305 Disclosure 306 References 306 20 Silicone Membranes for Gas, Vapor and Liquid Phase Separations 309 Paola Bernardo, Gabriele Clarizia, Johannes Carolus Jansen 20.1 Introduction 309 20.2 Material 309 20.3 Membrane Type and Configuration 310 20.4 Membrane Unit Operations Based on Silicones 314 20.5 Conclusions and Outlook 318 References 318 21 Polydimethyl Siloxane Elastomers in Maxillofacial Prosthetic Use 321 H. Serdar Çötert 21.1 Introduction 321 21.2 Facial Prostheses 322 21.3 Polydimethyl Siloxane Elastomers 328 21.4 Reinforcement 333 21.5 Biocompatibility and the Microbiological Features 334 21.6 Future Studies 335 Acknowledgements 335 References 335 22 Silicone Films for Fiber-Optic Chemical Sensing Guillermo Orellana, Juan López-Gejo and Bruno Pedras 22.1 Introduction 339 22.2 Silicone Chemistry and Technology Related to Optical Chemical Sensing 340 22.3 Gas Permeability and Optical Sensing 342 22.4 Optical Properties of Silicone Thin Films 345 22.5 Silicone Films for Optical Oxygen Sensing 346 22.6 Silicone Films for Optical Sensing of Other Species 349 22.7 Conclusion 350 Acknowledgements 350 References 350 23 Surface Design, Fabrication and Properties of Silicone Materials for Use in Tissue Engineering and Regenerative Medicine 355 Nisarg Tambe, Jing Cao, Kewei Xu and Julie A. Willoughby 23.1 Introduction 355 23.2 Silicone Biomaterials 357 23.3 Silicones in Tissue Engineering 359 23.4 Surface Characterization Techniques 366 23.5 Conclusion and Outlook 368 Acknowledgement 368 References 369 24 Silicones for Microfluidic Systems 371 Anna Kowalewska and Maria Nowacka 24.1 Introduction 371 24.2 Fabrication of Microfluidic Devices 372 24.3 Application of PDSM-Based Microfluidic Devices 376 24.4 Summary and Outlook 376 References 376 25 Silicone Oil in Biopharmaceutical Containers: Applications and Recent Concerns 381 Nitin Dixit and Devendra S. Kalonia 25.1 Introduction 381 25.2 Lubrication of Pharmaceutical Containers and Devices 381 25.3 Silicone Oil: A Molecular Perspective 382 25.4 Silicone Oil Coatings in Pharmaceutical Devices 383 25.5 Protein Adsorption to Hydrophobic Interfaces 386 25.6 Physical Stability of Biologics in the Presence of Silicone Oil 389 25.7 Conclusions and Outlook 392 List of Abbreviations 392 References 392 Index

Read more less

Book SynopsisThe topic of wettabilty is extremely important from both fundamental and applied aspects. The applications of wettability range from self-cleaning windows to micro- and nanofluidics. This book represents the cumulative wisdom of a contingent of world-class (researchers engaged in the domain of wettability. In the last few years there has been tremendous interest in the Lotus Leaf Effect and in understanding its mechanism and how to replicate this effect for myriad applications. The topics of superhydrophobicity, omniphobicity and superhydrophilicity are of much contemporary interest and these are covered in depth in this book.Table of ContentsPreface xvii Acknowledgements xxi Part 1: Fundamental Aspects 1 1 Correlation between Contact Line Pinning and Contact Angle Hysteresis on Heterogeneous Surfaces: A Review and Discussion 3 Mohammad Amin Sarshar, Wei Xu, and Chang-Hwan Choi 1.1 Introduction 3 1.2 Contact Line Pinning on Chemically Heterogeneous Flat Surfaces 4 1.3 Contact Line Pinning on Hydrophobic Structured Surfaces 7 1.4 Summary and Conclusion 14 2 Computational and Experimental Study of Contact Angle Hysteresis in Multiphase Systems 19 Vahid Mortazavi, Vahid Hejazi, Roshan M D'Souza, and Michael Nosonovsky 2.1 Introduction 19 2.2 Origins of the CA Hysteresis 24 2.3 Modeling Wetting/Dewetting in Multiphase Systems 27 2.4 Experimental Observations 30 2.5 Numerical Modeling of CA Hysteresis 35 2.6 Conclusions 44 3 Heterogeneous Nucleation on a Completely Wettable Substrate 49 Masao Iwamatsu 3.1 Introduction 49 3.2 Interface-Displacement Model 51 3.3 Nucleation on a Completely-Wettable Flat Substrate 54 3.4 Nucleation on a Completely-Wettable Spherical Substrate 65 3.5 Conclusion 69 4 Local Wetting at Contact Line on Textured Hydrophobic Surfaces 73 Ri Li and Yanguang Shan 4.1 Introduction 73 4.2 Static Contact Angle 76 4.3 Wetting of Single Texture Element 80 4.4 Summary 85 5 Fundamental Understanding of Drops Wettability Behavior Theoretically and Experimentally 87 Hartmann E. N’guessan, Robert White, Aisha Leh, Arnab Baksi, and Rafael Tadmor 5.1 Introduction 87 5.2 Discussion 90 5.3 Conclusion 93 6 Hierarchical Structures Obtained by Breath Figures Self-Assembly and Chemical Etching and their Wetting Properties 97 Edward Bormashenko, Sagi Balter, Roman Grynyov, and Doron Aurbach 6.1 Introduction 97 6.2 Materials and Methods 98 6.3 Results and Discussion 100 6.4 Conclusions 105 7 Computational Aspects of Self-Cleaning Surface Mechanisms 109 Muhammad Osman, Raheel Rasool, and Roger A. Sauer 7.1 Introduction 109 7.2 Droplet Membrane 111 7.3 Flow Model 121 7.4 Results 126 7.5 Summary 129 8 Study of Material–Water Interactions Using the Wilhelmy Plate Method 131 Eric Tomasetti, Sylvie Derclaye, Mary-Hélène Delvaux, and Paul G. Rouxhet 8.1 Introduction 132 8.2 Upgrading Wetting Curves 133 8.3 Study of Surface-Oxidized Polyethylene 136 8.4 Study of Amphiphilic UV-Cured Coatings 143 8.5 Conclusion 151 9 On the Utility of Imaginary Contact Angles in the Characterization of Wettability of Rough Medicinal Hydrophilic Titanium 155 S. Lüers, C. Seitz, M. Laub, and H.P. Jennissen 9.1 Introduction 156 9.2 Theoretical Considerations 156 9.3 Materials and Methods 158 9.4 Results and Discussion 161 9.5 Conclusion 171 10 Determination of Surface Free Energy at the Nanoscale via Atomic Force Microscopy without Altering the Original Morphology 173 L. Mazzola and A. Galderisi 10.1 Introduction 174 10.2 Materials and Methods 175 10.3 Results and Discussion 180 10.4 Conclusion 188 Part 2: Superhydrophobic Surfaces 191 11 Assessment Criteria for Superhydrophobic Surfaces with Stochastic Roughness 193 Angela Duparré and Luisa Coriand 11.1 Introduction 193 11.2 Model and Experiments 194 11.3 Results and Discussion 197 11.4 Summary 200 12 Nanostructured Lubricated Silver Flake/Polymer Composites Exhibiting Robust Superhydrophobicity 203 Ilker S. Bayer, Luigi Martiradonna, and Athanassia Athanassiou 12.1 Introduction 204 12.2 Experimental 210 12.3 Results and Discussion 214 12.4 Conclusions 220 13 Local Wetting Modifi cation on Carnauba Wax-Coated Hierarchical Surfaces by Infrared Laser Treatment 227 Athanasios Milionis, Roberta Ruffi lli, Ilker S. Bayer, Lorenzo Dominici, Despina Fragouli, and Athanassia Athanassiou 13.1 Introduction 228 13.2 Experimental 229 13.3 Results and Discussion 231 13.4 Conclusions 238 Part 3: Wettability Modifi cation 243 14 Cold Radiofrequency Plasma Treatment Modifies Wettability and Germination Rate of Plant Seeds 245 Edward Bormashenko, Roman Grynyov, Yelena Bormashenko, and Elyashiv Drori 14.1 Introduction 245 14.2 Experimental 246 14.3 Results and Discussion 248 14.4 Conclusions 255 15 Controlling the Wettability of Acrylate Coatings with Photo-Induced Micro-Folding 259 Thomas Bahners, Lutz Prager, and Jochen S. Gutmann 15.1 Introduction 260 15.2 The Process of Photo-induced Micro-folding 264 15.3 Experimental 265 15.4 Review of Results 267 15.5 Summary 274 16 Influence of Surface Densification of Wood on its Dynamic Wettability and Surface Free Energy 279 M. Petric, A. Kutnar, L. Rautkari, K. Laine, and M. Hughes 16.1 Introduction 280 16.2 Experimental 281 16.3 Results and Discussion 284 16.4 Summary and Conclusions 294 17 Contact Angle on Two Canadian Woods: Influence of Moisture Content and Plane of Section 297 Fabio Tomczak and Bernard Riedl 17.1 Introduction 297 17.2 Materials and Experimental Procedures 300 17.3 Results and Discussion 302 17.4 Conclusions 307 18 Plasma Deposition of ZnO Thin Film on Sugar Maple: The Effect on Contact Angle 311 Fabio Tomczak, Bernard Riedl, and Pierre Blanchet 18.1 Introduction 312 18.2 Materials and Experimental Procedures 313 18.3 Results and Discussion 316 18.4 Conclusion 325 19 Effect of Relative Humidity on Contact Angle and its Hysteresis on Phospholipid DPPC Bilayer Deposited on Glass 329 Emil Chibowski, Konrad Terpilowski, and Lucyna Holysz 19.1 Introduction 330 19.2 Experimental 331 19.3 Result and Discussion 333 19.4 Conclusion 343 Part 4: Wettability and Surface Free Energy 347 20 Contact Angles and Surface Energy of Solids: Relevance and Limitations 349 Paul G. Rouxhet 20.1 Introduction 350 20.2 Thermodynamic Background 351 20.3 Determination of the Surface Energy of a Solid from Contact Angles 354 20.4 Wettability and Surface Composition of Polypropylene Modifi ed by Oxidation 364 20.5 Wettability and Surface Cleanliness of Inorganic Materials 368 20.6 Conclusion 371 21 Surface Free Energy and Wettability of Different Oil and Gas Reservoir Rocks 377 Andrei S. Zelenev and Nathan Lett 21.1 Introduction 377 21.2 Experimental 379 21.3 Results and Discussion 381 21.4 Conclusions 386 22 Influence of Surface Free Energy and Wettability on Friction Coefficient between Tire and Road Surface in Wet Conditions 389 L. Mazzola, A. Galderisi, G. Fortunato, V. Ciaravola, and M. Giustiniano 22.1 Introduction 390 22.2 Theoretical Basis of the New Model 391 22.3 Materials and Methods 398 22.4 Results and Discussion 402 22.5 Summary and Conclusions 408 Acknowledgement 409 References 409

Read more less

Book SynopsisTheoretical Aerodynamics is a user-friendly text for a full course on theoretical aerodynamics. The author systematically introduces aerofoil theory, its design features and performance aspects, beginning with the basics required, and then gradually proceeding to higher level.Trade Review"Theoretical Aerodynamics is a user-friendly text for a full course on theoretical aerodynamics.... Presented in an easy-to-read style making full use of figures and illustrations to enhance understanding, and moves well simpler to more advanced topics." (Expofairs.com, 20 June 2013) "The main objective of the book is to cover the classical theory for inviscid flow using exact solutions of the linear equations or approximations to the equations with, for example, panel methods and thin aerofoil theory. This provides a good grounding for the student in the basic properties of the fluid flow and results can be achieved by simple calculation." (The Aeronautical Journal, 2015)Table of ContentsAbout the Author xv Preface xvii 1 Basics 1 1.1 Introduction 1 1.2 Lift and Drag 1 1.3 Monoplane Aircraft 4 1.3.1 Types of Monoplane 5 1.4 Biplane 5 1.4.1 Advantages and Disadvantages 6 1.5 Triplane 6 1.5.1 Chord of a Profile 7 1.5.2 Chord of an Aerofoil 8 1.6 Aspect Ratio 9 1.7 Camber 10 1.8 Incidence 11 1.9 Aerodynamic Force 12 1.10 Scale Effect 15 1.11 Force and Moment Coefficients 17 1.12 The Boundary Layer 18 1.13 Summary 20 Exercise Problems 21 Reference 22 2 Essence of Fluid Mechanics 23 2.1 Introduction 23 2.2 Properties of Fluids 23 2.2.1 Pressure 23 2.2.2 Temperature 24 2.2.3 Density 24 2.2.4 Viscosity 25 2.2.5 Absolute Coefficient of Viscosity 25 2.2.6 Kinematic Viscosity Coefficient 27 2.2.7 Thermal Conductivity of Air 27 2.2.8 Compressibility 28 2.3 Thermodynamic Properties 28 2.3.1 Specific Heat 28 2.3.2 The Ratio of Specific Heats 29 2.4 Surface Tension 30 2.5 Analysis of Fluid Flow 31 2.5.1 Local and Material Rates of Change 32 2.5.2 Graphical Description of Fluid Motion 33 2.6 Basic and Subsidiary Laws 34 2.6.1 System and Control Volume 34 2.6.2 Integral and Differential Analysis 35 2.6.3 State Equation 35 2.7 Kinematics of Fluid Flow 35 2.7.1 Boundary Layer Thickness 37 2.7.2 Displacement Thickness 38 2.7.3 Transition Point 39 2.7.4 Separation Point 39 2.7.5 Rotational and Irrotational Motion 40 2.8 Streamlines 41 2.8.1 Relationship between Stream Function and Velocity Potential 41 2.9 Potential Flow 42 2.9.1 Two-dimensional Source and Sink 43 2.9.2 Simple Vortex 45 2.9.3 Source-Sink Pair 46 2.9.4 Doublet 46 2.10 Combination of Simple Flows 49 2.10.1 Flow Past a Half-Body 49 2.11 Flow Past a Circular Cylinder without Circulation 57 2.11.1 Flow Past a Circular Cylinder with Circulation 59 2.12 Viscous Flows 63 2.12.1 Drag of Bodies 65 2.12.2 Turbulence 70 2.12.3 Flow through Pipes 75 2.13 Compressible Flows 78 2.13.1 Perfect Gas 79 2.13.2 Velocity of Sound 80 2.13.3 Mach Number 80 2.13.4 Flow with Area Change 80 2.13.5 Normal Shock Relations 82 2.13.6 Oblique Shock Relations 83 2.13.7 Flow with Friction 84 2.13.8 Flow with Simple T0-Change 86 2.14 Summary 87 Exercise Problems 97 References 102 3 Conformal Transformation 103 3.1 Introduction 103 3.2 Basic Principles 103 3.2.1 Length Ratios between the Corresponding Elements in the Physical and Transformed Planes 106 3.2.2 Velocity Ratios between the Corresponding Elements in the Physical and Transformed Planes 106 3.2.3 Singularities 107 3.3 Complex Numbers 107 3.3.1 Differentiation of a Complex Function 110 3.4 Summary 112 Exercise Problems 113 4 Transformation of Flow Pattern 115 4.1 Introduction 115 4.2 Methods for Performing Transformation 115 4.2.1 By Analytical Means 116 4.3 Examples of Simple Transformation 119 4.4 Kutta−Joukowski Transformation 122 4.5 Transformation of Circle to Straight Line 123 4.6 Transformation of Circle to Ellipse 124 4.7 Transformation of Circle to Symmetrical Aerofoil 125 4.7.1 Thickness to Chord Ratio of Symmetrical Aerofoil 127 4.7.2 Shape of the Trailing Edge 129 4.8 Transformation of a Circle to a Cambered Aerofoil 129 4.8.1 Thickness-to-Chord Ratio of the Cambered Aerofoil 132 4.8.2 Camber 134 4.9 Transformation of Circle to Circular Arc 134 4.9.1 Camber of Circular Arc 137 4.10 Joukowski Hypothesis 137 4.10.1 The Kutta Condition Applied to Aerofoils 139 4.10.2 The Kutta Condition in Aerodynamics 140 4.11 Lift of Joukowski Aerofoil Section 141 4.12 The Velocity and Pressure Distributions on the Joukowski Aerofoil 144 4.13 The Exact Joukowski Transformation Process and Its Numerical Solution 146 4.14 The Velocity and Pressure Distribution 147 4.15 Aerofoil Characteristics 155 4.15.1 Parameters Governing the Aerodynamic Forces 157 4.16 Aerofoil Geometry 157 4.16.1 Aerofoil Nomenclature 157 4.16.2 NASA Aerofoils 161 4.16.3 Leading-Edge Radius and Chord Line 161 4.16.4 Mean Camber Line 161 4.16.5 Thickness Distribution 162 4.16.6 Trailing-Edge Angle 162 4.17 Wing Geometrical Parameters 162 4.18 Aerodynamic Force and Moment Coefficients 166 4.18.1 Moment Coefficient 169 4.19 Summary 171 Exercise Problems 180 Reference 181 5 Vortex Theory 183 5.1 Introduction 183 5.2 Vorticity Equation in Rectangular Coordinates 184 5.2.1 Vorticity Equation in Polar Coordinates 186 5.3 Circulation 188 5.4 Line (point) Vortex 192 5.5 Laws of Vortex Motion 194 5.6 Helmholtz’s Theorems 195 5.7 Vortex Theorems 196 5.7.1 Stoke’s Theorem 200 5.8 Calculation of uR, the Velocity due to Rotational Flow 204 5.9 Biot-Savart Law 207 5.9.1 A Linear Vortex of Finite Length 210 5.9.2 Semi-Infinite Vortex 211 5.9.3 Infinite Vortex 211 5.9.4 Helmholtz’s Second Vortex Theorem 216 5.9.5 Helmholtz’s Third Vortex Theorem 220 5.9.6 Helmholtz’s Fourth Vortex Theorem 220 5.10 Vortex Motion 220 5.11 Forced Vortex 223 5.12 Free Vortex 224 5.12.1 Free Spiral Vortex 226 5.13 Compound Vortex 229 5.14 Physical Meaning of Circulation 230 5.15 Rectilinear Vortices 235 5.15.1 Circular Vortex 236 5.16 Velocity Distribution 237 5.17 Size of a Circular Vortex 239 5.18 Point Rectilinear Vortex 239 5.19 Vortex Pair 240 5.20 Image of a Vortex in a Plane 241 5.21 Vortex between Parallel Plates 242 5.22 Force on a Vortex 244 5.23 Mutual action of Two Vortices 244 5.24 Energy due to a Pair of Vortices 244 5.25 Line Vortex 247 5.26 Summary 248 Exercise Problems 254 References 256 6 Thin Aerofoil Theory 257 6.1 Introduction 257 6.2 General Thin Aerofoil Theory 258 6.3 Solution of the General Equation 261 6.3.1 Thin Symmetrical Flat Plate Aerofoil 262 6.3.2 The Aerodynamic Coefficients for a Flat Plate 265 6.4 The Circular Arc Aerofoil 269 6.4.1 Lift, Pitching Moment, and the Center of Pressure Location for Circular Arc Aerofoil 271 6.5 The General Thin Aerofoil Section 275 6.6 Lift, Pitching Moment and Center of Pressure Coefficients for a Thin Aerofoil 278 6.7 Flapped Aerofoil 283 6.7.1 Hinge Moment Coefficient 286 6.7.2 Jet Flap 288 6.7.3 Effect of Operating a Flap 288 6.8 Summary 289 Exercise Problems 294 References 295 7 Panel Method 297 7.1 Introduction 297 7.2 Source Panel Method 297 7.2.1 Coefficient of Pressure 300 7.3 The Vortex Panel Method 302 7.3.1 Application of Vortex Panel Method 302 7.4 Pressure Distribution around a Circular Cylinder by Source Panel Method 305 7.5 Using Panel Methods 309 7.5.1 Limitations of Panel Method 309 7.5.2 Advanced Panel Methods 309 7.6 Summary 329 Exercise Problems 330 Reference 330 8 Finite Aerofoil Theory 331 8.1 Introduction 331 8.2 Relationship between Spanwise Loading and Trailing Vorticity 331 8.3 Downwash 332 8.4 Characteristics of a Simple Symmetrical Loading – Elliptic Distribution 335 8.4.1 Lift for an Elliptic Distribution 336 8.4.2 Downwash for an Elliptic Distribution 336 8.4.3 Drag Dv due to Downwash for Elliptical Distribution 338 8.5 Aerofoil Characteristic with a More General Distribution 339 8.5.1 The Downwash for Modified Elliptic Loading 341 8.6 The Vortex Drag for Modified Loading 343 8.6.1 Condition for Vortex Drag Minimum 345 8.7 Lancaster – Prandtl Lifting Line Theory 347 8.7.1 The Lift 349 8.7.2 Induced Drag 350 8.8 Effect of Downwash on Incidence 353 8.9 The Integral Equation for the Circulation 355 8.10 Elliptic Loading 356 8.10.1 Lift and Drag for Elliptical Loading 357 8.10.2 Lift Curve Slope for Elliptical Loading 359 8.10.3 Change of Aspect Ratio with Incidence 359 8.10.4 Problem II 360 8.10.5 The Lift for Elliptic Loading 363 8.10.6 The Downwash Velocity for Elliptic Loading 366 8.10.7 The Induced Drag for Elliptic Loading 366 8.10.8 Induced Drag Minimum 369 8.10.9 Lift and Drag Calculation by Impulse Method 370 8.10.10 The Rectangular Aerofoil 371 8.10.11 Cylindrical Rectangular Aerofoil 372 8.11 Aerodynamic Characteristics of Asymmetric Loading 372 8.11.1 Lift on the Aerofoil 372 8.11.2 Downwash 372 8.11.3 Vortex Drag 373 8.11.4 Rolling Moment 374 8.11.5 Yawing Moment 376 8.12 Lifting Surface Theory 378 8.12.1 Velocity Induced by a Lifting Line Element 378 8.12.2 Munk’s Theorem of Stagger 381 8.12.3 The Induced Lift 382 8.12.4 Blenk’s Method 383 8.12.5 Rectangular Aerofoil 384 8.12.6 Calculation of the Downwash Velocity 385 8.13 Aerofoils of Small Aspect Ratio 387 8.13.1 The Integral Equation 388 8.13.2 Zero Aspect Ratio 390 8.13.3 The Acceleration Potential 390 8.14 Lifting Surface 391 8.15 Summary 394 Exercise Problems 401 9 Compressible Flows 405 9.1 Introduction 405 9.2 Thermodynamics of Compressible Flows 405 9.3 Isentropic Flow 409 9.4 Discharge from a Reservoir 411 9.5 Compressible Flow Equations 413 9.6 Crocco’s Theorem 414 9.6.1 Basic Solutions of Laplace’s Equation 418 9.7 The General Potential Equation for Three-Dimensional Flow 418 9.8 Linearization of the Potential Equation 420 9.8.1 Small Perturbation Theory 420 9.9 Potential Equation for Bodies of Revolution 423 9.9.1 Solution of Nonlinear Potential Equation 425 9.10 Boundary Conditions 425 9.10.1 Bodies of Revolution 427 9.11 Pressure Coefficient 428 9.11.1 Bodies of Revolution 429 9.12 Similarity Rule 429 9.13 Two-Dimensional Flow: Prandtl-Glauert Rule for Subsonic Flow 429 9.13.1 The Prandtl-Glauert Transformations 429 9.13.2 The Direct Problem-Version I 431 9.13.3 The Indirect Problem (Case of Equal Potentials): P-G Transformation – Version II 434 9.13.4 The Streamline Analogy (Version III): Gothert’s Rule 435 9.14 Prandtl-Glauert Rule for Supersonic Flow: Versions I and II 436 9.14.1 Subsonic Flow 436 9.14.2 Supersonic Flow 436 9.15 The von Karman Rule for Transonic Flow 439 9.15.1 Use of Karman Rule 440 9.16 Hypersonic Similarity 442 9.17 Three-Dimensional Flow: The Gothert Rule 444 9.17.1 The General Similarity Rule 444 9.17.2 Gothert Rule 446 9.17.3 Application to Wings of Finite Span 447 9.17.4 Application to Bodies of Revolution and Fuselage 448 9.17.5 The Prandtl-Glauert Rule 450 9.17.6 The von Karman Rule for Transonic Flow 454 9.18 Moving Disturbance 455 9.18.1 Small Disturbance 456 9.18.2 Finite Disturbance 457 9.19 Normal Shock Waves 457 9.19.1 Equations of Motion for a Normal Shock Wave 457 9.19.2 The Normal Shock Relations for a Perfect Gas 458 9.20 Change of Total Pressure across a Shock 462 9.21 Oblique Shock and Expansion Waves 463 9.21.1 Oblique Shock Relations 464 9.21.2 Relation between β and θ 466 9.21.3 Supersonic Flow over a Wedge 469 9.21.4 Weak Oblique Shocks 471 9.21.5 Supersonic Compression 473 9.21.6 Supersonic Expansion by Turning 475 9.21.7 The Prandtl-Meyer Function 477 9.21.8 Shock-Expansion Theory 477 9.22 Thin Aerofoil Theory 479 9.22.1 Application of Thin Aerofoil Theory 480 9.23 Two-Dimensional Compressible Flows 485 9.24 General Linear Solution for Supersonic Flow 486 9.24.1 Existence of Characteristics in a Physical Problem 488 9.24.2 Equation for the Streamlines from Kinematic Flow Condition 489 9.25 Flow over a Wave-Shaped Wall 491 9.25.1 Incompressible Flow 491 9.25.2 Compressible Subsonic Flow 492 9.25.3 Supersonic Flow 493 9.25.4 Pressure Coefficient 494 9.26 Summary 495 Exercise Problems 509 References 512 10 Simple Flights 513 10.1 Introduction 513 10.2 Linear Flight 513 10.3 Stalling 514 10.4 Gliding 516 10.5 Straight Horizontal Flight 518 10.6 Sudden Increase of Incidence 520 10.7 Straight Side-Slip 521 10.8 Banked Turn 522 10.9 Phugoid Motion 523 10.10 The Phugoid Oscillation 525 10.11 Summary 529 Exercise Problems 531 Further Readings 533 Index 535

Read more less

Book SynopsisA concise introductory course text on continuum mechanics Fundamentals of Continuum Mechanics focuses on the fundamentals of the subject and provides the background for formulation of numerical methods for large deformations and a wide range of material behaviours.Trade Review“Motivated students will benefit from this systematic, disciplined and concise treatment of the fundamentals of continuum mechanics. Many practitioners will also appreciate the logical organization, and the lucid descriptions of such matters as the distinctions between the various common stress and strain measures.” (Pure and Applied Geophysics, 1 November 2015) Table of ContentsPreface xiii Nomenclature xv Introduction 1 Part One Mathematical Preliminaries 3 1 Vectors 5 1.1 Examples 9 1.1.1 9 1.1.2 9 Exercises 9 Reference 11 2 Tensors 13 2.1 Inverse 15 2.2 Orthogonal Tensor 16 2.3 Principal Values 16 2.4 Nth-Order Tensors 18 2.5 Examples 18 2.5.1 18 2.5.2 18 Exercises 19 3 Cartesian Coordinates 21 3.1 Base Vectors 21 3.2 Summation Convention 23 3.3 Tensor Components 24 3.4 Dyads 25 3.5 Tensor and Scalar Products 27 3.6 Examples 29 3.6.1 29 3.6.2 29 3.6.3 29 Exercises 30 Reference 30 4 Vector (Cross) Product 31 4.1 Properties of the Cross Product 32 4.2 Triple Scalar Product 33 4.3 Triple Vector Product 33 4.4 Applications of the Cross Product 34 4.4.1 Velocity due to Rigid Body Rotation 34 4.4.2 Moment of a Force P about O 35 4.5 Non-orthonormal Basis 36 4.6 Example 37 Exercises 37 5 Determinants 41 5.1 Cofactor 42 5.2 Inverse 43 5.3 Example 44 Exercises 44 6 Change of Orthonormal Basis 47 6.1 Change of Vector Components 48 6.2 Definition of a Vector 50 6.3 Change of Tensor Components 50 6.4 Isotropic Tensors 51 6.5 Example 52 Exercises 53 Reference 56 7 Principal Values and Principal Directions 57 7.1 Example 59 Exercises 60 8 Gradient 63 8.1 Example: Cylindrical Coordinates 66 Exercises 67 Part Two Stress 69 9 Traction and Stress Tensor 71 9.1 Types of Forces 71 9.2 Traction on Different Surfaces 73 9.3 Traction on an Arbitrary Plane (Cauchy Tetrahedron) 75 9.4 Symmetry of the Stress Tensor 76 Exercise 77 Reference 77 10 Principal Values of Stress 79 10.1 Deviatoric Stress 80 10.2 Example 81 Exercises 82 11 Stationary Values of Shear Traction 83 11.1 Example: Mohr–Coulomb Failure Condition 86 Exercises 88 12 Mohr’s Circle 89 Exercises 93 Reference 93 Part Three Motion and Deformation 95 13 Current and Reference Configurations 97 13.1 Example 102 Exercises 103 14 Rate of Deformation 105 14.1 Velocity Gradients 105 14.2 Meaning of D 106 14.3 Meaning of W 108 Exercises 109 15 Geometric Measures of Deformation 111 15.1 Deformation Gradient 111 15.2 Change in Length of Lines 112 15.3 Change in Angles 113 15.4 Change in Area 114 15.5 Change in Volume 115 15.6 Polar Decomposition 116 15.7 Example 118 Exercises 118 References 120 16 Strain Tensors 121 16.1 Material Strain Tensors 121 16.2 Spatial Strain Measures 123 16.3 Relations Between D and Rates of EG and U 124 16.3.1 Relation Between Ė and D 124 16.3.2 Relation Between D and U 125 Exercises 126 References 128 17 Linearized Displacement Gradients 129 17.1 Linearized Geometric Measures 130 17.1.1 Stretch in Direction N 130 17.1.2 Angle Change 131 17.1.3 Volume Change 131 17.2 Linearized Polar Decomposition 132 17.3 Small-Strain Compatibility 133 Exercises 135 Reference 135 Part Four Balance of Mass, Momentum, and Energy 137 18 Transformation of Integrals 139 Exercises 142 References 143 19 Conservation of Mass 145 19.1 Reynolds’ Transport Theorem 148 19.2 Derivative of an Integral over a Time-Dependent Region 149 19.3 Example: Mass Conservation for a Mixture 150 Exercises 151 20 Conservation of Momentum 153 20.1 Momentum Balance in the Current State 153 20.1.1 Linear Momentum 153 20.1.2 Angular Momentum 154 20.2 Momentum Balance in the Reference State 155 20.2.1 Linear Momentum 156 20.2.2 Angular Momentum 157 20.3 Momentum Balance for a Mixture 158 Exercises 159 21 Conservation of Energy 161 21.1 Work-Conjugate Stresses 163 Exercises 165 Part Five Ideal Constitutive Relations 167 22 Fluids 169 22.1 Ideal Frictionless Fluid 169 22.2 Linearly Viscous Fluid 171 22.2.1 Non-steady Flow 173 Exercises 175 Reference 176 23 Elasticity 177 23.1 Nonlinear Elasticity 177 23.1.1 Cauchy Elasticity 177 23.1.2 Green Elasticity 178 23.1.3 Elasticity of Pre-stressed Bodies 179 23.2 Linearized Elasticity 182 23.2.1 Material Symmetry 183 23.2.2 Linear Isotropic Elastic Constitutive Relation 185 23.2.3 Restrictions on Elastic Constants 186 23.3 More Linearized Elasticity 187 23.3.1 Uniqueness of the Static Problem 188 23.3.2 Pressurized Hollow Sphere 189 Exercises 191 Reference 194 Index 195

Read more less

Book SynopsisWritten by an internationally recognized authority, Active and Passive Vibration Damping summarizes and presents in one volume the application of viscoelastic damping materials to control vibration and noise of structures, machinery, and vehicles.Table of ContentsPreface xvii List of Symbols xxi Abbreviations xxxi Part I Fundamentals of Viscoelastic Damping 1 1 Vibration Damping 3 1.1 Overview 3 1.2 Passive, Active, and Hybrid Vibration Control 3 1.2.1 Passive Damping 3 1.2.1.1 Free and Constrained Damping Layers 3 1.2.1.2 Shunted Piezoelectric Treatments 4 1.2.1.3 Damping Layers with Shunted Piezoelectric Treatments 5 1.2.1.4 Magnetic Constrained Layer Damping (MCLD) 5 1.2.1.5 Damping with Shape Memory Fibers 6 1.2.2 Active Damping 6 1.2.3 Hybrid Damping 7 1.2.3.1 Active Constrained Layer Damping (ACLD) 7 1.2.3.2 Active Piezoelectric Damping Composites (APDC) 7 1.2.3.3 Electromagnetic Damping Composites (EMDC) 8 1.2.3.4 Active Shunted Piezoelectric Networks 8 1.3 Summary 9 References 9 2 Viscoelastic Damping 11 2.1 Introduction 11 2.2 Classical Models of Viscoelastic Materials 11 2.2.1 Characteristics in the Time Domain 11 2.2.2 Basics for Time Domain Analysis 12 2.2.3 Detailed Time Response of Maxwell and Kelvin–Voigt Models 14 2.2.4 Detailed Time Response of the Poynting–Thomson Model 17 2.3 Creep Compliance and Relaxation Modulus 20 2.3.1 Direct Laplace Transformation Approach 22 2.3.2 Approach of Simultaneous Solution of a Linear Set of Equilibrium, Kinematic, and Constitutive Equations 23 2.4 Characteristics of the VEM in the Frequency Domain 25 2.5 Hysteresis and Energy Dissipation Characteristics of Viscoelastic Materials 27 2.5.1 Hysteresis Characteristics 27 2.5.2 Energy Dissipation 28 2.5.3 Loss Factor 28 2.5.3.1 Relationship between Dissipation and Stored Elastic Energies 28 2.5.3.2 Relationship between Different Strains 29 2.5.4 Storage Modulus 29 2.6 Fractional Derivative Models of Viscoelastic Materials 32 2.6.1 Basic Building Block of Fractional Derivative Models 32 2.6.2 Basic Fractional Derivative Models 33 2.6.3 Other Common Fractional Derivative Models 36 2.7 Viscoelastic versus Other Types of Damping Mechanisms 38 2.8 Summary 40 References 40 3 Characterization of the Properties of Viscoelastic Materials 57 3.1 Introduction 57 3.2 Typical Behavior of Viscoelastic Materials 57 3.3 Frequency Domain Measurement Techniques of the Dynamic Properties of Viscoelastic Material 59 3.3.1 Dynamic, Mechanical, and Thermal Analyzer 60 3.3.2 Oberst Test Beam Method 64 3.3.2.1 Set-Up and Beam Configurations 64 3.3.2.2 Parameter Extraction 66 3.4 Master Curves of Viscoelastic Materials 68 3.4.1 The Principle of Temperature-Frequency Superposition 68 3.4.2 The Use of the Master Curves 71 3.4.3 The Constant Temperature Lines 71 3.5 Time-Domain Measurement Techniques of the Dynamic Properties of Viscoelastic Materials 72 3.5.1 Creep and Relaxation Measurement Methods 73 3.5.1.1 Testing Equipment 73 3.5.1.2 Typical Creep and Relaxation Behavior 74 3.5.1.3 Time-Temperature Superposition 76 3.5.1.4 Boltzmann Superposition Principle 78 3.5.1.5 Relationship between the Relaxation Modulus and Complex Modulus 80 3.5.1.6 Relationship between the Creep Compliance and Complex Compliance 81 3.5.1.7 Relationship between the Creep Compliance and Relaxation Modulus 83 3.5.1.8 Alternative Relationship between the Creep Compliance and Complex Compliance 83 3.5.1.9 Alternative Relationship between the Relaxation Modulus and Complex Modulus 84 3.5.1.10 Summary of the Basic Interconversion Relationship 85 3.5.1.11 Practical Issues in Implementation of Interconversion Relationships 86 3.5.2 Split Hopkinson Pressure Bar Method 94 3.5.2.1 Overview 94 3.5.2.2 Theory of 1D SHPB 95 3.5.2.3 Complex Modulus of a VEM from SHPB Measurements 98 3.5.3 Wave Propagation Method 105 3.5.4 Ultrasonic Wave Propagation Method 109 3.5.4.1 Overview 109 3.5.4.2 Theory 109 3.5.4.3 Measurement of the Phase Velocity and Attenuation Factor 111 3.5.4.4 Typical Attenuation Factors 113 3.6 Summary 115 References 116 4 Viscoelastic Materials 127 4.1 Introduction 127 4.2 Golla–Hughes–McTavish (GHM) Model 127 4.2.1 Motivation of the GHM Model 128 4.2.2 Computation of the Parameters of the GHM Mini-Oscillators 132 4.2.3 On the Structure of the GHM Model 135 4.2.3.1 Other Forms of GHM Structures 135 4.2.3.2 Relaxation Modulus of the GHM Model 135 4.2.4 Structural Finite Element Models of Rods Treated with VEM 137 4.2.4.1 Unconstrained Layer Damping 138 4.2.4.2 Constrained Layer Damping 142 4.3 Structural Finite Element Models of Beams Treated with VEM 150 4.3.1 Degrees of Freedom 150 4.3.2 Basic Kinematic Relationships 151 4.3.3 Stiffness and Mass Matrices of the Beam/VEM Element 152 4.3.4 Equations of Motion of the Beam/VEM Element 153 4.4 Generalized Maxwell Model (GMM) 155 4.4.1 Overview 155 4.4.2 Internal Variable Representation of the GMM 157 4.4.2.1 Single-DOF System 157 4.4.2.2 Multi-Degree of Freedom System 158 4.4.2.3 Condensation of the Internal Degrees of Freedom 159 4.4.2.4 Direct Solution of Coupled Structural and Internal Degrees of Freedom 160 4.5 Augmenting Thermodynamic Field (ATF) Model 163 4.5.1 Overview 163 4.5.2 Equivalent Damping Ratio of the ATF Model 164 4.5.3 Multi-degree of Freedom ATF Model 165 4.5.4 Integration with a Finite Element Model 165 4.6 Fractional Derivative (FD) Models 167 4.6.1 Overview 167 4.6.2 Internal Degrees of Freedom of Fractional Derivative Models 169 4.6.3 Grunwald Approximation of Fractional Derivative 169 4.6.4 Integration Fractional Derivative Approximation with Finite Element 170 4.6.4.1 Viscoelastic Rod 170 4.6.4.2 Beam with Passive Constrained Layer Damping (PCLD) Treatment 172 4.7 Finite Element Modeling of Plates Treated with Passive Constrained Layer Damping 176 4.7.1 Overview 176 4.7.2 The Stress and Strain Characteristics 178 4.7.2.1 The Plate and the Constraining Layers 178 4.7.2.2 The VEM Layer 179 4.7.3 The Potential and Kinetic Energies 179 4.7.4 The Shape Functions 179 4.7.5 The Stiffness Matrices 181 4.7.6 The Mass Matrices 181 4.7.7 The Element and Overall Equations of Motion 182 4.8 Finite Element Modeling of Shells Treated with Passive Constrained Layer Damping 185 4.8.1 Overview 185 4.8.2 Stress–Strain Relationships 186 4.8.2.1 Shell and Constraining Layer 186 4.8.2.2 Viscoelastic Layer 187 4.8.3 Kinetic and Potential Energies 189 4.8.4 The Shape Functions 189 4.8.5 The Stiffness Matrices 189 4.8.6 The Mass Matrices 190 4.8.7 The Element and Overall Equations of Motion 191 4.9 Summary 192 References 196 5 Finite Element Modeling of Viscoelastic Damping by Modal Strain Energy Method 205 5.1 Introduction 205 5.2 Modal Strain Energy (MSE) Method 205 5.3 Modified Modal Strain Energy (MSE) Methods 210 5.3.1 Weighted Stiffness Matrix Method (WSM) 210 5.3.2 Weighted Storage Modulus Method (WSTM) 211 5.3.3 Improved Reduction System Method (IRS) 211 5.3.4 Low Frequency Approximation Method (LFA) 213 5.4 Summary of Modal Strain Energy Methods 215 5.5 Modal Strain Energy as a Metric for Design of Damping Treatments 215 5.6 Perforated Damping Treatments 220 5.6.1 Overview 220 5.6.2 Finite Element Modeling 222 5.6.2.1 Element Energies 224 5.6.2.2 Topology Optimization of Unconstrained Layer Damping 227 5.6.2.3 Sensitivity Analysis 228 5.7 Summary 234 References 234 6 Energy Dissipation in Damping Treatments 243 6.1 Introduction 243 6.2 Passive Damping Treatments of Rods 243 6.2.1 Passive Constrained Layer Damping 243 6.2.1.1 Equation of Motion 243 6.2.1.2 Energy Dissipation 247 6.2.2 Passive Unconstrained Layer Damping 248 6.3 Active Constrained Layer Damping Treatments of Rods 251 6.3.1 Equation of Motion 251 6.3.2 Boundary Control Strategy 253 6.3.3 Energy Dissipation 254 6.4 Passive Constrained Layer Damping Treatments of Beams 257 6.4.1 Basic Equations of Damped Beams 257 6.4.2 Bending Energy of Beams 258 6.4.3 Energy Dissipated in Beams with Passive Constrained Layer Damping 258 6.5 Active Constrained Layer Damping Treatments of Beams 264 6.6 Passive and Active Constrained Layer Damping Treatments of Plates 267 6.6.1 Kinematic Relationships 268 6.6.2 Energies of the PCLD and ACLD Treatments 269 6.6.2.1 The Potential Energies 269 6.6.2.2 The Kinetic Energy 269 6.6.2.3 Work Done 269 6.6.3 The Models of the PCLD and ACLD Treatments 270 6.6.4 Boundary Control of Plates with ACLD Treatments 270 6.6.5 Energy Dissipation and Loss Factors of Plates with PCLD and ACLD Treatments 271 6.7 Passive and Active Constrained Layer Damping Treatments of Axi-Symmetric Shells 274 6.7.1 Background 275 6.7.2 The Concept of the Active Constrained Layer Damping 276 6.7.3 Variational Modeling of the Shell/ACLD System 276 6.7.3.1 Main Assumptions of the Model 276 6.7.3.2 Kinematic Relationships 276 6.7.3.3 Stress-Strain Relationships 277 6.7.3.4 Energies of Shell/ACLD System 279 6.7.3.5 The Model 280 6.7.4 Boundary Control Strategy 282 6.7.4.1 Overview 282 6.7.4.2 Control Strategy 282 6.7.4.3 Implementation of the Boundary Control Strategy 283 6.7.4.4 Transverse Compliance and Longitudinal Deflection 283 6.7.5 Energy Dissipated in the ACLD Treatment of an Axi-Symmetric Shell 287 6.8 Summary 288 References 290 Part II Advanced Damping Treatments 301 7 Vibration Damping of Structures Using Active Constrained Layer Damping 303 7.1 Introduction 303 7.2 Motivation for Using Passive and Active Constrained Layer Damping 303 7.2.1 Base Structure 304 7.2.2 Structure Treated with Unconstrained Passive Layer Damping 306 7.2.3 Structure Treated with Constrained Passive Layer Damping 308 7.2.4 Structure Treated with Active Constrained Passive Layer Damping 311 7.3 Active Constrained Layer Damping for Beams 316 7.3.1 Introduction 316 7.3.2 Concept of Active Constrained Layer Damping 316 7.3.3 Finite Element Modeling of a Beam/ACLD Assembly 318 7.3.3.1 The Model 319 7.3.3.2 Equations of Motion 322 7.3.4 Distributed-Parameter Modeling of a Beam/ACLD Assembly 328 7.3.4.1 Overview 328 7.3.4.2 The Energies and Work Done on the Beam/ACLD Assembly 328 7.3.4.3 The Distributed-Parameter Model 331 7.3.4.4 Globally Stable Boundary Control Strategy 333 7.3.4.5 Implementation of the Globally Stable Boundary Control Strategy 333 7.3.4.6 Response of the Beam/ACLD Assembly 334 7.4 Active Constrained Layer Damping for Plates 336 7.4.1 Control Forces and Moments Generated by the Active Constraining Layer 337 7.4.1.1 The In-Plane Piezoelectric Forces 337 7.4.1.2 The Piezoelectric Moments 338 7.4.1.3 Piezoelectric Sensor 338 7.4.1.4 Control Voltage to Piezoelectric Constraining Layer 339 7.4.2 Equations of Motion 339 7.5 Active Constrained Layer Damping for Shells 344 7.5.1 Control Forces and Moments Generated by the Active Constraining Layer 344 7.5.2 Equations of Motion 344 7.6 Summary 348 References 351 8 Advanced Damping Treatments 361 8.1 Introduction 361 8.2 Stand-Off Damping Treatments 362 8.2.1 Background of Stand-Off Damping Treatments 362 8.2.2 The Stand-Off Damping Treatments 362 8.2.3 Distributed-Parameter Model of the Stand-Off Layer Damping Treatment 364 8.2.3.1 Kinematic Equations 364 8.2.3.2 Constitutive Equations 365 8.2.4 Distributed Transfer Function Method 369 8.2.5 Finite Element Model 370 8.2.6 Summary 375 8.3 Functionally Graded Damping Treatments 375 8.3.1 Background of Functionally Graded Constrained Layer Damping 375 8.3.2 Concept of Constrained Layer Damping with Functionally Graded Viscoelastic Cores 376 8.3.3 Finite Element Model 377 8.3.3.1 Quasi-Static Model of the Passive Constrained Damping Layer of Plunkett and Lee (1970) 377 8.3.3.2 Dispersion Characteristics of Passive Constrained Damping Layer with Uniform and Functionally Graded Cores 383 8.3.4 Summary 390 8.4 Passive and Active Damping Composite Treatments 390 8.4.1 Passive Composite Damping Treatments 390 8.4.2 Active Composite Damping Treatments 394 8.4.3 Finite Element Modeling of Beam with APDC 396 8.4.3.1 Model and Main Assumptions 396 8.4.3.2 Kinematics 397 8.4.3.3 Degrees of Freedom and Shape Functions 398 8.4.3.4 System Energies 398 8.4.3.5 Equations of Motion 400 8.4.3.6 Control Law 400 8.4.4 Summary 408 8.5 Magnetic Damping Treatments 410 8.5.1 Magnetic Constrained Layer Damping Treatments 410 8.5.2 Analysis of Magnetic Constrained Layer Damping Treatments 412 8.5.2.1 Equation of Motion 412 8.5.2.2 Response of the MCLD Treatment 414 8.5.3 Passive Magnetic Composites 415 8.5.3.1 Concept of Passive Magnetic Composite Treatment 417 8.5.3.2 Finite Element Modeling of Beams with PMC Treatment 417 8.5.4 Summary 430 8.6 Negative Stiffness Composites 430 8.6.1 Motivation to Negative Stiffness Composites 431 8.6.1.1 Sinusoidal Excitation 431 8.6.1.2 Impact Loading 436 8.6.1.3 Magnetic Composite with Negative Stiffness Inclusions 438 8.7 Summary 445 References 445 9 Vibration Damping with Shunted Piezoelectric Networks 469 9.1 Introduction 469 9.2 Shunted Piezoelectric Patches 469 9.2.1 Basics of Piezoelectricity 469 9.2.1.1 Effect of Electrical Boundary Conditions 471 9.2.1.2 Effect of Mechanical Boundary Conditions 471 9.2.2 Basics of Shunted Piezo-Networks 472 9.2.2.1 Resistive-Shunted Circuit 474 9.2.2.2 Resistive and Inductive Shunted Circuit 475 9.2.2.3 Resistive, Capacitive, and Inductive Shunted Circuit 477 9.2.3 Electronic Synthesis of Inductances and Negative Capacitances 479 9.2.3.1 Synthesis of Inductors 479 9.2.3.2 Synthesis of Negative Capacitances 480 9.2.4 Why Negative Capacitance Is Effective? 480 9.2.5 Effectiveness of the Negative Capacitance from a Control System Perspective 482 9.2.6 Electrical Analogy of Shunted Piezoelectric Networks 485 9.3 Finite Element Modeling of Structures Treated with Shunted Piezo-Networks 487 9.3.1 Equivalent Complex Modulus Approach of Shunted Piezo-Networks 487 9.3.2 Coupled Electromechanical Field Approach of Shunted Piezo-Networks 491 9.4 Active Shunted Piezoelectric Networks 496 9.4.1 Basic Configurations 496 9.4.2 Dynamic Equations 498 9.4.2.1 Short-Circuit Configuration 498 9.4.2.2 Open-Circuit Configuration 498 9.4.2.3 Resistive-Shunted Configuration 498 9.4.3 More on the Resistive Shunting Configuration 498 9.4.4 Open-Circuit to Resistive Shunting (OC-RS) Configuration 500 9.4.4.1 Dynamic Equations 500 9.4.4.2 Switching Between OC and RS Modes 500 9.4.5 Energy Dissipation of Different Shunting Configurations 503 9.4.5.1 Energy Dissipation with Resistive Shunting 503 9.4.5.2 Energy Dissipation with OC-RS Switched Shunting 503 9.5 Multi-Mode Vibration Control with Shunted Piezoelectric Networks 504 9.5.1 Multi-Mode Shunting Approaches 504 9.5.2 Parameters of Behrens et al.’s Multi-Mode Shunting Network 507 9.5.2.1 Components of the Current Flowing Branches 507 9.5.2.2 Components of the Shunting Branches 507 9.6 Summary 510 References 511 10 Vibration Control with Periodic Structures 523 10.1 Introduction 523 10.2 Basics of Periodic Structures 524 10.2.1 Overview 524 10.2.2 Transfer Matrix Method 525 10.2.2.1 The Transfer Matrix 525 10.2.2.2 Basic Properties of the Transfer Matrix 526 10.3 Filtering Characteristics of Passive Periodic Structures 533 10.3.1 Overview 533 10.3.2 Periodic Rods in Longitudinal Vibrations 534 10.4 Natural Frequencies, Mode Shapes, and Response of Periodic Structures 535 10.4.1 Natural Frequencies and Response 535 10.4.2 Mode Shapes 539 10.5 Active Periodic Structures 541 10.5.1 Modeling of Active Periodic Structures 543 10.5.2 Dynamics of One Cell 543 10.5.2.1 Dynamics of the Passive Sub-Cell 543 10.5.2.2 Dynamics of the Active Sub-Cell 543 10.5.2.3 Dynamics of the Entire Cell 545 10.5.2.4 Dynamics of the Entire Periodic Structure 546 10.6 Localization Characteristics of Passive and Active Aperiodic Structures 549 10.6.1 Overview 549 10.6.2 Localization Factor 550 10.7 Periodic Rod with Periodic Shunted Piezoelectric Patches 559 10.7.1 Transfer Matrix of a Plain Rod Element 559 10.7.2 Transfer Matrix of a Rod/Piezo-Patch Element 560 10.7.3 Transfer Matrix of a Unit Cell 561 10.8 Two-Dimensional Active Periodic Structure 562 10.8.1 Dynamics of Unit Cell 562 10.8.2 Formulation of Phase Constant Surfaces 566 10.8.3 Filtering Characteristics 568 10.9 Periodic Structures with Internal Resonances 569 10.9.1 Dynamics of Conventional Periodic Structure 570 10.9.2 Dynamics of Periodic Structure with Internal Resonances 572 10.9.2.1 Equivalent Mass. Of the Mass-In-Mass Arrangement 572 10.9.2.2 Transfer Matrix of the Mass-In-Mass Arrangement 572 10.10 Summary 578 References 578 11 Nanoparticle Damping Composites 589 11.1 Introduction 589 11.2 Nanoparticle-Filled Polymer Composites 590 11.2.1 Composites with Unidirectional Inclusions 591 11.2.2 Arbitrarily Oriented Inclusion Composites 599 11.3 Comparisons with Classical Filler Reinforcement Methods 607 11.4 Applications of Carbon Black/Polymer Composites 614 11.4.1 Basic Physical Characteristics 614 11.4.2 Modeling of the Piezo-Resistance of CB/Polymer Composites 617 11.4.3 The Piezo-Resistivity of CB/Polymer Composites 619 11.5 CB/Polymer Composite as a Shunting Resistance of Piezoelectric Layers 620 11.5.1 Finite Element Model 620 11.5.2 Condensed Model of a Unit Cell 624 11.6 Hybrid Composites with Shunted Piezoelectric Particles 629 11.6.1 Composite Description and Assumptions 629 11.6.2 Shunted Piezoelectric Inclusions 631 11.6.3 Typical Performance Characteristics of Hybrid Composites 631 11.7 Summary 636 References 636 12 Power Flow in Damped Structures 651 12.1 Introduction 651 12.2 Vibrational Power 651 12.2.1 Basic Definitions 651 12.2.2 Relationship to System Energies 652 12.2.3 Basic Characteristics of the Power Flow 653 12.3 Vibrational Power Flow in Beams 656 12.4 Vibrational Power of Plates 661 12.4.1 Basic Equations of Vibrating Plates 661 12.4.2 Power Flow and Structural Intensity 662 12.4.3 Control of the Power Flow and Structural Intensity 668 12.4.4 Power Flow and Structural Intensity for Plates with Passive and Active Constrained Layer Damping Treatments 671 12.5 Power Flow and Structural Intensity for Shells 679 12.6 Summary 682 References 682 Glossary 699 Appendix 703 Index 715

Read more less

Book SynopsisThis introductory textbook links theory with practice using real illustrative cases involving products, plants and infrastructures and exposes the student to the evolutionary trends in maintenance. Provides an interdisciplinary approach which links, engineering, science, technology, mathematical modelling, data collection and analysis, economics and management Blends theory with practice illustrated through examples relating to products, plants and infrastructures Focuses on concepts, tools and techniques Identifies the special management requirements of various engineered objects (products, plants, and infrastructures) Table of ContentsPreface xxxi Acknowledgments xxxv Abbreviations xxxvii 1 An Overview 1 1.1 Introduction 2 1.2 Classification of Engineered Objects 4 1.3 Performance of Engineered Objects 10 1.4 Maintenance 12 1.5 Evolution of Maintenance 15 1.6 Focus of the Book 17 1.7 Structure and Outline of the Book 18 Review Questions 20 Exercises 21 References 22 Part A Maintenance Engineering and Technology 23 2 Basics of Reliability Theory 25 2.1 Introduction 26 2.2 Decomposition of an Engineered Object 26 2.3 Functions, Failures, and Faults 27 2.4 Characterization of Degradation 31 2.5 Reliability Concept and Characterization 33 2.6 Linking System and Component Failures 36 2.7 Reliability Theory 45 2.8 Summary 45 Review Questions 46 Exercises 47 References 50 3 System Degradation and Failure 51 3.1 Introduction 52 3.2 Failure Mechanisms 52 3.3 Classification of Failure Mechanisms 54 3.4 Dynamic Nature of Stress and Strength 61 3.5 Degradation of Products and Plants 62 3.6 Degradation of Infrastructures 64 Review Questions 69 Exercises 69 References 71 4 Maintenance – Basic Concepts 73 4.1 Introduction 74 4.2 Types of Maintenance Actions 74 4.3 Preventive Maintenance Actions 77 4.4 Corrective Maintenance Actions 83 4.5 Design Out Maintenance 85 4.6 Uptime and Downtime 86 4.7 Warranty and Maintenance 88 4.8 Maintenance of Products 90 4.9 Maintenance of Plants and Facilities 95 4.10 Maintenance of Infrastructures 100 4.11 Effective Maintenance 102 4.12 Summary 103 Review Questions 104 Exercises 104 References 105 5 Life Cycle of Engineered Objects 107 5.1 Introduction 108 5.2 Life Cycle Concept and Classification 108 5.3 Standard Objects 109 5.4 Custom-Built Objects 113 5.5 Reliability: Product Life Cycle Perspective 115 5.6 Life Cycle Cost 118 5.7 Summary 120 Review Questions 120 Exercises 121 References 122 6 Technologies for Maintenance 123 6.1 Introduction 124 6.2 Technology – An Overview 124 6.3 Assessing the State (Condition) of an Item 125 6.4 Sensors 129 6.5 Testing Technologies 137 6.6 Data-Related Technologies 142 6.7 Technologies for Maintenance of Products 144 6.8 Technologies for Maintenance of Plants 144 6.9 Technologies for Maintenance of Infrastructures 148 6.10 Summary 151 Review Questions 152 Exercises 153 References 154 7 Maintainability and Availability 155 7.1 Introduction 156 7.2 Maintainability – An Overview 156 7.3 Elements of Maintainability 158 7.4 Availability 161 7.5 Maintainability Process 163 7.6 Maintainability Standards 165 7.7 Relationship with Other Disciplines 166 7.8 Summary 167 Review Questions 168 Exercises 168 References 169 Part B Reliability and Maintenance Modeling 171 8 Models and the Modeling Process 173 8.1 Introduction 174 8.2 Models 174 8.3 Mathematical Modeling 178 8.4 Approaches to Modeling 182 8.5 Mathematical Modeling Process 185 8.6 Statistics versus Probability Perspectives 189 8.7 Modeling of Maintenance Decision Problems 190 8.8 Summary 191 Review Questions 191 Exercises 192 Reference 193 9 Collection and Analysis of Maintenance Data 195 9.1 Introduction 196 9.2 Data, Information, and Knowledge 196 9.3 Maintenance Data 199 9.4 Data Analysis 201 9.5 Descriptive Statistics 202 9.6 Inferential Statistics 212 9.7 Collection of Maintenance Data for Products 213 9.8 Collection of Maintenance Data for Plants 215 9.9 Collection of Maintenance Data for Infrastructures 218 9.10 Summary 220 Review Questions 221 Exercises 222 References 223 10 Modeling First Failure 225 10.1 Introduction 226 10.2 One-Dimensional Formulations 227 10.3 Two-Dimensional Formulations 230 10.4 Properties of Distribution Functions 232 10.5 Preliminary Data Analysis and Plots 236 10.6 Selection of a Mathematical Formulation 241 10.7 Parameter Estimation 242 10.8 Model Validation 246 10.9 Examples 247 10.10 Summary 253 Review Questions 254 Exercises 254 References 255 11 Modeling CM and PM Actions 257 11.1 Introduction 258 11.2 Modeling CM Actions 258 11.3 Modeling PM Actions 262 11.4 Repair Times and Downtimes 266 11.5 Maintenance Costs 269 11.6 Repair–Replace Decisions 272 11.7 Modeling Fleet and Infrastructure Maintenance 273 11.8 Summary 273 Review Questions 274 Exercises 275 References 276 12 Modeling Subsequent Failures 277 12.1 Introduction 278 12.2 System Characterization for Modeling 278 12.3 Mathematical Formulations for Modeling 280 12.4 Subsequent Failures with Only CM Actions 283 12.5 Subsequent Failures with Both CM and PM Actions 285 12.6 Data-Based Modeling 287 12.7 Summary 295 Review Questions 296 Exercises 296 References 298 Part C Maintenance Decision Models and Optimization 299 13 Optimal Maintenance 301 13.1 Introduction 302 13.2 Framework for Optimal Maintenance Decisions 302 13.3 Maintenance Policy 303 13.4 Decision Parameters 304 13.5 Objective Function 305 13.6 Optimization Model 306 13.7 Information 306 13.8 Optimization 307 13.9 Summary 308 Review Questions 308 Exercises 308 Reference 309 14 Maintenance Optimization for Non-Repairable Items 311 14.1 Introduction 312 14.2 Preliminaries 312 14.3 Infinite Time Horizon 314 14.4 Group Replacement 322 14.5 Finite Time Horizon 323 14.6 Inspection Policies 325 14.7 Summary 327 Review Questions 327 Exercises 328 Reference 329 15 Maintenance Optimization for Repairable Items 331 15.1 Introduction 332 15.2 Preliminaries 332 15.3 Group I Scenarios 334 15.4 Group II Scenarios 338 15.5 Group III Scenarios 344 15.6 Multi-Item Policies 350 15.7 Summary 351 Review Questions 352 Exercises 352 References 354 16 Condition-Based Maintenance 355 16.1 Introduction 356 16.2 Characterization of Degradation 357 16.3 Approach to CBM 359 16.4 Diagnostics, Prognostics, and CBM 364 16.5 Summary 382 Review Questions 384 Exercises 384 References 386 Part D Maintenance Management 389 17 Maintenance Management 391 17.1 Introduction 392 17.2 Management 393 17.3 Maintenance Management 401 17.4 Maintenance Organization 403 17.5 Approaches to Maintenance 407 17.6 Risk and Maintenance 410 17.7 Maintenance Management System 415 17.8 Summary 417 Review Questions 418 Exercises 418 References 419 18 Maintenance Outsourcing and Leasing 421 18.1 Introduction 422 18.2 Outsourcing 422 18.3 Maintenance Outsourcing 424 18.4 Framework for Maintenance Outsourcing Decision Making 426 18.5 Optimal Decisions 429 18.6 Leasing 436 18.7 MSCs for Products and Plants 438 18.8 Infrastructures 444 18.9 Summary 447 Review Questions 448 Exercises 449 References 450 19 Maintenance Planning, Scheduling, and Control 451 19.1 Introduction 452 19.2 Maintenance Planning 452 19.3 Tactical-Level Maintenance Planning 454 19.4 Operational-Level Maintenance Planning 458 19.5 Maintenance Control 462 19.6 Maintenance Control System 464 19.7 Maintenance of Products 465 19.8 Maintenance of Plants 468 19.9 Maintenance of Infrastructures 470 19.10 Summary 471 Review Questions 472 Exercises 472 Reference 473 20 Maintenance Logistics 475 20.1 Introduction 476 20.2 Logistics 476 20.3 Key Elements of Maintenance Logistics 478 20.4 Service Facilities 479 20.5 Human Resources 480 20.6 Inventories 480 20.7 New Item Inventory Management 484 20.8 Repairable Items Inventory Management 487 20.9 Maintenance Logistics for Products 488 20.10 Maintenance Logistics for Plants 491 20.11 Maintenance Logistics for Infrastructures 492 20.12 Summary 493 Review Questions 494 Exercises 494 References 495 21 Maintenance Economics 497 21.1 Introduction 498 21.2 Basic Concepts and Terms 498 21.3 Capital Investment 502 21.4 Cost Elements of Capital Investment 505 21.5 Life Cycle Cost 506 21.6 Capital Equipment Replacement 509 21.7 Buy versus Lease Decisions 515 21.8 LCCA for Products and Plants 519 21.9 LCCA for Infrastructures 520 21.10 Summary 522 Review Questions 523 Exercises 523 References 525 22 Computerized Maintenance Management Systems and e-Maintenance 527 22.1 Introduction 528 22.2 Role of Technology in Maintenance Management 528 22.3 Computerized Maintenance Management Systems (CMMSs) 530 22.4 e-Maintenance 534 22.5 Applications of e-Maintenance 538 22.6 Summary 543 Review Questions 544 Exercises 545 References 546 Part E Case Studies 547 23 Case Studies 549 23.1 Introduction 549 23.2 Case Study 1 – Hydraulic Pump Maintenance 549 23.3 Case Study 2 – Maintenance of Rail Track 559 Part F Appendices 575 Appendix A: Introduction to Probability Theory 577 A.1 Basics of Probability 577 A.2 Random Variables 578 A.3 Characterization of a Univariate Random Variable 579 A.4 Some Basic Univariate Discrete Distribution Functions 580 A.5 Some Basic Univariate Continuous Distribution Functions 581 A.6 Bivariate Random Variables 587 A.7 Sums of Independent Random Variables 590References 591 Appendix B: Introduction to Stochastic Processes 593 B.1 Basic Concept 593 B.2 Characterization of a Stochastic Process 593 B.3 Classification of Markov Processes 594 B.4 Point Processes 596 B.5 Poisson Processes 597 B.6 Renewal Processes 599 B.7 Marked Point Processes 603References 604 Appendix C: Introduction to the Theory of Statistics 605 C.1 Introduction 605 C.2 Descriptive Statistics 605 C.3 Inferential Statistics 609 References 612 Appendix D: Introduction to Optimization 613 D.1 Introduction 613 D.2 Case A 615 D.3 Case B 617 D.4 Case C 619 D.5 Case D 622 References 623 Appendix E: Data Sets 625 Data Set E.1 Battery (Component of a Bus) 625 Data Set E.2 Automobile (Repair Costs) 625 Data Set E.3 Photocopier 625 Data Set E.4 Throttle Valve (Automobile Component) 628 Data Set E.5 Valve Seat Replacement for Diesel Engines 628 Data Set E.6 Heavy Vehicle 628 Data Set E.7 Buses 628 Data Set E.8 Buses 629 Data Set E.9 Hydraulic Pumps 631 Data Set E.10 Shock Absorber 634 References 634 Index 635

Read more less

Book SynopsisENGINEERING ACOUSTICS NOISE AND VIBRATION CONTROL A masterful introduction to the theory of acoustics along with methods for the control of noise and vibration In Engineering Acoustics: Noise and Vibration Control, two experts in the field review the fundamentals of acoustics, noise, and vibration. The authors show how this theoretical work can be applied to real-world problems such as the control of noise and vibration in aircraft, automobiles and trucks, machinery, and road and rail vehicles. Engineering Acoustics: Noise and Vibration Control covers a wide range of topics. The sixteen chapters include the following: Human hearing and individual and community response to noise and vibration Noise and vibration instrumentation and measurements Interior and exterior noise of aircraft as well as road and rail vehicles Methods for the control of noise and vibration in industrial equipment and machinery Table of ContentsSeries Preface xix Preface xxi Acknowledgements xxiii 1 Introduction 1 1.1 Introduction 1 1.2 Types of Noise and Vibration Signals 1 1.2.1 Stationary Signals 2 1.2.2 Nonstationary Signals 2 1.3 Frequency Analysis 3 1.3.1 Fourier Series 3 1.3.2 Nonperiodic Functions and the Fourier Spectrum 6 1.3.3 Random Noise 6 1.3.4 Mean Square Values 8 1.3.5 Energy and Power Spectral Densities 9 1.4 Frequency Analysis Using Filters 10 1.5 Fast Fourier Transform Analysis 15 References 17 2 Vibration of Simple and Continuous Systems 19 2.1 Introduction 19 2.2 Simple Harmonic Motion 19 2.2.1 Period, Frequency, and Phase 20 2.2.2 Velocity and Acceleration 21 2.3 Vibrating Systems 23 2.3.1 Mass–Spring System 23 2.4 Multi-Degree of Freedom Systems 30 2.4.1 Free Vibration – Undamped 31 2.4.2 Forced Vibration – Undamped 34 2.4.3 Effect of Damping 36 2.5 Continuous Systems 38 2.5.1 Vibration of Beams 38 2.5.2 Vibration of Thin Plates 41 References 46 3 Sound Generation and Propagation 49 3.1 Introduction 49 3.2 Wave Motion 49 3.3 Plane Sound Waves 50 3.3.1 Sound Pressure 54 3.3.2 Particle Velocity 54 3.3.3 Impedance and Sound Intensity 55 3.3.4 Energy Density 55 3.3.5 Sound Power 56 3.4 Decibels and Levels 56 3.4.1 Sound Pressure Level 56 3.4.2 Sound Power Level 57 3.4.3 Sound Intensity Level 57 3.4.4 Combination of Decibels 58 3.5 Three-dimensional Wave Equation 60 3.6 Sources of Sound 61 3.6.1 Sound Intensity 63 3.7 Sound Power of Sources 63 3.7.1 Sound Power of Idealized Sound Sources 63 3.8 Sound Sources Above a Rigid Hard Surface 67 3.9 Directivity 68 3.9.1 Directivity Factor (Q(θ, ϕ)) 70 3.9.2 Directivity Index 71 3.10 Line Sources 71 3.11 Reflection, Refraction, Scattering, and Diffraction 72 3.12 Ray Acoustics 74 3.13 Energy Acoustics 75 3.14 Near Field, Far Field, Direct Field, and Reverberant Field 76 3.14.1 Reverberation 76 3.14.2 Sound Absorption 77 3.14.3 Reverberation Time 78 3.15 Room Equation 80 3.15.1 Critical Distance 81 3.15.2 Noise Reduction 82 3.16 Sound Radiation From Idealized Structures 82 3.17 Standing Waves 85 3.18 Waveguides 91 3.19 Other Approaches 92 3.19.1 Acoustical Lumped Elements 92 3.19.2 Numerical Approaches: Finite Elements and Boundary Elements 92 3.19.3 Acoustic Modeling Using Equivalent Circuits 93 References 93 4 Human Hearing, Speech and Psychoacoustics 95 4.1 Introduction 95 4.2 Construction of Ear and Its Working 95 4.2.1 Construction of the Ear 95 4.2.2 Working of the Ear Mechanism 98 4.2.3 Theories of Hearing 98 4.3 Subjective Response 99 4.3.1 Hearing Envelope 99 4.3.2 Loudness Measurement 99 4.3.3 Masking 103 4.3.4 Pitch 107 4.3.5 Weighted Sound Pressure Levels 108 4.3.6 Critical Bands 111 4.3.7 Frequency (Bark) 112 4.3.8 Zwicker Loudness 113 4.3.9 Loudness Adaptation 115 4.3.10 Empirical Loudness Meter 115 4.4 Hearing Loss and Diseases (Disorders) 116 4.4.1 Conduction Hearing Loss 116 4.4.2 Sensory-Neural Hearing Loss 117 4.4.3 Presbycusis 118 4.5 Speech Production 118 References 122 5 Effects of Noise, Vibration, and Shock on People 125 5.1 Introduction 125 5.2 Sleep Disturbance 125 5.3 Annoyance 126 5.4 Cardiovascular Effects 127 5.5 Cognitive Impairment 129 5.6 Infrasound, Low-Frequency Noise, and Ultrasound 130 5.7 Intense Noise and Hearing Loss 131 5.7.1 Theories for Noise-Induced Hearing Loss 132 5.7.2 Impulsive and Impact Noise 133 5.8 Occupational Noise Regulations 134 5.8.1 Daily Noise Dose and Time-Weighted Average Calculation 137 5.9 Hearing Protection 140 5.9.1 Hearing Protectors 140 5.9.2 Hearing Conservation Programs 143 5.10 Effects of Vibration on People 144 5.11 Metrics to Evaluate Effects of Vibration and Shock on People 147 5.11.1 Acceleration Frequency Weightings 147 5.11.2 Whole-Body Vibration Dose Value 147 5.11.3 Evaluation of Hand-Transmitted Vibration 149 References 151 6 Description, Criteria, and Procedures Used to Determine Human Response to Noise and Vibration 155 6.1 Introduction 155 6.2 Loudness and Annoyance 155 6.3 Loudness and Loudness Level 156 6.4 Noisiness and Perceived Noise Level 157 6.4.1 Noisiness 157 6.4.2 Effective Perceived Noise Level 159 6.5 Articulation Index and Speech Intelligibility Index 160 6.6 Speech Interference Level 161 6.7 Indoor Noise Criteria 162 6.7.1 NC Curves 162 6.7.2 NR Curves 163 6.7.3 RC Curves 163 6.7.4 Balanced NC Curves 165 6.8 Equivalent Continuous SPL 166 6.9 Sound Exposure Level 167 6.10 Day–Night Equivalent SPL 168 6.11 Percentile SPLs 170 6.12 Evaluation of Aircraft Noise 170 6.12.1 Composite Noise Rating 171 6.12.2 Noise Exposure Forecast 172 6.12.3 Noise and Number Index 172 6.12.4 Equivalent A-Weighted SPL Leq, Day–Night Level Ldn, and Day–Evening–Night Level Lden 172 6.13 Evaluation of Traffic Noise 172 6.13.1 Traffic Noise Index 172 6.13.2 Noise Pollution Level 173 6.13.3 Equivalent SPL 173 6.14 Evaluation of Community Noise 174 6.15 Human Response 175 6.15.1 Sleep Interference 175 6.15.2 Annoyance 176 6.16 Noise Criteria and Noise Regulations 180 6.16.1 Noise Criteria 180 6.17 Human Vibration Criteria 182 6.17.1 Human Comfort in Buildings 182 6.17.2 Effect of Vibration on Buildings 184 References 185 7 Noise and Vibration Transducers, Signal Processing, Analysis, and Measurements 189 7.1 Introduction 189 7.2 Typical Measurement Systems 189 7.3 Transducers 190 7.3.1 Transducer Characteristics 191 7.3.2 Sensitivity 191 7.3.3 Dynamic Range 193 7.3.4 Frequency Response 195 7.4 Noise Measurements 195 7.4.1 Types of Microphones for Noise Measurements 196 7.4.2 Directivity 199 7.4.3 Transducer Calibration 199 7.5 Vibration Measurements 202 7.5.1 Principle of Seismic Mass Transducers 203 7.5.2 Piezoelectric Accelerometers 206 7.5.3 Measurement Difficulties 208 7.5.4 Calibration, Metrology, and Traceability of Shock and Vibration Transducers 211 7.6 Signal Analysis, Data Processing, and Specialized Noise And Vibration Measurements 211 7.6.1 Signal Analysis and Data Processing 211 7.6.2 Sound Level Meters (SLMs) and Dosimeters 211 7.6.3 Sound Power and Sound Intensity 212 7.6.4 Modal Analysis 212 7.6.5 Condition Monitoring 213 7.6.6 Advanced Noise and Vibration Analysis and Measurement Techniques 213 References 214 8 Sound Intensity, Measurements and Determination of Sound Power, Noise Source Identification, and Transmission Loss 217 8.1 Introduction 217 8.2 Historical Developments in the Measurement of Sound Pressure and Sound Intensity 217 8.3 Theoretical Background 221 8.4 Characteristics of Sound Fields 223 8.4.1 Active and Reactive Intensity 223 8.4.2 Plane Progressive Waves 223 8.4.3 Standing Waves 225 8.4.4 Vibrating Piston in a Tube 226 8.5 Active and Reactive Sound Fields 228 8.5.1 The Monopole Source 228 8.5.2 The Dipole Source 230 8.5.3 General Case 230 8.6 Measurement of Sound Intensity 232 8.6.1 The p–p Method 232 8.6.2 The p–u Method 246 8.6.3 The Surface Intensity Method 251 8.7 Applications 253 8.7.1 Sound Power Determination 255 8.7.2 Noise Source Identification 259 8.7.3 Noise Source Identification on a Diesel Engine Using Sound Intensity 259 8.7.4 Measurements of the Transmission Loss of Structures Using Sound Intensity 265 8.8 Comparison Between Sound Power Measurements Using Sound Intensity and Sound Pressure Methods 275 8.8.1 Sound Intensity Method 277 8.8.2 Sound Pressure Method 278 8.9 Standards for Sound Intensity Measurements 280 References 282 9 Principles of Noise and Vibration Control 287 9.1 Introduction 287 9.2 Systematic Approach to Noise Problems 287 9.2.1 Noise and Vibration Source Identification 288 9.2.2 Noise Reduction Techniques 290 9.3 Use of Vibration Isolators 290 9.3.1 Theory of Vibration Isolation 291 9.3.2 Machine Vibration 294 9.3.3 Use of Inertia Blocks 295 9.3.4 Other Considerations 296 9.4 Use of Damping Materials 296 9.4.1 Unconstrained Damping Layer 298 9.4.2 Constrained Damping Layer 299 9.5 Use of Sound Absorption 300 9.5.1 Sound Absorption Coefficient 300 9.5.2 Noise Reduction Coefficient 300 9.5.3 Absorption by Porous Fibrous Materials 301 9.5.4 Panel or Membrane Absorbers 306 9.5.5 Helmholtz Resonator Absorbers 307 9.5.6 Perforated Panel Absorbers 310 9.5.7 Slit Absorbers 312 9.5.8 Suspended Absorbers 314 9.5.9 Acoustical Spray-on Materials 314 9.5.10 Acoustical Plaster 315 9.5.11 Measurement of Sound Absorption Coefficients 316 9.5.12 Optimization of the Reverberation Time 316 9.5.13 Reduction of the Sound Pressure Level in Reverberant Fields 318 9.6 Acoustical Enclosures 319 9.6.1 Reverberant Sound Field Model for Enclosures 319 9.6.2 Machine Enclosure in Free Field 320 9.6.3 Simple Enclosure Design Assuming Diffuse Reverberant Sound Fields 321 9.6.4 Close-Fitting Enclosures 325 9.6.5 Partial Enclosures 327 9.6.6 Other Considerations 328 9.7 Use of Barriers 330 9.7.1 Transmission Loss of Barriers 334 9.7.2 Use of Barriers Indoors 334 9.7.3 Reflections from the Ground 337 9.7.4 Use of Barriers Outdoors 338 9.8 Active Noise and Vibration Control 339 References 344 10 Mufflers and Silencers – Absorbent and Reactive Types 351 10.1 Introduction 351 10.2 Muffler Classification 351 10.3 Definitions of Muffler Performance 352 10.4 Reactive Mufflers 352 10.5 Historical Development of Reactive Muffler Theories 354 10.6 Classical Reactive Muffler Theory 358 10.6.1 Transmission Line Theory 358 10.6.2 TL of Resonators 359 10.6.3 NACA 1192 Study on Reactive Muffler TL 368 10.6.4 Transfer Matrix Theory 371 10.7 Exhaust System Modeling 374 10.7.1 Transmission Loss 374 10.7.2 Insertion Loss 375 10.7.3 Sound Pressure Radiated from Tailpipe 376 10.8 Tail Pipe Radiation Impedance, Source Impedance and Source Strength 377 10.8.1 Tail Pipe Radiation 377 10.8.2 Internal Combustion Engine Impedance and Source Strength 378 10.9 Numerical Modeling of Muffler Acoustical Performance 380 10.9.1 Finite Element Analysis 380 10.9.2 Boundary Element Analysis 388 10.9.3 TL of Concentric Tube Resonators 396 10.10 Reactive Muffler IL 403 10.11 Measurements of Source Impedance 403 10.12 Dissipative Mufflers and Lined Ducts 406 10.13 Historical Development of Dissipative Mufflers and Lined Duct Theories 406 10.14 Parallel-Baffle Mufflers 407 10.14.1 Embleton’s Method [8] 408 10.14.2 Ver’s Method [11, 12, 136] 409 10.14.3 Ingard’s Method [149] 411 10.14.4 Bies and Hansen Method [14] 414 10.14.5 Mechel’s Design Curves [152] 415 10.14.6 Ramakrishnan and Watson Curves [151] 416 10.14.7 Finite Element Approach for Attenuation of Parallel-Baffle Mufflers 418 References 420 11 Noise and Vibration Control of Machines 427 11.1 Introduction 427 11.2 Machine Element Noise and Vibration Sources and Control 427 11.2.1 Gears 427 11.2.2 Bearings 430 11.2.3 Fans and Blowers 433 11.2.4 Metal Cutting 438 11.2.5 Woodworking 439 11.3 Built-up Machines 443 11.3.1 Internal Combustion Engines 443 11.3.2 Electric Motors and Electrical Equipment 444 11.3.3 Compressors 446 11.3.4 Pumps 450 11.4 Noise Due to Fluid Flow 454 11.4.1 Valve-Induced Noise 454 11.4.2 Hydraulic System Noise 456 11.4.3 Furnace and Burner Noise 458 11.5 Noise Control of Industrial Production Machinery 459 11.5.1 Machine Tool Noise, Vibration, and Chatter 459 11.5.2 Sound Power Level for Industrial Machinery 460 References 460 12 Noise and Vibration Control in Buildings 465 12.1 Introduction 465 12.2 Sound Transmission Theory for Single Panels 466 12.2.1 Mass-Law Transmission Loss 466 12.2.2 Random Incidence Transmission Loss 469 12.2.3 The Coincidence Effect 474 12.3 Sound Transmission for Double and Multiple Panels 476 12.3.1 Sound Transmission Through Infinite Double Panels 476 12.3.2 London’s Theory 477 12.3.3 Empirical Approach 480 12.4 Sound and Vibration Transmission and Structural Response Using Statistical Energy Analysis (SEA) 484 12.4.1 Introduction 484 12.4.2 SEA Fundamentals and Assumptions 484 12.4.3 Power Flow Between Coupled Systems 496 12.4.4 Modal Behavior of Panel 496 12.4.5 Use of SEA to Predict Sound Transmission Through Panels or Partitions 497 12.4.6 Design of Enclosures Using SEA 503 12.4.7 Optimization of Enclosure Attenuation 506 12.4.8 SEA Computer Codes 508 12.5 Transmission Through Composite Walls 508 12.6 Effects of Leaks and Flanking Transmission 511 12.7 Sound Transmission Measurement Techniques 514 12.7.1 Laboratory Methods of Measuring Transmission Loss 514 12.7.2 Measurements of Transmission Loss in the Field 519 12.8 Single-Number Ratings for Partitions 520 12.9 Impact Sound Transmission 523 12.9.1 Laboratory and Field Measurements of Impact Transmission 524 12.9.2 Rating of Impact Sound Transmission 526 12.10 Measured Airborne and Impact Sound Transmission (Insulation) Data 527 12.10.1 Gypsum Board Walls 528 12.10.2 Masonry Walls 528 12.10.3 Airborne and Impact Insulation of Floors 530 12.10.4 Doors and Windows 533 12.11 Sound Insulation Requirements 534 12.12 Control of Vibration of Buildings Caused by Strong Wind 541 12.12.1 Wind Excitation of Buildings 542 12.12.2 Structural Vibration Response of Buildings and Towers 544 12.12.3 Methods of Building Structure Vibration Reduction and Control 546 12.12.4 Human Response to Vibration and Acceptability Criteria 548 References 549 13 Design of Air-conditioning Systems for Noise and Vibration Control 557 13.1 Introduction 557 13.2 Interior Noise Level Design Criteria 558 13.3 General Features of a Ventilation System 558 13.3.1 HVAC Systems in Residential Homes 559 13.3.2 HVAC Systems in Large Buildings 559 13.3.3 Correct and Incorrect Installation of HVAC Systems 562 13.3.4 Sources of Noise and Causes of Complaints in HVAC Systems 564 13.4 Fan Noise 565 13.4.1 Types of Fans Used in HVAC Systems 568 13.4.2 Blade passing Frequency (BPF) 569 13.4.3 Fan Efficiency 571 13.4.4 Sound Power and Frequency Content of Fans 573 13.4.5 Sound Power Levels of Fans and Predictions 574 13.4.6 Prediction of Fan Sound Power Level 575 13.4.7 Importance of Proper Installation of Centrifugal Fans 577 13.4.8 Terminal Units (CAV, VAV, and Fan-Powered VAV Boxes) 579 13.5 Space Planning 581 13.6 Mechanical Room Noise and Vibration Control 583 13.6.1 Use of Floating Floors 584 13.6.2 Vibration Control of Equipment 588 13.6.3 Selection of Vibration Isolators 588 13.6.4 Vibration Isolation of Ducts, Pipes, and Wiring 596 13.7 Sound Attenuation in Ventilation Systems 598 13.7.1 Use of Fiberglass in Plenum Chambers, Mufflers, and HVAC Ducts 598 13.7.2 Attenuation of Plenum Chambers 598 13.7.3 Duct Attenuation 603 13.7.4 Sound Attenuators (Silencers) 607 13.7.5 Branches and Power Splits 609 13.7.6 Attenuation Due to End Reflection 610 13.7.7 Attenuation by Miter Bends 613 13.8 Sound Generation in Mechanical Systems 614 13.8.1 Elbow Noise 614 13.8.2 Take-off Noise 617 13.8.3 Grille Noise 618 13.8.4 Diffuser Noise 620 13.8.5 Damper Noise 620 13.9 Radiated Noise 621 13.9.1 Duct-Radiated Noise 623 13.9.2 Sound Breakout and Breakin From Ducts 624 13.9.3 Mixing Box Radiated Noise 627 13.9.4 Radiation From Fan Plenum Walls 628 13.9.5 Overall Sound Pressure Level Prediction 628 References 631 14 Surface Transportation Noise and Vibration Sources and Control 633 14.1 Introduction 633 14.2 Automobile and Truck Noise Sources and Control 633 14.2.1 Power Plant Noise and Its Control 635 14.2.2 Intake and Exhaust Noise and Muffler Design 639 14.2.3 Tire/Road Noise Sources and Control 640 14.2.4 Aerodynamic Noise Sources on Vehicles 642 14.2.5 Gearbox Noise and Vibration 643 14.2.6 Brake Noise Prediction and Control 644 14.3 Interior Road Vehicle Cabin Noise 644 14.3.1 Automobiles and Trucks 644 14.3.2 Off-Road Vehicles 649 14.4 Railroad and Rapid Transit Vehicle Noise and Vibration Sources 650 14.4.1 Wheel–Rail Interaction Noise 650 14.4.2 Interior Rail Vehicle Cabin Noise 651 14.5 Noise And Vibration Control in Ships 654 References 656 15 Aircraft and Airport Transportation Noise Sources and Control 661 15.1 Introduction 661 15.2 Jet Engine Noise Sources and Control 661 15.3 Propeller and Rotor Noise Sources and Control 663 15.4 Helicopter and Rotor Noise 663 15.5 Aircraft Cabin Noise and Vibration and Its Control 666 15.5.1 Passive Noise and Vibration Control 666 15.5.2 Active Noise and Vibration Control 668 15.6 Airport Noise Control 669 15.6.1 Noise Control at the Source 669 15.6.2 Airport-specific Noise Control Measures 670 References 673 16 Community Noise and Vibration Sources 677 16.1 Introduction 677 16.2 Assessment of Community Noise Annoyance 677 16.3 Community Noise and Vibration Sources and Control 680 16.3.1 Traffic Noise Sources 680 16.3.2 Rail System Noise Sources 683 16.3.3 Ground-Borne Vibration Transmission from Road and Rail Systems 683 16.3.4 Aircraft and Airport Noise Prediction and Control 684 16.3.5 Off-road Vehicle and Construction Equipment Exterior Noise Prediction and Control 687 16.3.6 Industrial and Commercial Noise in the Community 688 16.3.7 Construction and Building Site Noise 688 16.4 Environmental Impact Assessment 689 16.5 Environmental Noise and Vibration Attenuation 690 16.5.1 Attenuation Provided by Barriers, Earth Berms, Buildings, and Vegetation 690 16.5.2 Base Isolation of Buildings for Control of Ground-Borne Vibration 692 16.5.3 Noise Control Using Porous Road Surfaces 693 16.6 City Planning for Noise and Vibration Reduction and Soundscape Concepts 694 16.6.1 Community Noise Ordinances 694 16.6.2 Recommendations for Urban Projects 697 16.6.3 Strategic Noise Maps 697 16.6.4 Soundscapes 698 References 699 Glossary 705 Index 737

Read more less

Book SynopsisCompiling research from the last two decades, Nanomaterials for Environmental Protection provides an interdisciplinary approach to applying nanomaterials to disinfect water, air, and soil while addressing possible environmental risks associated with nanoparticles.Table of ContentsPreface ix LIST OF CONTRIBUTORS xi LIST OF ABBREVIATIONS xv Part I Remediation with use of metals, metal oxides, complexes and composites 1 1 Groundwater Water Remediation by Static Diffusion Using Nano-Zero Valent Metals (Fe0, Cu0, Al0), n-FeHn+, n-Fe(OH)x, n-FeOOH, n-Fe-[OxHy](n+/−) 3 David D.J. Antia 2 Nanostructured Metal Oxides for Wastewater Disinfection 27 Erick R. Bandala, Marco Antonio Quiroz Alfaro, Mónica Cerro-López, and Miguel A. Méndez-Rojas 3 Cu2O-Based Nanocomposites for Environmental Protection: Relationship between Structure and Photocatalytic Activity, Application, and Mechanism 41 Liangbin Xiong, Huaqing Yu, Xin Ba, Wenpei Zhang, and Ying Yu 4 Multifunctional Nanocomposites for Environmental Remediation 71 Suying Wei, Jiahua Zhu, Hongbo Gu, Huige Wei, Xingru Yan, Yudong Huang, and Zhanhu Guo 5 Nanomaterials for the Removal of Volatile Organic Compounds from Aqueous Solutions 85 Amro El Badawy and Hafiz H.M. Salih 6 Hybrid Metal Nanoparticle-Containing Polymer Nanofibers for Environmental Applications 95 Yunpeng Huang, Shige Wang, Mingwu Shen, and Xiangyang Shi 7 Nanomaterials on the Basis of Chelating Agents, Metal Complexes, and Organometallics for Environmental Purposes 109 Boris I. Kharisov, Oxana V. Kharissova, and Ubaldo Ortiz Méndez Part II Remediation with use of carbon nanotubes 125 8 Carbon Nanotubes: Next-Generation Nanomaterials for Clean Water Technologies 127 Yit Thai Ong, Kian Fei Yee, Qian Wen Yeang, Sharif Hussein Sharif Zein, and Soon Huat Tan Part III Photo catalytical remediation 143 9 New Advances in Heterogeneous Photocatalysis for Treatment of Toxic Metals and Arsenic 145 Marta I. Litter and Natalia Quici 10 Nanostructured Titanium Dioxide for Photocatalytic Water Treatment 169 David G. Rickerby 11 Destruction of Chloroorganic Compounds with Nanophotocatalysts 183Rashid A. Khaydarov, Renat R. Khaydarov, and Olga Gapurova 12 Semiconductor Nanomaterials for Organic Dye Degradation and Hydrogen Production via Photocatalysis 193 Leticia M. Torres-Martínez, Isaías Juárez-Ramírez, and Mayra Z. Figueroa-Torres Part IV Nanoadsorbents and Nanofiltration 205 13 Advanced Oxidation Processes, Nanofiltration, and Application of Bubble Column Reactor 207 Sukanchan Palit 14 Carbon Nanomaterials as Adsorbents for Environmental Analysis 217 Chaudhery Mustansar Hussain 15 Application of Nanoadsorbents in Water Treatment 237 Amit Bhatnagar and Mika Sillanpää 16 Organo-Clay Nanohybrid Adsorbents in the Removal of Toxic Metal Ions 249 Peng Liu Part V Membranes on nanomaterials basis 269 17 Water Remediation Using Nanoparticle and Nanocomposite Membranes 271 Kian Fei Yee, Qian Wen Yeang, Yit Thai Ong, Vel Murugan Vadivelu, and Soon Huat Tan Part VI Green methods in nanomaterials synthesis 293 18 Green Methodologies in the Synthesis of Metal and Metal Oxide Nanoparticles 295 Aniruddha B. Patil and Bhalchandra M. Bhanage 19 An Environmentally Friendly and Green Approach for Synthesis and Applications of Silver Nanoparticles 313 Muniyandi Jeyaraj, Muralidharan Murugan, Kevin John Pulikotil Anthony, and Sangiliyandi Gurunathan 20 Green Synthesis of Nanomaterials Using Biological Routes 329 Rajesh Ramanathan, Ravi Shukla, Suresh K. Bhargava, and Vipul Bansal Part VII CO2 adsorption 349 21 Nanomaterials for Carbon Dioxide Adsorption 351 Luis Ángel Garza Rodríguez and Elsa Nadia Aguilera González Part VIII Intelligent nanomaterials 373 22 Development of Intelligent Nanomaterials as a Strategy to Solve Environmental Problems 375 Jose Ruben Morones-Ramírez Part IX Desalination 387 23 Engineered Nanomaterials for Purification and Desalination of Palatable Water 389 Vijay C. Verma, Swechha Anand, Mayank Gangwar, and Santosh K. Singh Part X Nanocatalysis 401 24 Nanocatalytic Wastewater Treatment System for the Removal of Toxic Organic Compounds 403 Sodeh Sadjadi 25 Catalyst Design Based on Nano-Sized Inorganic Core of Enzymes: Design of Environmentally Friendly Catalysts 429 Mohammad Mahdi Najafpour Part XI Nanosensors 443 26 Neutron-Fluence Nanosensors Based on Boron-Containing Materials 445 Levan Chkhartishvili Part XII Nanoreservoirs for hydrogen storage 451 27 Hydrogen Nanoreservoirs made of Boron Nitride 453 Levan Chkhartishvili Part XIII Fuel cells on nanomaterials basis 469 28 Fuel Cells with Nanomaterials for Ecologically Pure Transport 471 Gennady Gerasimov Part XIV Remediation of radionuclides 483 29 Humic Functional Derivatives and Nanocoatings for Remediation of Actinide-Contaminated Environments 485 Irina V. Perminova, Stepan N. Kalmykov, Natalia S. Shcherbina, Sergey A. Ponomarenko, Vladimir A. Kholodov, Alexander P. Novikov, Richard G. Haire, and Kirk Hatfield Part XV Environmental risks and toxicity 503 30 Environmental Risks of Nanotechnology: Evaluating the Ecotoxicity of Nanomaterials 505 Miguel A. Méndez-Rojas, José Luis Sánchez-Salas, Aracely Angulo-Molina, and Teresa de Jesús Palacios-Hernández 31 Environmental Risk, Human Health, and Toxic Effects of Nanoparticles 523 Jamuna Bai A. and Ravishankar Rai V. 32 Implications of the Use of Nanomaterials for Environmental Protection: Challenges in Designing Environmentally Relevant Toxicological Experiments 537 Rute F. Domingos and José P. Pinheiro Concluding Remarks 551 Author Index 555 Subject Index 559

Read more less

Book SynopsisA fully updated, easy-to-read guide on magnetic actuators and sensors The Second Edition of this must-have book for today''s engineers includes the latest updates and advances in the field of magnetic actuators and sensors. Magnetic Actuators and Sensors emphasizes computer-aided design techniquesespecially magnetic finite element analysis; offers many new sections on topics ranging from magnetic separators to spin valve sensors; and features numerous worked calculations, illustrations, and real-life applications. To aid readers in building solid, fundamental, theoretical background and design know-how, the book provides in-depth coverage in four parts: PART I: MAGNETICS Introduction Basic Electromagnetics Reluctance Method Finite-Element Method Magnetic Force Other Magnetic Performance Parameters PART II: ACTUATORS Magnetic Actuators Operated Trade Review“This is a book well-worth acquiring.” (IEEE Electrical Insulation Magazine, 1 July 2014) Table of ContentsPREFACE xi PREFACE TO THE FIRST EDITION xiii LIST OF 66 EXAMPLES xv PART I MAGNETICS 1 1 Introduction 3 1.1 Overview of Magnetic Actuators 3 1.2 Overview of Magnetic Sensors 4 1.3 Actuators and Sensors in Motion Control Systems 5 1.4 Magnetic Actuators and Sensors in Mechatronics 7 References 8 2 Basic Electromagnetics 9 2.1 Vectors 9 2.2 Ampere’s Law 14 2.3 Magnetic Materials 17 2.4 Faraday’s Law 22 2.5 Potentials 25 2.6 Maxwell’s Equations 28 Problems 29 References 31 3 Reluctance Method 33 3.1 Simplifying Ampere’s Law 33 3.2 Applications 37 3.3 Fringing Flux 40 3.4 Complex Reluctance 41 3.5 Limitations 41 Problems 42 References 42 4 Finite-Element Method 43 4.1 Energy Conservation and Functional Minimization 43 4.2 Triangular Elements for Magnetostatics 45 4.3 Matrix Equation 46 4.4 Finite-Element Models 49 Problems 53 References 53 5 Magnetic Force 55 5.1 Magnetic Flux Line Plots 55 5.2 Magnetic Energy 60 5.3 Magnetic Force on Steel 61 5.4 Magnetic Pressure on Steel 65 5.5 Lorentz Force 66 5.6 Permanent Magnets 67 5.7 Magnetic Torque 72 5.8 Magnetic Volume Forces on Permeable Particles 73 Problems 75 References 76 6 Other Magnetic Performance Parameters 79 6.1 Magnetic Flux and Flux Linkage 79 6.2 Inductance 82 6.3 Capacitance 86 6.4 Impedance 88 Problems 91 References 91 PART II ACTUATORS 93 7 Magnetic Actuators Operated by DC 95 7.1 Solenoid Actuators 95 7.2 Voice Coil Actuators 106 7.3 Other Actuators Using Coils and Permanent Magnets 108 7.4 Proportional Actuators 109 7.5 Rotary Actuators 112 7.6 Magnetic Bearings and Couplings 114 7.7 Magnetic Separators 117 Problems 125 References 127 8 Magnetic Actuators Operated by AC 129 8.1 Skin Depth 129 8.2 Power Losses in Steel 130 8.3 Force Pulsations 135 8.4 Cuts in Steel 139 References 145 9 Magnetic Actuator Transient Operation 147 9.1 Basic Timeline 147 9.2 Size, Force, and Acceleration 148 9.3 Linear Magnetic Diffusion Times 150 9.4 Nonlinear Magnetic Infusion Times 156 9.5 Nonlinear Magnetic Effusion Time 164 9.6 Pulse Response of Nonlinear Steel 169 Problems 171 References 174 PART III SENSORS 175 10 Hall Effect and Magnetoresistive Sensors 177 10.1 Simple Hall Voltage Equation 177 10.2 Hall Effect Conductivity Tensor 179 10.3 Finite-Element Computation of Hall Fields 182 10.4 Hall Sensors for Position or Current 190 10.5 Magnetoresistance 193 10.6 Magnetoresistive Heads for Hard Disk Drives 194 10.7 Giant Magnetoresistive Spin Valve Sensors 195 Problems 198 References 198 11 Other Magnetic Sensors 201 11.1 Speed Sensors Based on Faraday’s Law 201 11.2 Inductive Recording Heads 203 11.3 Proximity Sensors Using Impedance 206 11.4 Linear Variable Differential Transformers 210 11.5 Magnetostrictive Sensors 213 11.6 Fluxgate Sensors 215 11.7 Chattock Coil Field and Current Sensor 219 11.8 Squid Magnetometers 222 11.9 Magnetoimpedance and Miniature Sensors 223 11.10 MEMS Sensors 224 Problems 225 References 226 PART IV SYSTEMS 229 12 Coil Design and Temperature Calculations 231 12.1 Wire Size Determination for DC Currents 231 12.2 Coil Time Constant and Impedance 234 12.3 Skin Effects and Proximity Effects for AC Currents 235 12.4 Finite-Element Computation Of Temperatures 239 Problems 246 References 246 13 Electromagnetic Compatibility 249 13.1 Signal-To-Noise Ratio 249 13.2 Shields and Apertures 250 13.3 Test Chambers 255 Problems 260 References 260 14 Electromechanical Finite Elements 263 14.1 Electromagnetic Finite-Element Matrix Equation 263 14.2 0D and 1D Finite Elements for Coupling Electric Circuits 266 14.3 Structural Finite-Element Matrix Equation 272 14.4 Force and Motion Computation by Time Stepping 273 14.5 Typical Electromechanical Applications 275 Problems 286 References 286 15 Electromechanical Analysis Using Systems Models 289 15.1 Electric Circuit Models of Magnetic Devices 289 15.2 VHDL–AMS/Simplorer Models 296 15.3 MATLAB/Simulink Models 301 15.4 Including Eddy Current Diffusion Using a Resistor 307 15.5 Magnetic Actuator Systems for 2D Planar Motion 312 15.6 Optimizing Magnetic Actuator Systems 313 Problems 324 References 325 16 Coupled Electrohydraulic Analysis Using Systems Models 327 16.1 Comparing Hydraulics and Magnetics 327 16.2 Hydraulic Basics and Electrical Analogies 328 16.3 Modeling Hydraulic Circuits in Spice 330 16.4 Electrohydraulic Models in Spice and Simplorer 334 16.5 Hydraulic Valves and Cylinders in Systems Models 341 16.6 Magnetic Diffusion Resistor in Electrohydraulic Models 348 16.7 Optimization of an Electrohydraulic System 352 16.8 Magnetic Actuators for Digital Hydraulics 353 Problems 357 References 357 APPENDIX A: SYMBOLS, DIMENSIONS, AND UNITS 359 APPENDIX B: NONLINEAR B–H CURVES 361 APPENDIX C: FINAL ANSWERS FOR ODD-NUMBERED PROBLEMS 367 INDEX 371

Read more less

Book SynopsisThe development of solid state devices began a little more than a century ago, with the discovery of the electrical conductivity of ionic solids. Today, solid state technologies form the background of the society in which we live.Table of ContentsPreface ix 1. Thermodynamics of Homogeneous and Heterogeneous Semiconductor Systems 1 1.1 Introduction 1 1.2 Basic Principles 2 1.3 Phases and Their Properties 7 1.3.1 Structural Order of a Phase 7 1.4 Equations of State of Thermodynamic Systems 11 1.4.1 Thermodynamic Transformations and Functions of State 11 1.4.2 Work Associated with a Transformation, Entropy and Free Energy 12 1.4.3 Chemical Potentials 14 1.4.4 Free Energy and Entropy of Spontaneous Processes 15 1.4.5 Effect of Pressure on Phase Transformations, Polymorphs/Polytypes Formation and Their Thermodynamic Stability 16 1.4.6 Electrochemical Equilibria and Electrochemical Potentials of Charged Species 21 1.5 Equilibrium Conditions of Multicomponent Systems Which Do Not React Chemically 23 1.6 Thermodynamic Modelling of Binary Phase Diagrams 28 1.6.1 Introductory Remarks 28 1.6.2 Thermodynamic Modelling of Complete and Incomplete Miscibility 29 1.6.3 Thermodynamic Modelling of Intermediate Compound Formation 40 1.6.4 Retrograde Solubility, Retrograde Melting and Spinodal Decomposition 40 1.7 Solution Thermodynamics and Structural and Physical Properties of Selected Semiconductor Systems 43 1.7.1 Introductory Remarks 43 1.7.2 Au-Ag and Au-Cu Alloys 45 1.7.3 Silicon and Germanium 49 1.7.4 Silicon-Germanium Alloys 53 1.7.5 Silicon- and Germanium-Binary Alloys with Group III and Group IV Elements 55 1.7.6 Silicon-Tin and Germanium-Tin Alloys 61 1.7.7 Carbon and Its Polymorphs 62 1.7.8 Silicon Carbide 67 1.7.9 Selenium-Tellurium Alloys 69 1.7.10 Binary and Pseudo-binary Selenides and Tellurides 71 1.7.11 Arsenides, Phosphides and Nitrides 81 1.8 Size-Dependent Properties, Quantum Size Effects and Thermodynamics of Nanomaterials 93 Appendix 98 Use of Electrochemical Measurements for the Determination of the Thermodynamic Functions of Semiconductors 98 References 103 2. Point Defects in Semiconductors 117 2.1 Introduction 117 2.2 Point Defects in Ionic Solids: Modelling the Electrical Conductivity of Ionic Solids by Point Defects-Mediated Charge Transfer 119 2.3 Point Defects and Impurities in Elemental Semiconductors 127 2.3.1 Introduction 127 2.3.2 Vacancies and Self-Interstitials in Semiconductors with the Diamond Structure: an Attempt at a Critical Discussion of Their Thermodynamic and Transport Properties 129 2.3.3 Effect of Defect–Defect Interactions on Diffusivity: Trap-and-Pairing Limited Diffusion Processes 145 2.3.4 Light Impurities in Group IV Semiconductors: Hydrogen, Carbon, Nitrogen, Oxygen and Their Reactivity 153 2.4 Defects and Non-Stoichiometry in Compound Semiconductors 167 2.4.1 Structural and Thermodynamic Properties 167 2.4.2 Defect Identification in Compound Semiconductors 171 2.4.3 Non-Stoichiometry in Compound Semiconductors 171 References 181 3. Extended Defects in Semiconductors and Their Interactions with Point Defects and Impurities 195 3.1 Introduction 195 3.2 Dislocations in Semiconductors with the Diamond Structure 196 3.2.1 Geometrical Properties 196 3.2.2 Energy of Regular Straight Dislocations 201 3.2.3 Dislocation Motion 203 3.2.4 Dislocation Reconstruction 205 3.2.5 Electronic Structure of Dislocations in Si and Ge, Theoretical Studies and Experimental Evidences 208 3.3 Dislocations in Compound Semiconductors 215 3.3.1 Electronic Structure of Dislocations in Compound Semiconductors 216 3.4 Interaction of Defects and Impurities with Extended Defects 219 3.4.1 Introduction 219 3.4.2 Thermodynamics of Defect Interactions with Extended Defects 220 3.4.3 Thermodynamics of Interaction of Neutral Defects and Impurities with EDs 221 3.4.4 Kinetics of Interaction of Point Defects, Impurities and Extended Defects: General Concepts 228 3.4.5 Kinetics of Interaction Reactions: Reaction Limited Processes 230 3.4.6 Kinetics of Interaction Reactions: Diffusion-Limited Reactions 230 3.5 Interaction of Atomic Defects with Extended Defects: Theoretical and Experimental Evidence 232 3.5.1 Interaction of Point Defects with Extended Defects 232 3.5.2 Hydrogen-Dislocation Interaction in Silicon 233 3.5.3 Interaction of Oxygen with Dislocations 235 3.6 Segregation of Impurities at Surfaces and Interfaces 236 3.6.1 Introduction 236 3.6.2 Grain Boundaries in Polycrystalline Semiconductors 236 3.6.3 Structure of Grain Boundaries and Their Physical Properties 239 3.6.4 Segregation of Impurities at Grain Boundaries and Their Influence on Physical Properties 241 3.7 3D Defects: Precipitates, Bubbles and Voids 243 3.7.1 Thermodynamic and Structural Considerations 243 3.7.2 Oxygen and Carbon Segregation in Silicon 246 3.7.3 Silicides Precipitation 249 3.7.4 Bubbles and Voids 249 References 251 4. Growth of Semiconductor Materials 265 4.1 Introduction 265 4.2 Growth of Bulk Solids by Liquid Crystallization 266 4.2.1 Growth of Single Crystal and Multicrystalline Ingots by Liquid Phase Crystallization 268 4.2.2 Growth of Single Crystals or Multicrystalline Materials by Liquid Crystallization Processes: Impact of Environmental Interactions on the Chemical Quality 274 4.2.3 Growth of Bulk Solids by Liquid Crystallization Processes: Solubility of Impurities in Semiconductors and Their Segregation 287 4.2.4 Growth of Bulk Solids by Liquid Crystallization Processes: Pick-Up of Impurities 290 4.2.5 Constitutional Supercooling 295 4.2.6 Growth Dependence of the Impurity Pick-Up and Concentration Profiling 298 4.2.7 Purification of Silicon by Smelting with Al 299 4.3 Growth of Ge-Si Alloys, SiC, GaN, GaAs, InP and CdZnTe from the Liquid Phase 300 4.3.1 Growth of Si-Ge Alloys 301 4.3.2 Growth of SiC from the Liquid Phase 303 4.3.3 Growth of GaN from the Liquid Phase 304 4.3.4 Growth of GaAs, InP, ZnSe and CdZnTe 309 4.4 Single Crystal Growth from the Vapour Phase 318 4.4.1 Generalities 318 4.4.2 Growth of Silicon, ZnSe and Silicon Carbide from the Vapour Phase 319 4.4.3 Epitaxial Growth of Single Crystalline Layers of Elemental and Compound Semiconductors 323 4.5 Growth of Poly/Micro/Nano-Crystalline Thin Film Materials 332 4.5.1 Introduction 332 4.5.2 Growth of Nanocrystalline/Microcrystalline Silicon 334 4.5.3 Growth of Silicon Nanowires 337 4.5.4 Growth of Films of CdTe and of Copper Indium (Gallium) Selenide (CIGS) 342 References 345 5. Physical Chemistry of Semiconductor Materials Processing 363 5.1 Introduction 363 5.2 Thermal Annealing Processes 364 5.2.1 Thermal Decomposition of Non-stoichiometric Amorphous Phases for Nanofabrication Processes 367 5.2.2 Other Problems of a Thermodynamic or Kinetic Nature 369 5.3 Hydrogen Passivation Processes 372 5.4 Gettering and Defect Engineering 376 5.4.1 Introduction 376 5.4.2 Thermodynamics of Gettering 377 5.4.3 Physics and Chemistry of Internal Gettering 378 5.4.4 Physics and Chemistry of External Gettering 382 5.5 Wafer Bonding 390 References 391 Index 399

Read more less

Book SynopsisA must-have for materials engineers, chemists, physicists, and geologists, this is one of the first coffee-table books in the field of glass science. Containing over fifty beautiful micrographs, the book reflects 35 years of original research by a highly regarded authority in the field. It contains 50 slides culled from tens of thousands of images on glass crystal nucleation, growth, and crystallization. The images represent glass crystallization mechanisms, including internal, surface, homogeneous, heterogeneous, and eutectic, crystal nucleation and growth.Table of ContentsForeword vii Introduction: 36 Years of Research and Discoveries about Glass Crystallization xi Glass Myth Shattered (Science Now, May 16, 1998) xix Acknowledgments xxi Letter from S. D. Stookey – The Inventor of Glass-ceramics xxii Crystals in Glass – A Celebration of Science and Art 1 Internal Nucleation in Glasses 7 Surface Nucleation on Glasses 45 Viscous Sintering with Concurrent Crystallization 71 Eutectic Crystallization 79 Cracks and Bubbles in Glass-ceramics 93 Reviews of “Crystals in Glass: A Hidden Beauty” 105 About the Author 109

Read more less

Book SynopsisProvides detailed methods to reduce or eliminate damage caused by corrosion. This book explains the human and environmental costs of corrosion, its causes and various types of corrosion. It summarizes the costs of corrosion in different industries, including bridges, mining, petroleum refining, chemical, petrochemical, and pharmaceutical.Table of ContentsPreface xvii Acknowledgments xix 1 Introduction and Forms of Corrosion 1 1.1 General or Uniform or Quasi-Uniform Corrosion 1 1.2 Galvanic Corrosion 4 1.2.1 Factors involved in Galvanic Corrosion 8 1.2.2 Galvanic Series and Corrosion 9 1.2.3 The Nature of the Metal/Solution Interface 10 1.2.4 Polarization of the Galvanic Cell 10 1.2.5 Testing of Galvanic Corrosion 13 1.3 Stray Current Corrosion 13 1.4 Localized Corrosion 14 1.4.1 Pitting Corrosion 15 1.4.2 Poultice Corrosion 17 1.4.3 Crevice Corrosion 17 1.4.4 Filiform Corrosion 18 1.4.5 Breakdown of Passivation 19 1.4.6 Coatings and Localized Corrosion 20 1.4.7 Electrochemical Studies of Localized Corrosion 20 1.4.8 Potentiostatic Methods 22 1.4.9 Prevention of Localized Corrosion 22 1.4.10 Corrosion Tests 23 1.4.11 Changes in Mechanical Properties 23 1.4.12 Electrochemical Techniques for the Study of Localized Corrosion 24 1.4.13 Electrochemical Impedance and Localized Corrosion 24 1.4.14 The SRET 25 1.5 Metallurgically Influenced Corrosion 25 1.5.1 The Influence of Metallurgical Properties in Aqueous Media 25 1.6 Microbiologically Influenced Corrosion (MIC) 36 1.6.1 Growth and Metabolism 36 1.6.2 Environments 37 1.6.3 Biological Corrosion in Freshwater Environments 37 1.6.4 Biological Corrosion in Marine Environments 37 1.6.5 Industries Affected 38 1.6.6 Role of Some Microbiological Species in Corrosion 38 1.6.7 Attack by Organisms Other than SRB 39 1.6.8 Production of Biofilms 40 1.6.9 Production of Sulfides 41 1.6.10 Formation of Organic and Inorganic Acids 41 1.6.11 Gases from Organisms 41 1.6.12 MIC of Materials 41 1.6.13 Wood and Polymers 41 1.6.14 Hydrocarbons 42 1.6.15 Types of Corrosion of Metals and Alloys 42 1.6.16 Microbiological Impacts and Testing 43 1.6.17 Recognition of Microbiological Corrosion 43 1.7 Mechanically Assisted Corrosion 44 1.7.1 Corrosion and Wear 44 1.7.2 Abrasion 45 1.7.3 Wear Impact 45 1.7.4 Corrosion Effects 46 1.7.5 Wear Damage Mechanisms 46 1.7.6 Adhesive Wear 46 1.7.7 Abrasive Wear 47 1.7.8 Fatigue Wear 47 1.7.9 Impact Wear 47 1.7.10 Chemical or Corrosive Wear 48 1.7.11 Oxidative Wear 49 1.7.12 Electric-Arc-Induced Wear 50 1.7.13 Erosion–Corrosion 50 1.7.14 Impingement 51 1.7.15 Effect of Turbulence 52 1.7.16 Galvanic Effect 52 1.7.17 Water Droplet Impingement Erosion 52 1.7.18 Cavitation 53 1.7.19 Cavitation Erosion 53 1.7.20 Impacting Bubbles 54 1.7.21 Prevention 55 1.7.22 Fretting Corrosion 55 1.7.23 Mechanism of Fretting Corrosion 56 1.7.24 Modeling Fretting Corrosion 57 1.7.25 Fretting CF 58 1.7.26 Prevention of Fretting Wear 58 1.7.27 Testing 59 1.7.28 Measurement of Wear and Corrosion 59 1.7.29 Galling Stress 59 1.7.30 CF 59 1.7.31 Morphology of CF Ruptures 60 1.7.32 Important Factors of CF 61 1.7.33 Stresses 61 1.7.34 Stress Ratio 62 1.7.35 Material Factors 62 1.7.36 Mechanism of CF 63 1.7.37 Crack Initiation 64 1.7.38 Crack Propagation 65 1.7.39 Prevention of CF 66 1.8 Environmentally Induced Cracking (EIC) 67 1.8.1 Testing of CF 67 1.8.2 Types of Tests 68 1.8.3 Sampling in CF Tests 68 1.8.4 SCC 69 1.8.5 Morphology 70 1.8.6 Some Key Factors of SCC 71 1.8.7 Material Properties in SCC 72 1.8.8 Potential–pH Diagram and SCC 72 1.8.9 Active–Passive Behavior and Susceptible Zone of Potentials 73 1.8.10 Electrode Potential and its Effect on Crack Growth 74 1.8.11 Prevention of Hydrogen Damage 87 References 89 2 Corrosion Costs 95 2.1 Introduction 95 2.2 Data Collection and Economic Analysis 96 2.2.1 The Uhlig Report (United States of America 1949) 96 2.2.2 The Hoar Report (United Kingdom 1970) 96 2.2.3 Report of the Committee on Corrosion and Protection (Japan 1977) 100 2.2.4 The Battelle-NBS Report (United States, 1978) 102 2.2.5 The Economics of Corrosion in Australia 108 2.2.6 Kuwait (1995) 114 2.2.7 Costs of Corrosion in Other Countries 115 2.3 Tribology 123 2.3.1 Economies of Wear and Corrosion in the Canadian Industry 123 2.3.2 Strategies Against Wear and Friction 124 References 126 3 Corrosion Causes 127 3.1 Introduction 127 3.2 Corrosion in Conventional Concrete Bridges 127 3.3 Corrosion of Prestressed Concrete Bridges 127 3.4 Reinforcement Corrosion in Concrete 128 3.5 Mechanism of Corrosion and Assessment Techniques in Concrete 128 3.5.1 Chloride Ingress and the Corrosion Threshold 128 3.5.2 Carbonation of Concrete and Corrosion 129 3.5.3 Conventional Reinforced Concrete 130 3.6 Steel Bridges 133 3.7 Cable and Suspension Bridges 133 3.8 Corrosion of Underground Pipelines 135 3.8.1 Types of Corrosion of Underground Pipelines 136 3.8.2 Replacement/Rehabilitation 140 3.8.3 Pipeline Integrity Management Programs 141 3.8.4 In-line Inspections 141 3.8.5 Aging Coating 141 3.8.6 Stress Corrosion Cracking 141 3.8.7 Corrosion-Related Failures 142 3.9 Waterways and Ports 143 3.9.1 Areas of Major Corrosion Impact 143 3.9.2 Fresh Water 144 3.10 Hazardous Materials Storage 145 3.10.1 Aboveground Storage Tanks 145 3.10.2 Underground Fuel Storage Tanks 148 3.11 Corrosion Problems in Airports 148 3.12 Railroads 149 3.13 Gas Distribution 150 3.13.1 Pipe Failures 151 3.14 Drinking Water and Sewer Systems 152 3.14.1 External Corrosion in Water Systems 153 3.15 Electrical Utilities 154 3.15.1 Fossil Fuel Steam Supply Systems 154 3.15.2 Hydraulic Plants 156 3.15.3 Areas of Major Corrosion Impact on Electric Utility Systems 157 3.16 Telecommunications 157 3.16.1 Shelters 158 3.17 Motor Vehicles 160 3.17.1 Corrosion Causes 160 3.18 Ships 161 3.19 Aircraft 162 3.19.1 Corrosion Modes 162 3.20 Railroad Cars 164 3.21 Hazardous Materials Transport 167 3.22 Oil and Gas Exploration and Production 170 3.23 Corrosion in the Mining Industry 172 3.23.1 Wire Rope 173 3.24 Petroleum Refining 174 3.24.1 Areas of Major Corrosion Impact 175 3.24.2 Water-Related Corrosion 175 3.24.3 Processing-Related Corrosion 175 3.24.4 Naphthenic Acid Corrosion 175 3.24.5 Corrosion-Related Failure in Refineries 176 3.25 Chemical Petrochemical and Pharmaceutical Industries 177 3.26 Pulp and Paper Industry 179 3.27 Agricultural Production 181 3.28 The Food Processing Sector 182 3.29 Electronics 183 3.30 Corrosion Problems in Home Appliances 186 3.30.1 High-Efficiency Furnaces 187 3.30.2 Air Conditioners 187 3.31 Corrosion Problems in the US Dept. of Defense 188 3.31.1 Weapon Systems 188 3.31.2 Army 189 3.31.3 Vehicles 189 3.31.4 Case Study of HMMWV 190 3.31.5 Helicopters 192 3.31.6 Air Force 193 3.31.7 KC-135 Stratotanker 193 3.31.8 Navy 195 3.31.9 Submarines 196 3.31.10 Aircraft 197 3.32 Nuclear Waste Storage 197 3.32.1 Transition from Interim Storage to Permanent Storage 198 3.32.2 Cask Design for Permanent Storage 199 3.32.3 Effect of Location on Corrosion of Nuclear Storage Containers 199 References 200 4 Corrosion Control and Prevention 205 4.1 Introduction 205 4.2 Protective Coatings 205 4.2.1 Organic Coatings 206 4.2.2 Metallic Coatings 212 4.3 Metals and Alloys 214 4.4 Corrosion Inhibitors 216 4.4.1 Petroleum Production Transportation and Refining 217 4.4.2 Pulp and Paper 218 4.4.3 Iron and Steel 218 4.4.4 Additives 218 4.4.5 Deicers 219 4.5 Engineering Composites and Plastics 219 4.5.1 Composites 219 4.5.2 Polyethylene 220 4.5.3 Fluoropolymers 221 4.6 Cathodic and Anodic Protection 221 4.7 Services 222 4.8 Research and Development 223 4.9 Corrosion Control of Bridges 223 4.9.1 Reinforced Concrete Bridges 223 4.9.2 Steel Bridges 237 4.10 Mitigating Corrosion of Reinforcing Steel in Underwater Tunnels (36) 244 4.11 Corrosion of Underground Gas and Liquid Transmission Pipelines 244 4.11.1 Stray Current Corrosion 245 4.11.2 Microbiologically Influenced Corrosion (MIC) 245 4.11.3 Mitigation of External Corrosion 247 4.11.4 Operations and Maintenance 248 4.11.5 Cost of Operation and Maintenance (Corrosion Control) 250 4.11.6 Aging Coating 251 4.11.7 Stress Corrosion Cracking (SCC) 251 4.12 Gas Distribution 254 4.12.1 Pipe Failures 255 4.12.2 Plastic Pipe 255 4.13 Waterways and Ports 255 4.14 Hazardous Materials Storage 257 4.14.1 Nuclear Waste Storage 257 4.15 Corrosion Control of Storage Tanks 260 4.15.1 Aboveground Storage Tanks–Internal Coatings 260 4.15.2 Aboveground Storage Tanks–External Coatings 262 4.15.3 Aboveground Storage Tanks–Cathodic Protection 262 4.15.4 Underground Storage Tanks–Corrosion Control 262 4.15.5 Underground Storage Tanks–Cathodic Protection 263 4.15.6 Polymer Tanks 263 4.16 Airports 263 4.17 Railroads 264 4.17.1 Corrosion of Railroad Cars 264 4.18 Drinking Water and Sewer Systems 265 4.18.1 Corrosion Control in the Water Supply 265 4.18.2 Corrosion Control in Water Treatment Facilities 265 4.18.3 Corrosion Inhibitors pH Control and Alkalinity Adjusters 266 4.18.4 Corrosion Control in Water Storage Systems 268 4.18.5 Corrosion Control in Water Transmission Systems 269 4.18.6 Corrosion Control in Water Distribution Systems 271 4.18.7 Corrosion Control in Sewage Water Systems 273 4.18.8 Optimized Management by Combining Corrosion Control Methods 273 4.19 Electric Utilities 275 4.20 Telecommunications 275 4.21 Motor Vehicles 277 4.22 Ships 281 4.22.1 Design 281 4.23 Corrosion Control in Aircraft 286 4.23.1 Material Selection 287 4.23.2 Coating Selection 287 4.23.3 Drainage 287 4.23.4 Sealants 288 4.24 Hazardous Materials Transport (HAZMAT) 288 4.25 Oil and Gas Exploration and Production 289 4.26 Corrosion and its Prevention in the Mining Industry 292 4.27 Petroleum Refining 293 4.28 Corrosion Control in the Chemical Petrochemical and Pharmaceutical Industries 295 4.28.1 Corrosion-Resistant Alloys 296 4.28.2 Piping Design Factors 297 4.28.3 Construction Stage Checks 298 4.28.4 Remedial Action and Diagnostic Analysis 300 4.29 Pulp and Paper Industrial Sector 300 4.29.1 Equipment Design 300 4.29.2 Process Design and Corrosion Inhibitors 301 4.29.3 Weight Loss Coupons 301 4.29.4 Inspection and Preventive Maintenance 301 4.30 Agricultural Production 302 4.30.1 Keeping Equipment Clean/Dry 302 4.30.2 Material Selection 302 4.30.3 External Coatings/Paint 303 4.30.4 Internal Linings 303 4.30.5 Cathodic Protection 303 4.31 Food Processing 303 4.32 Corrosion Forms in the Electronics Industry 304 4.32.1 Cathodic Corrosion 304 4.32.2 Pore-Creep in Electrical Contacts and Metallic Joints 305 4.32.3 Fretting Corrosion of Separate Connectors with Tin Finishes 305 4.32.4 Galvanic Corrosion 305 4.32.5 Micropitting on Aluminum 305 4.32.6 Corrosion of Aluminum in Chlorinated Media 306 4.32.7 Solder Corrosion 306 4.32.8 Corrosion of Magnetic and Magneto-Optic Devices 306 4.33 Home Appliances 306 4.33.1 Corrosion Control by Sacrificial Anodes 306 4.33.2 Corrosion Control by Corrosion-Resistant Materials 307 4.33.3 Corrosion Control by Coatings and Paint 308 4.34 Defense 308 4.34.1 Army 308 4.34.2 Navy 311 4.34.3 Air Force 311 4.35 Preventive Strategies 312 References 313 5 Consequences of Corrosion 317 5.1 Introduction 317 5.2 Corrosion Studies 317 5.2.1 The Battelle-NBS Study 317 5.3 Corrosion Damage Defects and Failures 325 5.3.1 Point Defects 326 5.3.2 Line Defects 327 5.3.3 Planar and Surface Defects 327 5.3.4 Bulk Defects 327 5.3.5 Fault 327 5.3.6 Connector Corrosion 327 5.3.7 Failure 328 5.4 Age-Reliability Characteristics 389 5.5 Historical Implications of Corrosion 390 5.6 Social Implications of Corrosion 392 5.7 The Nuclear Industry 392 5.8 Fossil Fuel Energy Systems 393 5.9 The Aerospace Industry 393 5.10 The Electrical and Electronics Industry 393 5.11 The Marine and Offshore Industry 394 5.12 The Automobile Industry 395 5.13 Bridges 395 5.14 Biomedical Engineering 397 5.15 The Defense Industry 397 5.16 Corrosion and Environmental Implications 397 References 398 Index 403

Read more less

Book SynopsisAnalysis and Modelling of Non-Steady Flow in Pipe and Channel Networks deals with flows in pipes and channel networks from the standpoints of hydraulics and modelling techniques and methods. These engineering problems occur in the course of the design and construction of hydroenergy plants, water-supply and other systems. In this book, the author presents his experience in solving these problems from the early 1970s to the present day. During this period new methods of solving hydraulic problems have evolved, due to the development of computers and numerical methods. This book is accompanied by a website which hosts the author''s software package, Simpip (an abbreviation of simulation of pipe flow) for solving non-steady pipe flow using the finite element method. The program also covers flows in channels. The book presents the numerical core of the SimpipCore program (written in Fortran). Key features: Table of ContentsPreface xiii 1 Hydraulic Networks 1 1.1 Finite element technique 1 1.1.1 Functional approximations 1 1.1.2 Discretization, finite element mesh 3 1.1.3 Approximate solution of differential equations 6 1.2 Unified hydraulic networks 21 1.3 Equation system 23 1.3.1 Elemental equations 23 1.3.2 Nodal equations 24 1.3.3 Fundamental system 25 1.4 Boundary conditions 28 1.4.1 Natural boundary conditions 28 1.4.2 Essential boundary conditions 30 1.5 Finite element matrix and vector 30 Reference 36 Further reading 36 2 Modelling of Incompressible Fluid Flow 37 2.1 Steady flow of an incompressible fluid 37 2.1.1 Equation of steady flow in pipes 37 2.1.2 Subroutine SteadyPipeMtx 40 2.1.3 Algorithms and procedures 42 2.1.4 Frontal procedure 45 2.1.5 Frontal solution of steady problem 51 2.1.6 Steady test example 57 2.2 Gradually varied flow in time 59 2.2.1 Time-dependent variability 59 2.2.2 Quasi non-steady model 60 2.2.3 Subroutine QuasiUnsteadyPipeMtx 61 2.2.4 Frontal solution of unsteady problem 63 2.2.5 Quasi-unsteady test example 65 2.3 Unsteady flow of an incompressible fluid 65 2.3.1 Dynamic equation 65 2.3.2 Subroutine RgdUnsteadyPipeMtx 68 2.3.3 Incompressible fluid acceleration 69 2.3.4 Acceleration test 72 2.3.5 Rigid test example 72 References 75 Further Reading 75 3 Natural Boundary Condition Objects 77 3.1 Tank object 77 3.1.1 Tank dimensioning 77 3.1.2 Tank model 79 3.1.3 Tank test examples 83 3.2 Storage 90 3.2.1 Storage equation 90 3.2.2 Fundamental system vector and matrix updating 91 3.3 Surge tank 91 3.3.1 Surge tank role in the hydropower plant 91 3.3.2 Surge tank types 94 3.3.3 Equations of oscillations in the supply system 99 3.3.4 Cylindrical surge tank 101 3.3.5 Model of a simple surge tank with upper and lower chamber 108 3.3.6 Differential surge tank model 112 3.3.7 Example 117 3.4 Vessel 121 3.4.1 Simple vessel 121 3.4.2 Vessel with air valves 124 3.4.3 Vessel model 126 3.4.4 Example 127 3.5 Air valves 128 3.5.1 Air valve positioning 128 3.5.2 Air valve model 133 3.6 Outlets 135 3.6.1 Discharge curves 135 3.6.2 Outlet model 137 Reference 138 Further reading 138 4 Water Hammer – Classic Theory 141 4.1 Description of the phenomenon 141 4.1.1 Travel of a surge wave following the sudden halt of a locomotive 141 4.1.2 Pressure wave propagation after sudden valve closure 141 4.1.3 Pressure increase due to a sudden flow arrest – the Joukowsky water hammer 143 4.2 Water hammer celerity 143 4.2.1 Relative movement of the coordinate system 143 4.2.2 Differential pressure and velocity changes at the water hammer front 145 4.2.3 Water hammer celerity in circular pipes 147 4.3 Water hammer phases 149 4.3.1 Sudden Flow Stop, Velocity Change V0 → 0 151 4.3.2 Sudden Pipe Filling, Velocity Change 0 → V0 154 4.3.3 Sudden Filling of Blind Pipe, Velocity Change 0 → V0 156 4.3.4 Sudden valve opening 159 4.3.5 Sudden forced inflow 161 4.4 Under-pressure and column separation 164 4.5 Influence of extreme friction 167 4.6 Gradual velocity changes 171 4.6.1 Gradual valve closing 171 4.6.2 Linear flow arrest 174 4.7 Influence of outflow area change 176 4.7.1 Graphic solution 178 4.7.2 Modified graphical procedure 179 4.8 Real closure laws 180 4.9 Water hammer propagation through branches 181 4.10 Complex pipelines 183 4.11 Wave kinematics 183 4.11.1 Wave functions 183 4.11.2 General solution 187 Reference 187 Further reading 187 5 Equations of Non-steady Flow in Pipes 189 5.1 Equation of state 189 5.1.1 p,T phase diagram 189 5.1.2 p,V phase diagram 190 5.2 Flow of an ideal fluid in a streamtube 195 5.2.1 Flow kinematics along a streamtube 195 5.2.2 Flow dynamics along a streamtube 198 5.3 The real flow velocity profile 202 5.3.1 Reynolds number, flow regimes 202 5.3.2 Velocity profile in the developed boundary layer 203 5.3.3 Calculations at the cross-section 204 5.4 Control volume 205 5.5 Mass conservation, equation of continuity 206 5.5.1 Integral form 206 5.5.2 Differential form 207 5.5.3 Elastic liquid 207 5.5.4 Compressible liquid 209 5.6 Energy conservation law, the dynamic equation 209 5.6.1 Total energy of the control volume 209 5.6.2 Rate of change of internal energy 210 5.6.3 Rate of change of potential energy 210 5.6.4 Rate of change of kinetic energy 210 5.6.5 Power of normal forces 211 5.6.6 Power of resistance forces 212 5.6.7 Dynamic equation 212 5.6.8 Flow resistances, the dynamic equation discussion 213 5.7 Flow models 215 5.7.1 Steady flow 215 5.7.2 Non-steady flow 217 5.8 Characteristic equations 220 5.8.1 Elastic liquid 220 5.8.2 Compressible fluid 223 5.9 Analytical solutions 225 5.9.1 Linearization of equations – wave equations 225 5.9.2 Riemann general solution 226 5.9.3 Some analytical solutions of water hammer 227 Reference 229 Further reading 229 6 Modelling of Non-steady Flow of Compressible Liquid in Pipes 231 6.1 Solution by the method of characteristics 231 6.1.1 Characteristic equations 231 6.1.2 Integration of characteristic equations, wave functions 232 6.1.3 Integration of Characteristic Equations, Variables H, V 234 6.1.4 The water hammer is the pipe with no resistance 235 6.1.5 Water hammers in pipes with friction 243 6.2 Subroutine UnsteadyPipeMtx 251 6.2.1 Subroutine FemUnsteadyPipeMtx 252 6.2.2 Subroutine ChtxUnsteadyPipeMtx 255 6.3 Comparison tests 261 6.3.1 Test example 261 6.3.2 Conclusion 263 Further reading 264 7 Valves and Joints 265 7.1 Valves 265 7.1.1 Local energy head losses at valves 265 7.1.2 Valve status 267 7.1.3 Steady flow modelling 267 7.1.4 Non-steady flow modelling 269 7.2 Joints 279 7.2.1 Energy head losses at joints 279 7.2.2 Steady flow modelling 279 7.2.3 Non-steady flow modelling 282 7.3 Test example 288 Reference 290 Further reading 290 8 Pumping Units 291 8.1 Introduction 291 8.2 Euler’s equations of turbo engines 291 8.3 Normal characteristics of the pump 295 8.4 Dimensionless pump characteristics 301 8.5 Pump specific speed 303 8.6 Complete characteristics of turbo engine 305 8.6.1 Normal and abnormal operation 305 8.6.2 Presentation of turbo engine characteristics depending on the direction of rotation 305 8.6.3 Knapp circle diagram 305 8.6.4 Suter curves 308 8.7 Drive engines 310 8.7.1 Asynchronous or induction motor 310 8.7.2 Adjustment of rotational speed by frequency variation 311 8.7.3 Pumping unit operation 312 8.8 Numerical model of pumping units 314 8.8.1 Normal pump operation 314 8.8.2 Reconstruction of complete characteristics from normal characteristics 318 8.8.3 Reconstruction of a hypothetic pumping unit 321 8.8.4 Reconstruction of the electric motor torque curve 322 8.9 Pumping element matrices 323 8.9.1 Steady flow modelling 323 8.9.2 Unsteady flow modelling 327 8.10 Examples of transient operation stage modelling 333 8.10.1 Test example (A) 334 8.10.2 Test example (B) 336 8.10.3 Test example (C) 339 8.10.4 Test example (D) 341 8.11 Analysis of operation and types of protection against pressure excesses 345 8.11.1 Normal and accidental operation 345 8.11.2 Layout 345 8.11.3 Supply pipeline, suction basin 346 8.11.4 Pressure pipeline and pumping station 348 8.11.5 Booster station 350 8.12 Something about protection of sewage pressure pipelines 353 8.13 Pumping units in a pressurized system with no tank 355 8.13.1 Introduction 355 8.13.2 Pumping unit regulation by pressure switches 355 8.13.3 Hydrophor regulation 358 8.13.4 Pumping unit regulation by variable rotational speed 360 Reference 362 Further reading 362 9 Open Channel Flow 363 9.1 Introduction 363 9.2 Steady flow in a mildly sloping channel 363 9.3 Uniform flow in a mildly sloping channel 365 9.3.1 Uniform flow velocity in open channel 365 9.3.2 Conveyance, discharge curve 368 9.3.3 Specific energy in a cross-section: Froude number 372 9.3.4 Uniform flow programming solution 377 9.4 Non-uniform gradually varied flow 378 9.4.1 Non-uniform flow characteristics 378 9.4.2 Water level differential equation 380 9.4.3 Water level shapes in prismatic channels 382 9.4.4 Transitions between supercritical and subcritical flow, hydraulic jump 383 9.4.5 Water level shapes in a non-prismatic channel 391 9.4.6 Gradually varied flow programming solutions 395 9.5 Sudden changes in cross-sections 398 9.6 Steady flow modelling 401 9.6.1 Channel stretch discretization 401 9.6.2 Initialization of channel stretches 402 9.6.3 Subroutine SubCriticalSteadyChannelMtx 404 9.6.4 Subroutine SuperCriticalSteadyChannelMtx 406 9.7 Wave kinematics in channels 407 9.7.1 Propagation of positive and negative waves 407 9.7.2 Velocity of the wave of finite amplitude 407 9.7.3 Elementary wave celerity 409 9.7.4 Shape of positive and negative waves 411 9.7.5 Standing wave – hydraulic jump 412 9.7.6 Wave propagation through transitional stretches 413 9.8 Equations of non-steady flow in open channels 414 9.8.1 Continuity equation 414 9.8.2 Dynamic equation 416 9.8.3 Law of momentum conservation 417 9.9 Equation of characteristics 422 9.9.1 Transformation of non-steady flow equations 422 9.9.2 Procedure of transformation into characteristics 423 9.10 Initial and boundary conditions 424 9.11 Non-steady flow modelling 425 9.11.1 Integration along characteristics 425 9.11.2 Matrix and vector of the channel finite element 427 9.11.3 Test examples 431 References 434 Further reading 435 10 Numerical Modelling in Karst 437 10.1 Underground karst flows 437 10.1.1 Introduction 437 10.1.2 Investigation works in karst catchment 437 10.1.3 The main development forms of karst phenomena in the Dinaric area 438 10.1.4 The size of the catchment 443 10.2 Conveyance of the karst channel system 446 10.2.1 Transformation of rainfall into spring hydrographs 446 10.2.2 Linear filtration law 447 10.2.3 Turbulent filtration law 449 10.2.4 Complex flow, channel flow, and filtration 451 10.3 Modelling of karst channel flows 453 10.3.1 Karst channel finite elements 453 10.3.2 Subroutine SteadyKanalMtx 454 10.3.3 Subroutine UnsteadyKanalMtx 456 10.3.4 Tests 458 10.4 Method of catchment discretization 463 10.4.1 Discretization of karst catchment channel system without diffuse flow 463 10.4.2 Equation of the underground accumulation of a karst sub-catchment 466 10.5 Rainfall transformation 468 10.5.1 Uniform input hydrograph 468 10.5.2 Rainfall at the catchment 473 10.6 Discretization of karst catchment with diffuse and channel flow 474 References 477 Further reading 477 11 Convective-dispersive Flows 479 11.1 Introduction 479 11.2 A reminder of continuum mechanics 479 11.3 Hydrodynamic dispersion 483 11.4 Equations of convective-dispersive heat transfer 485 11.5 Exact solutions of convective-dispersive equation 487 11.5.1 Convective equation 487 11.5.2 Convective-dispersive equation 488 11.5.3 Transformation of the convective-dispersive equation 490 11.6 Numerical modelling in a hydraulic network 490 11.6.1 The selection of solution basis, shape functions 490 11.6.2 Elemental equations: equation integration on the finite element 492 11.6.3 Nodal equations 495 11.6.4 Boundary conditions 495 11.6.5 Matrix and vector of finite element 496 11.6.6 Numeric solution test 497 11.6.7 Heat exchange of water table 499 11.6.8 Equilibrium temperature and linearization 500 11.6.9 Temperature disturbance caused by artificial sources 501 References 503 Further reading 503 12 Hydraulic Vibrations in Networks 505 12.1 Introduction 505 12.2 Vibration equations of a pipe element 506 12.3 Harmonic solution for the pipe element 508 12.4 Harmonic solutions in the network 509 12.5 Vibration source modelling 512 12.6 Hints to implementation in SimpipCore 512 12.7 Illustrative examples 515 Reference 518 Further reading 518 Index 519

Read more less

Book SynopsisIn recent years, control systems have become more sophisticated in order to meet increased performance and safety requirements for modern technological systems.Table of ContentsPreface xv Acknowledgments xvii 1 Introduction 1 1.1 Overview 1 1.2 Basic Concepts of Faults 2 1.3 Classification of Fault Detection Methods 3 1.3.1 Hardware redundancy based fault detection 3 1.3.2 Plausibility test 3 1.3.3 Signal-based fault diagnosis 4 1.3.4 Model-based fault detection 5 1.4 Types of Fault-Tolerant Control System 8 1.5 Objectives and Structure of AFTCS 8 1.6 Classification of Reconfigurable Control Methods 10 1.6.1 Classification based on control algorithms 10 1.6.2 Classification based on field of application 11 1.7 Outline of the Book 11 1.7.1 Methodology 11 1.7.2 Chapter organization 12 1.8 Notes 13 References 13 2 Fault Diagnosis and Detection 17 2.1 Introduction 17 2.2 Related Work 17 2.2.1 Model-based schemes 17 2.2.2 Model-free schemes 18 2.2.3 Probabilistic schemes 19 2.3 Integrated Approach 19 2.3.1 Improved multi-sensor data fusion 19 2.3.2 Unscented transformation 21 2.3.3 Unscented Kalman filter 22 2.3.4 Parameter estimation 23 2.3.5 Multi-sensor integration architectures 24 2.4 Robust Unscented Kalman Filter 26 2.4.1 Introduction 26 2.4.2 Problem formulation 28 2.4.3 Residual generation 29 2.4.4 Residual evaluation 29 2.5 Quadruple Tank System 30 2.5.1 Model of the QTS 31 2.5.2 Fault scenarios in QTS 32 2.5.3 Implementation structure of UKF 33 2.5.4 UKF with centralized multi-sensor data fusion 35 2.5.5 UKF with decentralized multi-sensor data fusion 35 2.5.6 Drift detection 35 2.6 Industrial Utility Boiler 38 2.6.1 Steam flow dynamics 38 2.6.2 Drum pressure dynamics 40 2.6.3 Drum level dynamics 40 2.6.4 Steam temperature 41 2.6.5 Fault model for the utility boiler 42 2.6.6 Fault scenarios in the utility boiler 43 2.6.7 UKF with centralized multi-sensor data fusion 43 2.6.8 UKF with decentralized multi-sensor data fusion 43 2.6.9 Drift detection 45 2.6.10 Remarks 45 2.7 Notes 46 References 46 3 Robust Fault Detection 49 3.1 Distributed Fault Diagnosis 49 3.1.1 Introduction 49 3.1.2 System model 50 3.1.3 Distributed FDI architecture 55 3.1.4 Distributed fault detection method 55 3.1.5 Adaptive thresholds 57 3.1.6 Distributed fault isolation method 62 3.1.7 Adaptive thresholds for DFDI 64 3.1.8 Fault detectability condition 67 3.1.9 Fault isolability analysis 69 3.1.10 Stability and learning capability 71 3.2 Robust Fault Detection Filters 74 3.2.1 Reference model 74 3.2.2 Design of adaptive threshold 76 3.2.3 Iterative update of noise mean and covariance 77 3.2.4 Unscented transformation (UT) 79 3.2.5 Car-like mobile robot application 82 3.3 Simultaneous Fault Detection and Control 90 3.3.1 Introduction 93 3.3.2 System model 93 3.3.3 Problem formulation 95 3.3.4 Simultaneous fault detection and control problem 96 3.3.5 Two-tank system simulation 106 3.4 Data-Driven Fault Detection Design 108 3.4.1 Introduction 109 3.4.2 Problem formulation 111 3.4.3 Selection of weighting matrix 112 3.4.4 Design of FDF for time-delay system 113 3.4.5 LMI design approach 114 3.4.6 Four-tank system simulation 119 3.5 Robust Adaptive Fault Estimation 122 3.5.1 Introduction 124 3.5.2 Problem statement 125 3.5.3 Adaptive observer 127 3.6 Notes 131 References 131 4 Fault-Tolerant Control Systems 135 4.1 Model Prediction-Based Design Approach 135 4.1.1 Introduction 135 4.1.2 System description 136 4.1.3 Discrete-time UKF 138 4.1.4 Unscented Transformation (UT) 141 4.1.5 Controller reconfiguration 143 4.1.6 Model predictive control 144 4.1.7 Interconnected CSTR units 149 4.1.8 Four-tank system 151 4.1.9 Simulation results 152 4.1.10 Drift detection in the interconnected CSTRs 152 4.1.11 Information fusion from UKF 152 4.1.12 Drift detection in the four-tank system 156 4.2 Observer-Based Active Structures 160 4.2.1 Problem statement 160 4.2.2 A separation principle 162 4.2.3 FDI residuals 164 4.2.4 Control of integrity 164 4.2.5 Overall stability 165 4.2.6 Design outline 165 4.2.7 Design of an active FTC scheme 166 4.2.8 Extraction of FDI–FTC pairs 166 4.2.9 Simulation 169 4.3 Notes 172 References 172 5 Fault-Tolerant Nonlinear Control Systems 175 5.1 Comparison of Fault Detection Schemes 175 5.2 Fault Detection in Nonlinear Systems 176 5.3 Nonlinear Observer-Based Residual Generation Schemes 176 5.3.1 General considerations 176 5.3.2 Extended Luenberger observer 177 5.3.3 Nonlinear identity observer approach 177 5.3.4 Unknown input observer approach 178 5.3.5 The disturbance decoupling nonlinear observer approach 178 5.3.6 Adaptive nonlinear observer approach 178 5.3.7 High-gain observer approach 178 5.3.8 Sliding-mode observer approach 178 5.3.9 Geometric approach 179 5.3.10 Game-theoretic approach 179 5.3.11 Observers for Lipschitz nonlinear systems 179 5.3.12 Lyapunov-reconstruction-based passive scheme 180 5.3.13 Time-varying results 185 5.3.14 Optimization-based active scheme 187 5.3.15 Learning-based active scheme 190 5.3.16 Adaptive backstepping-based active scheme 191 5.3.17 Switched control-based active scheme 193 5.3.18 Predictive control-based active scheme 195 5.4 Integrated Control Reconfiguration Scheme 197 5.4.1 Introduction 197 5.4.2 Basic features 198 5.4.3 Nonlinear model of a pendulum on a cart 199 5.4.4 NGA adaptive filter design 201 5.4.5 Simulation results 207 5.4.6 Performance evaluation 209 5.4.7 Comparative studies 211 5.5 Notes 215 References 215 6 Robust Fault Estimation 219 6.1 Introduction 219 6.2 System Description 220 6.3 Multiconstrained Fault Estimation 221 6.3.1 Observer design 221 6.3.2 Existence conditions 226 6.3.3 Improved results 228 6.3.4 Simulation results 232 6.4 Adaptive Fault Estimation 235 6.4.1 Introduction 236 6.4.2 Problem statement 238 6.4.3 Robust adaptive estimation 239 6.4.4 Internal stability analysis 240 6.4.5 Robust performance index 241 6.4.6 Simulation 242 6.5 Adaptive Tracking Control Scheme 244 6.5.1 Attitude dynamics 244 6.5.2 Fault detection scheme 248 6.5.3 Fault-tolerant tracking scheme 250 6.6 Notes 254 References 254 7 Fault Detection of Networked Control Systems 257 7.1 Introduction 257 7.2 Problem Formulation 258 7.3 Modified Residual Generator Scheme 259 7.3.1 Modified residual generator and dynamic analysis 259 7.3.2 Residual evaluation 261 7.3.3 Co-design of residual generator and evaluation 264 7.4 Quantized Fault-Tolerant Control 267 7.4.1 Introduction 267 7.4.2 Problem statement 268 7.4.3 Quantized control design 271 7.4.4 Simulation 276 7.5 Sliding-Mode Observer 278 7.5.1 Introduction 278 7.5.2 Dynamic model 280 7.5.3 Limited state measurements 286 7.5.4 Simulation results: full state measurements 290 7.5.5 Simulation results: partial state measurements 293 7.6 Control of Linear Switched Systems 294 7.6.1 Introduction 295 7.6.2 Problem formulation 295 7.6.3 Stability of a closed-loop system 296 7.6.4 Simulation 300 7.7 Notes 303 References 303 8 Industrial Fault-Tolerant Architectures 307 8.1 Introduction 307 8.2 System Architecture 308 8.3 Architecture of a Fault-Tolerant Node 309 8.3.1 Basic architecture 309 8.3.2 Architecture with improved reliability 310 8.3.3 Symmetric node architecture 310 8.3.4 Results 311 8.4 Recovery Points 312 8.5 Networks 314 8.6 System Fault Injection and Monitoring 315 8.6.1 Monitoring systems 315 8.6.2 Design methodology 316 8.7 Notes 318 References 319 9 Fault Estimation for Stochastic Systems 321 9.1 Introduction 321 9.2 Actuator Fault Diagnosis Design 322 9.3 Fault-Tolerant Controller Design 324 9.4 Extension to an Unknown Input Case 325 9.5 Aircraft Application 326 9.5.1 Transforming the system into standard form 327 9.5.2 Simulation results 329 9.6 Router Fault Accommodation in Real Time 330 9.6.1 Canonical controller and achievable behavior 333 9.6.2 Router modeling and desired behavior 334 9.6.3 Description of fault behavior 336 9.6.4 A least restrictive controller 338 9.7 Fault Detection for Markov Jump Systems 338 9.7.1 Introduction 339 9.7.2 Problem formulation 340 9.7.3 H∞ bounded real lemmas 343 9.7.4 H∞ FD filter design 345 9.7.5 Simulation 347 9.8 Notes 352 References 353 10 Applications 355 10.1 Detection of Abrupt Changes in an Electrocardiogram 355 10.1.1 Introduction 355 10.1.2 Modeling ECG signals with an AR model 356 10.1.3 Linear models with additive abrupt changes 358 10.1.4 Off-line detection of abrupt changes in ECG 361 10.1.5 Online detection of abrupt changes in ECG 363 10.2 Detection of Abrupt Changes in the Frequency Domain 365 10.2.1 Introduction 365 10.2.2 Problem formulation 366 10.2.3 Frequency domain ML ratio estimation 368 10.2.4 Likelihood of the hypothesis of no abrupt change 372 10.2.5 Effect of an abrupt change 374 10.2.6 Simulation results 382 10.3 Electromechanical Positioning System 383 10.3.1 Introduction 383 10.3.2 Problem formulation 385 10.3.3 Test bed 386 10.4 Application to Fermentation Processes 387 10.4.1 Nonlinear faulty dynamic system 388 10.4.2 Residual characteristics 389 10.4.3 The parameter filter 399 10.4.4 Fault filter 400 10.4.5 Fault isolation and identification 401 10.4.6 Isolation speed 401 10.4.7 Parameter partition 402 10.4.8 Adaptive intervals 402 10.4.9 Simulation studies 405 10.5 Flexible-Joint Robots 415 10.5.1 Problem formulation 415 10.5.2 Fault detection scheme 417 10.5.3 Adaptive fault accommodation control 420 10.5.4 Control with prescribed performance bounds 422 10.5.5 Simulation results 425 10.6 Notes 429 References 430 A Supplementary Information 435 A.1 Notation 435 A.1.1 Kronecker products 436 A.1.2 Some definitions 437 A.1.3 Matrix lemmas 438 A.2 Results from Probability Theory 440 A.2.1 Results-A 440 A.2.2 Results-B 441 A.2.3 Results-C 441 A.2.4 Minimum mean square estimate 442 A.3 Stability Notions 444 A.3.1 Practical stabilizability 444 A.3.2 Razumikhin stability 445 A.4 Basic Inequalities 447 A.4.1 Schur complements 447 A.4.2 Bounding inequalities 449 A.5 Linear Matrix Inequalities 453 A.5.1 Basics 453 A.5.2 Some standard problems 454 A.5.3 The S-procedure 455 A.6 Some Formulas on Matrix Inverses 456 A.6.1 Inverse of block matrices 456 A.6.2 Matrix inversion lemma 457 References 458 Index 459

Read more less

Book SynopsisGives readers a more thorough understanding of DEM and equips researchers for independent work and an ability to judge methods related to simulation of polygonal particles Introduces DEM from the fundamental concepts (theoretical mechanics and solidstate physics), with 2D and 3D simulation methods for polygonal particles Provides the fundamentals of coding discrete element method (DEM) requiring little advance knowledge of granular matter or numerical simulation Highlights the numerical tricks and pitfalls that are usually only realized after years of experience, with relevant simple experiments as applications Presents a logical approach starting withthe mechanical and physical bases,followed by a description of the techniques and finally their applications Written by a key author presenting ideas on how to model the dynamics of angular particles using polygons and polyhedral Accompanying website includes MATLATable of ContentsAbout the Authors xv Preface xvii Acknowledgements xix List of Abbreviations xxi 1 Mechanics 1 1.1 Degrees of freedom 1 1.1.1 Particle mechanics and constraints 1 1.1.2 From point particles to rigid bodies 3 1.1.3 More context and terminology 4 1.2 Dynamics of rectilinear degrees of freedom 5 1.3 Dynamics of angular degrees of freedom 6 1.3.1 Rotation in two dimensions 6 1.3.2 Moment of inertia 7 1.3.3 From two to three dimensions 9 1.3.4 Rotation matrix in three dimensions 12 1.3.5 Three-dimensional moments of inertia 13 1.3.6 Space-fixed and body-fixed coordinate systems and equations of motion 16 1.3.7 Problems with Euler angles 19 1.3.8 Rotations represented using complex numbers 20 1.3.9 Quaternions 21 1.3.10 Derivation of quaternion dynamics 27 1.4 The phase space 29 1.4.1 Qualitative discussion of the time dependence of linear oscillations 31 1.4.2 Resonance 34 1.4.3 The flow in phase space 35 1.5 Nonlinearities 39 1.5.1 Harmonic balance 40 1.5.2 Resonance in nonlinear systems 42 1.5.3 Higher harmonics and frequency mixing 44 1.5.4 The van der Pol oscillator 45 1.6 From higher harmonics to chaos 47 1.6.1 The bifurcation cascade 47 1.6.2 The nonlinear frictional oscillator and Poincaré maps 47 1.6.3 The route to chaos 51 1.6.4 Boundary conditions and many-particle systems 52 1.7 Stability and conservation laws 53 1.7.1 Stability in statics 54 1.7.2 Stability in dynamics 55 1.7.3 Stable axes of rotation around the principal axis 56 1.7.4 Noether’s theorem and conservation laws 58 1.8 Further reading 61 Exercises 61 References 63 2 Numerical Integration of Ordinary Differential Equations 65 2.1 Fundamentals of numerical analysis 65 2.1.1 Floating point numbers 65 2.1.2 Big-O notation 67 2.1.3 Relative and absolute error 69 2.1.4 Truncation error 69 2.1.5 Local and global error 71 2.1.6 Stability 74 2.1.7 Stable integrators for unstable problems 74 2.2 Numerical analysis for ordinary differential equations 75 2.2.1 Variable notation and transformation of the order of a differential equation 75 2.2.2 Differences in the simulation of atoms and molecules, as compared to macroscopic particles 76 2.2.3 Truncation error for solutions of ordinary differential equations 76 2.2.4 Fundamental approaches 77 2.2.5 Explicit Euler method 77 2.2.6 Implicit Euler method 78 2.3 Runge–Kutta methods 79 2.3.1 Adaptive step-size control 79 2.3.2 Dense output and event location 81 2.3.3 Partitioned Runge–Kutta methods 82 2.4 Symplectic methods 82 2.4.1 The classical Verlet method 82 2.4.2 Velocity-Verlet methods 83 2.4.3 Higher-order velocity-Verlet methods 85 2.4.4 Pseudo-symplectic methods 88 2.4.5 Order, accuracy and energy conservation 88 2.4.6 Backward error analysis 89 2.4.7 Case study: the harmonic oscillator with and without viscous damping 90 2.5 Stiff problems 92 2.5.1 Evaluating computational costs 93 2.5.2 Stiff solutions and error as noise 94 2.5.3 Order reduction 94 2.6 Backward difference formulae 94 2.6.1 Implicit integrators of the predictor–corrector formulae 94 2.6.2 The corrector step 96 2.6.3 Multiple corrector steps 97 2.6.4 Program flow 98 2.6.5 Variable time-step and variable order 98 2.7 Other methods 98 2.7.1 Why not to use self-written or novel integrators 98 2.7.2 Stochastic differential equations 100 2.7.3 Extrapolation and high-order methods 100 2.7.4 Multi-rate integrators 101 2.7.5 Zero-order algorithms 101 2.8 Differential algebraic equations 103 2.8.1 The pendulum in Cartesian coordinates 103 2.8.2 Initial conditions 106 2.8.3 Drift and stabilization 107 2.9 Selecting an integrator 109 2.9.1 Performance and stability 109 2.9.2 Angular degrees of freedom 109 2.9.3 Force equilibrium 109 2.9.4 Exploring new fields 110 2.9.5 ODE solvers unsuitable for DEM simulations 110 2.10 Further reading 111 Exercises 113 References 125 3 Friction 129 3.1 Sliding Coulomb friction 129 3.1.1 A block on a slope 130 3.1.2 Static and dynamic friction coefficients 132 3.1.3 Apparent and actual contact area 134 3.1.4 Roughness and the friction coefficient 135 3.1.5 Adhesion and chemical bonding 136 3.2 Other contact geometries of Coulomb friction 136 3.2.1 Rolling friction 137 3.2.2 Pivoting friction 138 3.2.3 Sliding and rolling friction: the billiard problem 140 3.2.4 Sliding and rolling friction: cylinder on a slope 143 3.2.5 Pivoting and rolling friction 144 3.3 Exact implementation of friction 144 3.3.1 Establishing the difference between dynamic and static friction 145 3.3.2 Single-particle contact 148 3.3.3 Frictional linear chain 151 3.3.4 Higher dimensions 152 3.4 Modeling and regularizations 153 3.4.1 The Cundall–Strack model 153 3.4.2 Cundall-Strack friction in three dimensions 155 3.5 Unfortunate treatment of Coulomb friction in the literature 155 3.5.1 Insufficient models 156 3.5.2 Misunderstandings concerning surface roughness and friction 158 3.5.3 The Painlevé paradox 158 3.6 Further reading 158 Exercises 159 References 159 4 Phenomenology of Granular Materials 161 4.1 Phenomenology of grains 161 4.1.1 Interaction 161 4.1.2 Friction and dissipation 162 4.1.3 Length and time scales 162 4.1.4 Particle shape, and rolling and sliding 163 4.2 General phenomenology of granular agglomerates 164 4.2.1 Disorder 164 4.2.2 Heap formation 165 4.2.3 Tri-axial compression and shear band formation 166 4.2.4 Arching 168 4.2.5 Clogging 168 4.3 History effects in granular materials 168 4.3.1 Hysteresis 169 4.3.2 Reynolds dilatancy 170 4.3.3 Pressure distribution under heaps 171 4.4 Further reading 173 References 173 5 Condensed Matter and Solid State Physics 175 5.1 Structure and properties of matter 176 5.1.1 Crystal structures in two dimensions 176 5.1.2 Crystal structures in three dimensions 178 5.1.3 From the Wigner–Seitz cell to the Voronoi construction 180 5.1.4 Strength parameters of materials 182 5.1.5 Strength of granular assemblies 185 5.2 From wave numbers to the Fourier transform 186 5.2.1 Wave numbers and the reciprocal lattice 186 5.2.2 The Fourier transform in one dimension 188 5.2.3 Properties of the FFT 189 5.2.4 Other Fourier variables 193 5.2.5 The power spectrum 193 5.3 Waves and dispersion 194 5.3.1 Phase and group velocities 194 5.3.2 Phase and group velocities for particle systems 196 5.3.3 Numerical computation of the dispersion relation 199 5.3.4 Density of states 200 5.3.5 Dispersion relation for disordered systems 202 5.3.6 Solitons 204 5.4 Further reading 206 Exercises 206 References 210 6 Modeling and Simulation 213 6.1 Experiments, theory and simulation 213 6.2 Computability, observables and auxiliary quantities 214 6.3 Experiments, theories and the discrete element method 215 6.4 The discrete element method and other particle simulation methods 217 6.5 Other simulation methods for granular materials 218 6.5.1 Continuum mechanics 218 6.5.2 Lattice models 219 6.5.3 The Monte Carlo method 220 References 221 7 The Discrete Element Method in Two Dimensions 223 7.1 The discrete element method with soft particles 223 7.1.1 The bouncing ball as a prototype for the DEM approach 224 7.1.2 Using two different stiffness constants to model damping 227 7.1.3 Simulation of round DEM particles in one dimension 228 7.1.4 Simulation of round particles in two dimensions 228 7.2 Modeling of polygonal particles 229 7.2.1 Initializing two-dimensional particles 229 7.2.2 Computation of the mass, center of mass and moment of inertia 231 7.2.3 Non-convex polygons 237 7.3 Interaction 237 7.3.1 Shape-dependent elastic force law 238 7.3.2 Computation of the overlap geometry 240 7.3.3 Computation of other dynamic quantities 244 7.3.4 Damping 246 7.3.5 Cohesive forces 248 7.3.6 Penetrating particle overlaps 249 7.4 Initial and boundary conditions 250 7.4.1 Initializing convex polygons 250 7.4.2 General considerations 252 7.4.3 Initial positions 253 7.4.4 Boundary conditions 255 7.5 Neighborhood algorithms 257 7.5.1 Algorithms not recommended for elongated particles 258 7.5.2 ‘Sort and sweep’ 263 7.6 Time integration 271 7.7 Program issues 272 7.7.1 Program restart 272 7.7.2 Program initialization 274 7.7.3 Program flow 274 7.7.4 Proposed stages for the development of programs 276 7.7.5 Modularization 278 7.8 Computing observables 280 7.8.1 Computing averages 280 7.8.2 Homogenization and spatial averages 281 7.8.3 Computing error bars 282 7.8.4 Autocorrelation functions 284 7.9 Further reading 285 Exercises 286 References 286 8 The Discrete Element Method in Three Dimensions 289 8.1 Generalization of the force law to three dimensions 289 8.1.1 The elastic force 290 8.1.2 Contact velocity and related forces 291 8.2 Initialization of particles and their properties 292 8.2.1 Basic concepts and data structures 292 8.2.2 Particle generation and geometry update 294 8.2.3 Decomposition of a polyhedron into tetrahedra 296 8.2.4 Volume, mass and center of mass 299 8.2.5 Moment of inertia 300 8.3 Overlap computation 301 8.3.1 Triangle intersection by using the point–direction form 301 8.3.2 Triangle intersection by using the point–normal form 305 8.3.3 Comparison of the two algorithms 309 8.3.4 Determination of inherited vertices 310 8.3.5 Determination of generated vertices 312 8.3.6 Determination of the faces of the overlap polyhedron 315 8.3.7 Determination of the contact area and normal 320 8.4 Optimization for vertex computation 322 8.4.1 Determination of neighboring features 323 8.4.2 Neighboring features for vertex computation 324 8.5 The neighborhood algorithm for polyhedra 325 8.5.1 ‘Sort and sweep’ in three dimensions 325 8.5.2 Worst-case performance in three dimensions 326 8.5.3 Refinement of the contact list 327 8.6 Programming strategy for the polyhedral simulation 329 8.7 The effect of dimensionality and the choice of boundaries 332 8.7.1 Force networks and dimensionality 332 8.7.2 Quasi-two-dimensional geometries 332 8.7.3 Packings and sound propagation 333 8.8 Further reading 333 References 333 9 Alternative Modeling Approaches 335 9.1 Rigidly connected spheres 335 9.2 Elliptical shapes 336 9.2.1 Elliptical potentials 337 9.2.2 Overlap computation for ellipses 337 9.2.3 Newton–Raphson iteration 339 9.2.4 Ellipse intersection computed with generalized eigenvalues 340 9.2.5 Ellipsoids 344 9.2.6 Superquadrics 344 9.3 Composites of curves 345 9.3.1 Composites of arcs and cylinders 345 9.3.2 Spline curves 345 9.3.3 Level sets 347 9.4 Rigid particles 347 9.4.1 Collision dynamics (‘event-driven method’) 347 9.4.2 Contact mechanics 348 9.5 Discontinuous deformation analysis 349 9.6 Further reading 349 References 349 10 Running, Debugging and Optimizing Programs 353 10.1 Programming style 353 10.1.1 Literature 354 10.1.2 Choosing a programming language 355 10.1.3 Composite data types, strong typing and object orientation 356 10.1.4 Readability 356 10.1.5 Selecting variable names 357 10.1.6 Comments 359 10.1.7 Particle simulations versus solving ordinary differential equations 361 10.2 Hardware, memory and parallelism 362 10.2.1 Architecture and programming model 362 10.2.2 Memory hierarchy and cache 364 10.2.3 Multiprocessors, multi-core processors and shared memory 365 10.2.4 Peak performance and benchmarks 365 10.2.5 Amdahl’s law, speed-up and efficiency 367 10.3 Program writing 369 10.3.1 Editors 370 10.3.2 Compilers 370 10.3.3 Makefiles 371 10.3.4 Writing and testing code 372 10.3.5 Debugging 377 10.4 Measuring load, time and profiles 378 10.4.1 The ‘top’ command 379 10.4.2 Xload 379 10.4.3 Performance monitor for multi-core processors 380 10.4.4 The ‘time’ command 380 10.4.5 The Unix profiler 383 10.4.6 Interactive profilers 383 10.5 Speeding up programs 383 10.5.1 Estimating the time consumption of operations 383 10.5.2 Compiler optimization options 384 10.5.3 Optimizations by hand 389 10.5.4 Avoiding unnecessary disk output 390 10.5.5 Look up or compute 390 10.5.6 Shared-memory parallelism and OpenMP 390 10.6 Further reading 391 Exercises 392 References 392 11 Beyond the Scope of This Book 395 11.1 Non-convex particles 395 11.2 Contact dynamics and friction 395 11.3 Impact mechanics 396 11.4 Fragmentation and fracturing 396 11.5 Coupling codes for particles and elastic continua 396 11.6 Coupling of particles and fluid 398 11.6.1 Basic considerations for the fluid simulation 398 11.6.2 Verification of the fluid code 398 11.6.3 Macroscopic simulations 399 11.6.4 Microscopic simulations 399 11.6.5 Particle approach for both particles and fluid 400 11.6.6 Mesh-based modeling approaches 402 11.7 The finite element method for contact problems 402 11.8 Long-range interactions 403 References 403 A MATLAB R○ as Programming Language 407 A. 1 Getting started with MATLAB R○ 407 A. 2 Data types and names 408 A. 3 Matrix functions and linear algebra 409 A. 4 Syntax and control structures 413 A. 5 Self-written functions 415 A. 6 Function overwriting and overloading 416 A. 7 Graphics 417 A. 8 Solving ordinary differential equations 418 A. 9 Pitfalls of using MATLAB R○ 420 A. 10 Profiling and optimization 424 A. 11 Free alternatives to MATLAB R○ 425 A. 12 Further reading 425 Exercises 426 References 430 B Geometry and Computational Geometry 433 B. 1 Trigonometric functions 433 B. 2 Points, line segments and vectors 435 B. 3 Products of vectors 436 B.3. 1 Inner product (scalar product, dot product) 436 B.3. 2 Orthogonality 437 B.. 3 Outer product 438 B.3. 4 Vector product 438 B.3. 5 Triple product 440 B. 4 Projections and rejections 441 B.4. 1 Projection of a vector onto another vector 441 B.4. 2 Rejection of one vector with respect to another vector 442 B. 5 Lines and planes 442 B.5. 1 Lines and line segments 442 B.5. 2 Planes 444 B. 6 Oriented quantities: distance, area, volume etc. 446 B. 7 Further reading 449 References 449 Index 451

Read more less

Book SynopsisWith the proliferation of electronic devices, the world will need to double its energy supply by 2050. This book addresses this challenge and discusses synthesis and characterization of carbon nanomaterials for energy conversion and storage. Addresses one of the leading challenges facing society today as we steer away from dwindling supplies of fossil fuels and a rising need for electric power due to the proliferation of electronic products Promotes the use of carbon nanomaterials for energy applications Systematic coverage: synthesis, characterization, and a wide array of carbon nanomaterials are described Detailed descriptions of solar cells, electrodes, thermoelectrics, supercapacitors, and lithium-ion-based storage Discusses special architecture required for energy storage including hydrogen, methane, etc. Table of ContentsList of Contributors xiii Preface xvii PART I Synthesis and characterization of carbon nanomaterials 1 1 Fullerenes, Higher Fullerenes, and their Hybrids: Synthesis, Characterization, and Environmental Considerations 3 1.1 Introduction, 3 1.2 Fullerene, Higher Fullerenes, and Nanohybrids: Structures and Historical Perspective, 5 1.2.1 C60 Fullerene, 5 1.2.2 Higher Fullerenes, 6 1.2.3 Fullerene-Based Nanohybrids, 7 1.3 Synthesis and Characterization, 7 1.3.1 Fullerenes and Higher Fullerenes, 7 1.3.1.1 Carbon Soot Synthesis, 7 1.3.1.2 Extraction, Separation, and Purification, 10 1.3.1.3 Chemical Synthesis Processes, 11 1.3.1.4 Fullerene-Based Nanohybrids, 12 1.3.2 Characterization, 12 1.3.2.1 Mass Spectroscopy, 12 1.3.2.2 NMR, 13 1.3.2.3 Optical Spectroscopy, 13 1.3.2.4 HPLC, 14 1.3.2.5 Electron Microscopy, 14 1.3.2.6 Static and Dynamic Light Scattering, 14 1.4 Energy Applications, 17 1.4.1 Solar Cells and Photovoltaic Materials, 17 1.4.2 Hydrogen Storage Materials, 19 1.4.3 Electronic Components (Batteries, Capacitors, and Open]Circuit Voltage Applications), 20 1.4.4 Superconductivity, Electrical, and Electronic Properties Relevant to Energy Applications, 20 1.4.5 Photochemical and Photophysical Properties Pertinent for Energy Applications, 21 1.5 Environmental Considerations for Fullerene Synthesis and Processing, 21 1.5.1 Existing Environmental Literature for C60, 22 1.5.2 Environmental Literature Status for Higher Fullerenes and NHs, 24 1.5.3 Environmental Considerations, 24 1.5.3.1 Consideration for Solvents, 26 1.5.3.2 Considerations for Derivatization, 26 1.5.3.3 Consideration for Coatings, 27 References, 28 2 Carbon Nanotubes 47 2.1 Synthesis of Carbon Nanotubes, 47 2.1.1 Introduction and Structure of Carbon Nanotube, 47 2.1.2 Arc Discharge and Laser Ablation, 49 2.1.3 Chemical Vapor Deposition, 50 2.1.4 Aligned Growth, 52 2.1.5 Selective Synthesis of Carbon Nanotubes, 57 2.1.6 Summary, 63 2.2 Characterization of Nanotubes, 63 2.2.1 Introduction, 63 2.2.2 Spectroscopy, 63 2.2.2.1 Raman Spectroscopy, 63 2.2.2.2 Optical Absorption (UV]Vis]NIR), 66 2.2.2.3 Photoluminescence Spectroscopy, 68 2.2.3 Microscopy, 70 2.2.3.1 Scanning Tunneling Microscopy and Transmission Electron Microscopy, 70 2.3 Summary, 73 References, 73 3 Synthesis and Characterization of Graphene 85 3.1 Introduction, 85 3.2 Overview of Graphene Synthesis Methodologies, 87 3.2.1 Mechanical Exfoliation, 90 3.2.2 Chemical Exfoliation, 93 3.2.3 Chemical Synthesis: Graphene from Reduced Graphene Oxide, 97 3.2.4 Direct Chemical Synthesis, 102 3.2.5 CVD Process, 102 3.2.5.1 Graphene Synthesis by CVD Process, 103 3.2.5.2 Graphene Synthesis by Plasma CVD Process, 109 3.2.5.3 Grain and GBs in CVD Graphene, 110 3.2.6 Epitaxial Growth of Graphene on SiC Surface, 111 3.3 Graphene Characterizations, 113 3.3.1 Optical Microscopy, 114 3.3.2 Raman Spectroscopy, 116 3.3.3 High Resolution Transmission Electron Microscopy, 118 3.3.4 Scanning Probe Microscopy, 119 3.4 Summary and Outlook, 121 References, 122 4 Doping Carbon Nanomaterials with Heteroatoms 133 4.1 Introduction, 133 4.2 Local Bonding of the Dopants, 135 4.3 Synthesis of Heterodoped Nanocarbons, 137 4.4 Characterization of Heterodoped Nanotubes and Graphene, 139 4.5 Potential Applications, 146 4.6 Summary and Outlook, 152 References, 152 Part II Carbon Na nomaterials For Energy Conversion 163 5 High-Performance Polymer Solar Cells Containing Carbon Nanomaterials 165 5.1 Introduction, 165 5.2 Carbon Nanomaterials as Transparent Electrodes, 167 5.2.1 CNT Electrode, 168 5.2.2 Graphene Electrode, 169 5.2.3 Graphene/CNT Hybrid Electrode, 171 5.3 Carbon Nanomaterials as Charge Extraction Layers, 171 5.4 Carbon Nanomaterials in the Active Layer, 178 5.4.1 Carbon Nanomaterials as an Electron Acceptor, 178 5.4.2 Carbon Nanomaterials as Additives, 180 5.4.3 Donor/Acceptor Functionalized with Carbon Nanomaterials, 183 5.5 Concluding Remarks, 185 Acknowledgments, 185 References, 185 6 Graphene for Energy Solutions and Its Printable Applications 191 6.1 Introduction to Graphene, 191 6.2 Energy Harvesting from Solar Cells, 192 6.2.1 DSSCs, 193 6.2.2 Graphene and DSSCs, 195 6.2.2.1 Counter Electrode, 195 6.2.2.2 Photoanode, 198 6.2.2.3 Transparent Conducting Oxide, 199 6.2.2.4 Electrolyte, 200 6.3 Opv Devices, 200 6.3.1 Graphene and OPVs, 201 6.3.1.1 Transparent Conducting Oxide, 201 6.3.1.2 BHJ, 203 6.3.1.3 Hole Transport Layer, 204 6.4 Lithium-Ion Batteries, 204 6.4.1 Graphene and Lithium-Ion Batteries, 205 6.4.1.1 Anode Material, 205 6.4.1.2 Cathode Material, 209 6.4.2 Li–S and Li–O2 Batteries, 211 6.5 Supercapacitors, 212 6.5.1 Graphene and Supercapacitors, 213 6.6 Graphene Inks, 216 6.7 Conclusions, 219 References, 220 7 Quantum Dot and Heterojunction Solar Cells Containing Carbon Nanomaterials 237 7.1 Introduction, 237 7.2 QD Solar Cells Containing Carbon Nanomaterials, 238 7.2.1 CNTs and Graphene as TCE in QD Solar Cells, 238 7.2.1.1 CNTs as TCE Material in QD Solar Cells, 239 7.2.1.2 Graphene as TCE Material in QD Solar Cells, 240 7.2.2 Carbon Nanomaterials and QD Composites in Solar Cells, 241 7.2.2.1 C60 and QD Composites, 241 7.2.2.2 CNTs and QD Composites, 244 7.2.2.3 Graphene and QD Composites, 245 7.2.3 Graphene QDs Solar Cells, 247 7.2.3.1 Physical Properties of GQDs, 247 7.2.3.2 Synthesis of GQDs, 247 7.2.3.3 PV Devices of GQDs, 247 7.3 Carbon Nanomaterial/Semiconductor Heterojunction Solar Cells, 249 7.3.1 Principle of Carbon/Semiconductor Heterojunction Solar Cells, 249 7.3.2 a-C/Semiconductor Heterojunction Solar Cells, 250 7.3.3 CNT/Semiconductor Heterojunction Solar Cells, 252 7.3.4 Graphene/Semiconductor Heterojunction Solar Cells, 253 7.4 Summary, 261 References, 261 8 Fuel Cell Catalysts Based on Carbon Nanomaterials 267 8.1 Introduction, 267 8.2 Nanocarbon-Supported Catalysts, 268 8.2.1 CNT-Supported Catalysts, 268 8.2.2 Graphene-Supported Catalysts, 271 8.3 Interface Interaction between Pt Clusters and Graphitic Surface, 276 8.4 Carbon Catalyst, 281 8.4.1 Catalytic Activity for ORR, 281 8.4.2 Effect of N-Dope on O2 Adsorption, 283 8.4.3 Effect of N-Dope on the Local Electronic Structure for Pyridinic-N and Graphitic-N, 285 8.4.3.1 Pyridinic-N, 287 8.4.3.2 Graphitic-N, 288 8.4.4 Summary of Active Sites for ORR, 290 References, 291 PART III Carbon nanomaterials for energy storage 295 9 Supercapacitors Based on Carbon Nanomaterials 297 9.1 Introduction, 297 9.2 Supercapacitor Technology and Performance, 298 9.3 Nanoporous Carbon, 304 9.3.1 Supercapacitors with Nonaqueous Electrolytes, 304 9.3.2 Supercapacitors with Aqueous Electrolytes, 311 9.4 Graphene and Carbon Nanotubes, 321 9.5 Nanostructured Carbon Composites, 326 9.6 Other Composites with Carbon Nanomaterials, 327 9.7 Conclusions, 329 References, 330 10 Lithium-Ion Batteries Based on Carbon Nanomaterials 339 10.1 Introduction, 339 10.2 Improving Li-Ion Battery Energy Density, 344 10.3 Improvements to Lithium-Ion Batteries Using Carbon Nanomaterials, 345 10.3.1 Carbon Nanomaterials as Active Materials, 345 10.4 Carbon Nanomaterials as Conductive Additives, 346 10.4.1 Current and SOA Conductive Additives, 346 10.5 Swcnt Additives to Increase Energy Density, 348 10.6 Carbon Nanomaterials as Current Collectors, 351 10.6.1 Current Collector Options, 351 10.7 Implementation of Carbon Nanomaterial Current Collectors for Standard Electrode Composites, 354 10.7.1 Anode: MCMB Active Material, 354 10.7.2 Cathode: NCA Active Material, 356 10.8 Implementation of Carbon Nanomaterial Current Collectors for Alloying Active Materials, 356 10.9 Ultrasonic Bonding for Pouch Cell Development, 358 10.10 Conclusion, 359 References, 362 11 Lithium/Sulfur Batteries Based on Carbon Nanomaterials 365 11.1 Introduction, 365 11.2 Fundamentals of Lithium/Sulfur Cells, 366 11.2.1 Operating Principles, 366 11.2.2 Scientific Problems, 368 11.2.2.1 Dissolution and Shuttle Effect of Lithium Polysulfides, 369 11.2.2.2 Insulating Nature of Sulfur and Li2S, 369 11.2.2.3 Volume Change of the Sulfur Electrode during Cycling, 369 11.2.3 Research Strategy, 369 11.3 Nanostructure Carbon–Sulfur, 370 11.3.1 Porous Carbon–Sulfur Composite, 371 11.3.2 One-Dimensional Carbon–Sulfur Composite, 373 11.3.3 Two-Dimensional Carbon (Graphene)–Sulfur, 375 11.3.4 Three-Dimensional Carbon Paper–Sulfur, 377 11.3.5 Preparation Method of Sulfur–Carbon Composite, 377 11.4 Carbon Layer as a Polysulfide Separator, 380 11.5 Opportunities and Perspectives, 381 References, 382 12 Lithium–air Batteries Based on Carbon Nanomaterials 385 12.1 Metal–Air Batteries, 385 12.2 Li–Air Chemistry, 387 12.2.1 Aqueous Electrolyte Cell, 387 12.2.2 Nonaqueous Aprotic Electrolyte Cell, 389 12.2.3 Mixed Aqueous/Aprotic Electrolyte Cell, 391 12.2.4 All Solid-State Cell, 391 12.3 Carbon Nanomaterials for Li–Air Cells Cathode, 393 12.4 Amorphous Carbons, 393 12.4.1 Porous Carbons, 393 12.5 Graphitic Carbons, 395 12.5.1 Carbon Nanotubes, 395 12.5.2 Graphene, 398 12.5.3 Composite Air Electrodes, 400 12.6 Conclusions, 403 References, 403 13 Carbon-Based Nanomaterials for H2 Storage 407 13.1 Introduction, 407 13.2 Hydrogen Storage in Fullerenes, 408 13.3 Hydrogen Storage in Carbon Nanotubes, 414 13.4 Hydrogen Storage in Graphene-Based Materials, 419 13.5 Conclusions, 427 Acknowledgments, 428 References, 428 Index 439

Read more less

Book SynopsisAdvanced research reference examining the closed and open quantum systems Control of Quantum Systems: Theory and Methods provides an insight into the modern approaches to control of quantum systems evolution, with a focus on both closed and open (dissipative) quantum systems.Table of ContentsAbout the Author xiii Preface xv 1 Introduction 1 1.1 Quantum States 2 1.2 Quantum Systems Control Models 3 1.2.1 Schrödinger Equation 4 1.2.2 Liouville Equation 4 1.2.3 Markovian Master Equations 5 1.2.4 Non-Markovian Master Equations 5 1.3 Structures of Quantum Control Systems 6 1.4 Control Tasks and Objectives 8 1.5 System Characteristics Analyses 9 1.5.1 Controllability 9 1.5.2 Reachability 9 1.5.3 Observability 10 1.5.4 Stability 10 1.5.5 Convergence 10 1.5.6 Robustness 10 1.6 Performance of Control Systems 11 1.6.1 Probability 11 1.6.2 Fidelity 11 1.6.3 Purity 12 1.7 Quantum Systems Control 13 1.7.1 Description of Control Problems 13 1.7.2 Quantum Control Theory and Methods 13 1.8 Overview of the Book 16 References 18 2 State Transfer and Analysis of Quantum Systems on the Bloch Sphere 21 2.1 Analysis of a Two-level Quantum System State 21 2.1.1 Pure State Expression on the Bloch Sphere 21 2.1.2 Mixed States in the Bloch Sphere 24 2.1.3 Control Trajectory on the Bloch Sphere 26 2.2 State Transfer of Quantum Systems on the Bloch Sphere 27 2.2.1 Control of a Single Spin-1/2 Particle 28 2.2.2 Situation with the Minimum Ωt of Control Fields 30 2.2.3 Situation with a Fixed Time T 31 2.2.4 Numerical Simulations and Results Analyses 33 References 37 3 Control Methods of Closed Quantum Systems 39 3.1 Improved Optimal Control Strategies Applied in Quantum Systems 39 3.1.1 Optimal Control of Quantum Systems 40 3.1.2 Improved Quantum Optimal Control Method 42 3.1.3 Krotov-Based Method of Optimal Control 43 3.1.4 Numerical Simulation and Performance Analysis 45 3.2 Control Design of High-Dimensional Spin-1/2 Quantum Systems 48 3.2.1 Coherent Population Transfer Approaches 48 3.2.2 Relationships between the Hamiltonian of Spin-1/2 Quantum Systems under Control and the Sequence of Pulses 49 3.2.3 Design of the Control Sequence of Pulses 52 3.2.4 Simulation Experiments of Population Transfer 53 3.3 Comparison of Time Optimal Control for Two-Level Quantum Systems 57 3.3.1 Description of System Model 58 3.3.2 Geometric Control 59 3.3.3 Bang-Bang Control 61 3.3.4 Time Comparisons of Two Control Strategies 64 3.3.5 Numerical Simulation Experiments and Results Analyses 66 References 71 4 Manipulation of Eigenstates – Based on Lyapunov Method 73 4.1 Principle of the Lyapunov Stability Theorem 74 4.2 Quantum Control Strategy Based on State Distance 75 4.2.1 Selection of the Lyapunov Function 76 4.2.2 Design of the Feedback Control Law 77 4.2.3 Analysis and Proof of the Stability 78 4.2.4 Application to a Spin-1/2 Particle System 80 4.3 Optimal Quantum Control Based on the Lyapunov Stability Theorem 81 4.3.1 Description of the System Model 82 4.3.2 Optimal Control Law Design and Property Analysis 84 4.3.3 Simulation Experiments and the Results Comparisons 86 4.4 Realization of the Quantum Hadamard Gate Based on the Lyapunov Method 88 4.4.1 Mathematical Model 89 4.4.2 Realization of the Quantum Hadamard Gate 90 4.4.3 Design of Control Fields 92 4.4.4 Numerical Simulations and Comparison Results Analyses 94 References 96 5 Population Control Based on the Lyapunov Method 99 5.1 Population Control of Equilibrium State 99 5.1.1 Preliminary Notions 99 5.1.2 Control Laws Design 100 5.1.3 Analysis of the Largest Invariant Set 101 5.1.4 Considerations on the Determination of P 104 5.1.5 Illustrative Example 105 5.1.6 Appendix: Proof of Theorem 5.1 107 5.2 Generalized Control of Quantum Systems in the Frame of Vector Treatment 110 5.2.1 Design of Control Law 110 5.2.2 Convergence Analysis 113 5.2.3 Numerical Simulation on a Spin-1/2 System 114 5.3 Population Control of Eigenstates 117 5.3.1 System Model and Control Laws 117 5.3.2 Largest Invariant Set of Control Systems 118 5.3.3 Analysis of the Eigenstate Control 118 5.3.4 Simulation Experiments 119 References 123 6 Quantum General State Control Based on Lyapunov Method 125 6.1 Pure State Manipulation 125 6.1.1 Design of Control Law and Discussion 125 6.1.2 Control System Simulations and Results Analyses 129 6.2 Optimal Control Strategy of the Superposition State 131 6.2.1 Preliminary Knowledge 132 6.2.2 Control Law Design 133 6.2.3 Numerical Simulations 134 6.3 Optimal Control of Mixed-State Quantum Systems 135 6.3.1 Model of the System to be Controlled 136 6.3.2 Control Law Design 137 6.3.3 Numerical Simulations and Results Analyses 142 6.4 Arbitrary Pure State to a Mixed-State Manipulation 145 6.4.1 Transfer from an Arbitrary Pure State to an Eigenstate 146 6.4.2 Transfer from an Eigenstate to a Mixed State by Interaction Control 147 6.4.3 Control Design for a Mixed-State Transfer 149 6.4.4 Numerical Simulation Experiments 151 References 154 7 Convergence Analysis Based on the Lyapunov Stability Theorem 155 7.1 Population Control of Quantum States Based on Invariant Subsets with the Diagonal Lyapunov Function 155 7.1.1 System Model and Control Design 155 7.1.2 Correspondence between any Target Eigenstate and the Value of the Lyapunov Function 156 7.1.3 Invariant Set of Control Systems 157 7.1.4 Numerical Simulations 161 7.1.5 Summary and Discussion 164 7.2 A Convergent Control Strategy of Quantum Systems 165 7.2.1 Problem Description 165 7.2.2 Construction Method of the Observable Operator 166 7.2.3 Proof of Convergence 168 7.2.4 Route Extension Strategy 173 7.2.5 Numerical Simulations 174 7.3 Path Programming Control Strategy of Quantum State Transfer 176 7.3.1 Control Law Design Based on the Lyapunov Method in the Interaction Picture 177 7.3.2 Transition Path Programming Control Strategy 178 7.3.3 Numerical Simulations and Results Analyses 182 References 186 8 Control Theory and Methods in Degenerate Cases 187 8.1 Implicit Lyapunov Control of Multi-Control Hamiltonian Systems Based on State Error 187 8.1.1 Control Design 188 8.1.2 Convergence Proof 192 8.1.3 Relation between Two Lyapunov Functions 193 8.1.4 Numerical Simulation and Result Analysis 193 8.2 Quantum Lyapunov Control Based on the Average Value of an Imaginary Mechanical Quantity 195 8.2.1 Control Law Design and Convergence Proof 195 8.2.2 Numerical Simulation and Result Analysis 199 8.3 Implicit Lyapunov Control for the Quantum Liouville Equation 200 8.3.1 Description of Problem 201 8.3.2 Derivation of Control Laws 202 8.3.3 Convergence Analysis 205 8.3.4 Numerical Simulations 209 References 211 9 Manipulation Methods of the General State 213 9.1 Quantum System Schmidt Decomposition and its Geometric Analysis 213 9.1.1 Schmidt Decomposition of Quantum States 214 9.1.2 Definition of Entanglement Degree Based on the Schmidt Decomposition 215 9.1.3 Application of the Schmidt Decomposition 216 9.2 Preparation of Entanglement States in a Two-Spin System 220 9.2.1 Construction of the Two-Spin Systems Model in the Interaction Picture 220 9.2.2 Design of the Control Field Based on the Lyapunov Method 223 9.2.3 Proof of Convergence for the Bell States 226 9.2.4 Numerical Simulations 227 9.3 Purification of the Mixed State for Two-Dimensional Systems 230 9.3.1 Purification by Means of a Probe 230 9.3.2 Purification by Interaction Control 232 9.3.3 Numerical Experiments and Results Comparisons 233 9.3.4 Discussion 234 References 235 10 State Control of Open Quantum Systems 237 10.1 State Transfer of Open Quantum Systems with a Single Control Field 237 10.1.1 Dynamical Model of Open Quantum Systems 237 10.1.2 Derivation of Optimal Control Law 238 10.1.3 Control System Design 241 10.1.4 Numerical Simulations and Results Analyses 242 10.2 Purity and Coherence Compensation through the Interaction between Particles 246 10.2.1 Method of Compensation for Purity and Coherence 247 10.2.2 Analysis of System Evolution 250 10.2.3 Numerical Simulations 253 10.2.4 Discussion 255 Appendix 10.A Proof of Equation 10.59 257 References 258 11 State Estimation, Measurement, and Control of Quantum Systems 261 11.1 State Estimation Methods in Quantum Systems 261 11.1.1 Background of State Estimation of Quantum Systems 262 11.1.2 Quantum State Estimation Methods Based on the Measurement of Identical Copies 262 11.1.3 Quantum State Reconstruction Methods Based on System Theory 267 11.2 Entanglement Detection and Measurement of Quantum Systems 268 11.2.1 Entanglement States 269 11.2.2 Entanglement Witnesses 271 11.2.3 Entanglement Measures 273 11.2.4 Non-linear Separability Criteria 277 11.3 Decoherence Control Based on Weak Measurement 278 11.3.1 Construction of a Weak Measurement Operator 279 11.3.2 Applicability of Weak Measurement 280 11.3.3 Effects on States 282 Appendix 11.A Proof of Normed Linear Space (A, ¡¬ • ¡¬) 286 References 287 12 State Preservation of Open Quantum Systems 291 12.1 Coherence Preservation in a Λ-Type Three-Level Atom 291 12.1.1 Models and Objectives 292 12.1.2 Design of Control Field 294 12.1.3 Analysis of Singularities Issues 297 12.1.4 Numerical Simulations 299 12.2 Purity Preservation of Quantum Systems by a Resonant Field 301 12.2.1 Problem Description 302 12.2.2 Purity Property Preservation 303 12.2.3 Discussion 306 12.3 Coherence Preservation in Markovian Open Quantum Systems 307 12.3.1 Problem Formulation 308 12.3.2 Design of Control Variables 311 12.3.3 Numerical Simulations 313 12.3.4 Discussion 315 Appendix 12.A Derivation of HC 316 References 317 13 State Manipulation in Decoherence-Free Subspace 321 13.1 State Transfer and Coherence Maintainance Based on DFS for a Four-Level Energy Open Quantum System 321 13.1.1 Construction of DFS and the Desired Target State 322 13.1.2 Design of the Lyapunov-Based Control Law for State Transfer 325 13.1.3 Numerical Simulations 326 13.2 State Transfer Based on a Decoherence-Free Target State for a Λ-Type N-Level Atomic System 328 13.2.1 Construction of the Decoherence-Free Target State 328 13.2.2 Design of the Lyapunov-Based Control Law for State Transfer 331 13.2.3 Numerical Simulations and Results Analyses 332 13.3 Control of Quantum States Based on the Lyapunov Method in Decoherence-Free Subspaces 336 13.3.1 Problem Description 336 13.3.2 Control Design in the Interaction Picture 338 13.3.3 Construction of P and Convergence Analysis 339 13.3.4 Numerical Simulation Examples and Discussion 345 References 348 14 Dynamic Decoupling Quantum Control Methods 351 14.1 Phase Decoherence Suppression of an n-Level Atom in Ξ;-Configuration with Bang-Bang Controls 351 14.1.1 Dynamical Decoupling Mechanism 352 14.1.2 Design of the Bang–Bang Operations Group in Phase Decoherence 355 14.1.3 Examples of Design 357 14.2 Optimized Dynamical Decoupling in Ξ-Type n-Level Atom 360 14.2.1 Periodic Dynamical Decoupling 361 14.2.2 Uhrig Dynamical Decoupling 361 14.2.3 Behaviors of Quantum Coherence under Various Dynamical Decoupling Schemes 362 14.2.4 Examples 365 14.2.5 Discussion 366 14.3 An Optimized Dynamical Decoupling Strategy to Suppress Decoherence 366 14.3.1 Universal Dynamical Decoupling for a Qubit 367 14.3.2 An Optimized Dynamical Decoupling Scheme 369 14.3.3 Simulation and Comparison 369 14.3.4 Discussion 375 References 378 15 Trajectory Tracking of Quantum Systems 381 15.1 Orbit Tracking of Quantum States Based on the Lyapunov Method 382 15.1.1 Description of the System Model 382 15.1.2 Design of Control Law 384 15.1.3 Numerical Simulation Experiments and Results Analysis 385 15.2 Orbit Tracking Control of Quantum Systems 389 15.2.1 System Model and Control Law Design 390 15.2.2 Numerical Simulation Experiments 391 15.3 Adaptive Trajectory Tracking of Quantum Systems 394 15.3.1 Description of the System Model 396 15.3.2 Control System Design and Characteristic Analysis 398 15.3.3 Numerical Simulation and Result Analysis 400 15.4 Convergence of Orbit Tracking for Quantum Systems 402 15.4.1 Description of the Control System Model 403 15.4.2 Control Law Derivation 404 15.4.3 Convergence Analysis 404 15.4.4 Applications and Experimental Results Analyses 411 References 416 Index 419

Read more less

Book SynopsisThis book illustrates theories and associated mathematical expressions with numerical examples using various methods, leading to exact solutions, more accurate results, and more computationally efficient techniques.Table of ContentsAbout the Author xiii Preface xv 1 Introduction to Structural Vibrations 1 1.1 Terminology 1 1.2 Types of Vibration 5 1.3 Objectives of Vibration Analyses 9 1.3.1 Free Vibration Analysis 9 1.3.2 Forced Vibration Analysis 10 1.4 Global and Local Vibrations 14 1.5 Theoretical Approaches to Structural Vibrations 16 References 18 2 Analytical Solutions for Uniform Continuous Systems 19 2.1 Methods for Obtaining Equations of Motion of a Vibrating System 20 2.2 Vibration of a Stretched String 21 2.2.1 Equation of Motion 21 2.2.2 Free Vibration of a Uniform Clamped–Clamped String 22 2.3 Longitudinal Vibration of a Continuous Rod 25 2.3.1 Equation of Motion 25 2.3.2 Free Vibration of a Uniform Rod 28 2.4 Torsional Vibration of a Continuous Shaft 34 2.4.1 Equation of Motion 34 2.4.2 Free Vibration of a Uniform Shaft 36 2.5 Flexural Vibration of a Continuous Euler–Bernoulli Beam 41 2.5.1 Equation of Motion 41 2.5.2 Free Vibration of a Uniform Euler–Bernoulli Beam 43 2.5.3 Numerical Example 54 2.6 Vibration of Axial-Loaded Uniform Euler–Bernoulli Beam 60 2.6.1 Equation of Motion 60 2.6.2 Free Vibration of an Axial-Loaded Uniform Beam 62 2.6.3 Numerical Example 69 2.6.4 Critical Buckling Load of a Uniform Euler–Bernoulli Beam 72 2.7 Vibration of an Euler–Bernoulli Beam on the Elastic Foundation 82 2.7.1 Influence of Stiffness Ratio and Total Beam Length 86 2.7.2 Influence of Supporting Conditions of the Beam 87 2.8 Vibration of an Axial-Loaded Euler Beam on the Elastic Foundation 90 2.8.1 Equation of Motion 90 2.8.2 Free Vibration of a Uniform Beam 91 2.8.3 Numerical Example 93 2.9 Flexural Vibration of a Continuous Timoshenko Beam 96 2.9.1 Equation of Motion 96 2.9.2 Free Vibration of a Uniform Timoshenko Beam 98 2.9.3 Numerical Example 105 2.10 Vibrations of a Shear Beam and a Rotary Beam 107 2.10.1 Free Vibration of a Shear Beam 107 2.10.2 Free Vibration of a Rotary Beam 110 2.11 Vibration of an Axial-Loaded Timoshenko Beam 116 2.11.1 Equation of Motion 116 2.11.2 Free Vibration of an Axial-Loaded Uniform Timoshenko Beam 118 2.11.3 Numerical Example 124 2.12 Vibration of a Timoshenko Beam on the Elastic Foundation 126 2.12.1 Equation of Motion 126 2.12.2 Free Vibration of a Uniform Beam on the Elastic Foundation 128 2.12.3 Numerical Example 132 2.13 Vibration of an Axial-Loaded Timoshenko Beam on the Elastic Foundation 134 2.13.1 Equation of Motion 134 2.13.2 Free Vibration of a Uniform Timoshenko Beam 135 2.13.3 Numerical Example 139 2.14 Vibration of Membranes 142 2.14.1 Free Vibration of a Rectangular Membrane 142 2.14.2 Free Vibration of a Circular Membrane 148 2.15 Vibration of Flat Plates 157 2.15.1 Free Vibration of a Rectangular Plate 158 2.15.2 Free Vibration of a Circular Plate 162 References 171 3 Analytical Solutions for Non-Uniform Continuous Systems: Tapered Beams 173 3.1 Longitudinal Vibration of a Conical Rod 173 3.1.1 Determination of Natural Frequencies and Natural Mode Shapes 173 3.1.2 Determination of Normal Mode Shapes 180 3.1.3 Numerical Examples 182 3.2 Torsional Vibration of a Conical Shaft 188 3.2.1 Determination of Natural Frequencies and Natural Mode Shapes 188 3.2.2 Determination of Normal Mode Shapes 192 3.2.3 Numerical Example 194 3.3 Displacement Function for Free Bending Vibration of a Tapered Beam 200 3.4 Bending Vibration of a Single-Tapered Beam 204 3.4.1 Determination of Natural Frequencies and Natural Mode Shapes 204 3.4.2 Determination of Normal Mode Shapes 210 3.4.3 Finite Element Model of a Single-Tapered Beam 212 3.4.4 Numerical Example 213 3.5 Bending Vibration of a Double-Tapered Beam 217 3.5.1 Determination of Natural Frequencies and Natural Mode Shapes 217 3.5.2 Determination of Normal Mode Shapes 221 3.5.3 Finite Element Model of a Double-Tapered Beam 222 3.5.4 Numerical Example 224 3.6 Bending Vibration of a Nonlinearly Tapered Beam 226 3.6.1 Equation of Motion and Boundary Conditions 226 3.6.2 Natural Frequencies and Mode Shapes for Various Supporting Conditions 232 3.6.3 Finite Element Model of a Non-Uniform Beam 238 3.6.4 Numerical Example 239 References 243 4 Transfer Matrix Methods for Discrete and Continuous Systems 245 4.1 Torsional Vibrations of Multi-Degrees-of-Freedom Systems 245 4.1.1 Holzer Method for Torsional Vibrations 245 4.1.2 Transfer Matrix Method for Torsional Vibrations 257 4.2 Lumped-Mass Model Transfer Matrix Method for Flexural Vibrations 268 4.2.1 Transfer Matrices for a Station and a Field 269 4.2.2 Free Vibration of a Flexural Beam 272 4.2.3 Discretization of a Continuous Beam 279 4.2.4 Transfer Matrices for a Timoshenko Beam 279 4.2.5 Numerical Example 281 4.2.6 A Timoshenko Beam Carrying Multiple Various Concentrated Elements 291 4.2.7 Transfer Matrix for Axial-Loaded Euler Beam and Timoshenko Beam 300 4.3 Continuous-Mass Model Transfer Matrix Method for Flexural Vibrations 304 4.3.1 Flexural Vibration of an Euler–Bernoulli Beam 304 4.3.2 Flexural Vibration of a Timoshenko Beam with Axial Load 314 4.4 Flexural Vibrations of Beams with In-Span Rigid (Pinned) Supports 336 4.4.1 Transfer Matrix of a Station Located at an In-Span Rigid (Pinned) Support 336 4.4.2 Natural Frequencies and Mode Shapes of a Multi-Span Beam 340 4.4.3 Numerical Examples 348 References 353 5 Eigenproblem and Jacobi Method 355 5.1 Eigenproblem 355 5.2 Natural Frequencies, Natural Mode Shapes and Unit-Amplitude Mode Shapes 357 5.3 Determination of Normal Mode Shapes 364 5.3.1 Normal Mode Shapes Obtained From Natural Ones 364 5.3.2 Normal Mode Shapes Obtained From Unit-Amplitude Ones 365 5.4 Solution of Standard Eigenproblem with Standard Jacobi Method 367 5.4.1 Formulation Based on Forward Multiplication 368 5.4.2 Formulation Based on Backward Multiplication 371 5.4.3 Convergence of Iterations 372 5.5 Solution of Generalized Eigenproblem with Generalized Jacobi Method 378 5.5.1 The Standard Jacobi Method 378 5.5.2 The Generalized Jacobi Method 382 5.5.3 Formulation Based on Forward Multiplication 382 5.5.4 Determination of Elements of Rotation Matrix (a and g) 384 5.5.5 Convergence of Iterations 387 5.5.6 Formulation Based on Backward Multiplication 387 5.6 Solution of Semi-Definite System with Generalized Jacobi Method 398 5.7 Solution of Damped Eigenproblem 398 References 398 6 Vibration Analysis by Finite Element Method 399 6.1 Equation of Motion and Property Matrices 399 6.2 Longitudinal (Axial) Vibration of a Rod 400 6.3 Property Matrices of a Torsional Shaft 411 6.4 Flexural Vibration of an Euler–Bernoulli Beam 412 6.5 Shape Functions for a Three-Dimensional Timoshenko Beam Element 430 6.5.1 Assumptions for the Formulations 430 6.5.2 Shear Deformations Due to Translational Nodal Displacements V1 and V3 431 6.5.3 Shear Deformations Due to Rotational Nodal Displacements V2 and V4 435 6.5.4 Determination of Shape Functions Φyi(ξ) (i = 1 - 4) 437 6.5.5 Determination of Shape Functions Φxi(ξ) (i = 1 - 4) 440 6.5.6 Determination of Shape Functions φzi(ξ) (i = 1 - 4) 441 6.5.7 Determination of Shape Functions φxi(ξ) (i = 1 - 4) 443 6.5.8 Shape Functions for a 3D Beam Element 445 6.6 Property Matrices of a Three-Dimensional Timoshenko Beam Element 451 6.6.1 Stiffness Matrix of a 3D Timoshenko Beam Element 451 6.6.2 Mass Matrix of a 3D Timoshenko Beam Element 458 6.7 Transformation Matrix for a Two-Dimensional Beam Element 462 6.8 Transformations of Element Stiffness Matrix and Mass Matrix 464 6.9 Transformation Matrix for a Three-Dimensional Beam Element 465 6.10 Property Matrices of a Beam Element with Concentrated Elements 469 6.11 Property Matrices of Rigid–Pinned and Pinned–Rigid Beam Elements 472 6.11.1 Property Matrices of the R-P Beam Element 474 6.11.2 Property Matrices of the P-R Beam Element 476 6.12 Geometric Stiffness Matrix of a Beam Element Due to Axial Load 477 6.13 Stiffness Matrix of a Beam Element Due to Elastic Foundation 480 References 482 7 Analytical Methods and Finite Element Method for Free Vibration Analyses of Circularly Curved Beams 483 7.1 Analytical Solution for Out-of-Plane Vibration of a Curved Euler Beam 483 7.1.1 Differential Equations for Displacement Functions 484 7.1.2 Determination of Displacement Functions 485 7.1.3 Internal Forces and Moments 490 7.1.4 Equilibrium and Continuity Conditions 491 7.1.5 Determination of Natural Frequencies and Mode Shapes 493 7.1.6 Classical and Non-Classical Boundary Conditions 495 7.1.7 Numerical Examples 497 7.2 Analytical Solution for Out-of-Plane Vibration of a Curved Timoshenko Beam 503 7.2.1 Coupled Equations of Motion and Boundary Conditions 503 7.2.2 Uncoupled Equation of Motion for uy 507 7.2.3 The Relationships Between ψx, ψθ and uy 508 7.2.4 Determination of Displacement Functions Uy(θ), ψx(θ) and ψθ(θ) 509 7.2.5 Internal Forces and Moments 512 7.2.6 Classical Boundary Conditions 513 7.2.7 Equilibrium and Compatibility Conditions 515 7.2.8 Determination of Natural Frequencies and Mode Shapes 518 7.2.9 Numerical Examples 520 7.3 Analytical Solution for In-Plane Vibration of a Curved Euler Beam 521 7.3.1 Differential Equations for Displacement Functions 521 7.3.2 Determination of Displacement Functions 527 7.3.3 Internal Forces and Moments 529 7.3.4 Continuity and Equilibrium Conditions 530 7.3.5 Determination of Natural Frequencies and Mode Shapes 533 7.3.6 Classical Boundary Conditions 536 7.3.7 Mode Shapes Obtained From Finite Element Method and Analytical (Exact) Method 537 7.3.8 Numerical Examples 539 7.4 Analytical Solution for In-Plane Vibration of a Curved Timoshenko Beam 547 7.4.1 Differential Equations for Displacement Functions 547 7.4.2 Determination of Displacement Functions 552 7.4.3 Internal Forces and Moments 553 7.4.4 Equilibrium and Compatibility Conditions 554 7.4.5 Determination of Natural Frequencies and Mode Shapes 558 7.4.6 Classical and Non-Classical Boundary Conditions 560 7.4.7 Numerical Examples 562 7.5 Out-of-Plane Vibration of a Curved Beam by Finite Element Method with Curved Beam Elements 564 7.5.1 Displacement Functions and Shape Functions 565 7.5.2 Stiffness Matrix for Curved Beam Element 573 7.5.3 Mass Matrix for Curved Beam Element 575 7.5.4 Numerical Example 576 7.6 In-Plane Vibration of a Curved Beam by Finite Element Method with Curved Beam Elements 578 7.6.1 Displacement Functions 578 7.6.2 Element Stiffness Matrix 586 7.6.3 Element Mass Matrix 587 7.6.4 Boundary Conditions of the Curved and Straight Finite Element Methods 589 7.6.5 Numerical Examples 590 7.7 Finite Element Method with Straight Beam Elements for Out-of-Plane Vibration of a Curved Beam 595 7.7.1 Property Matrices of Straight Beam Element for Out-of-Plane Vibrations 596 7.7.2 Transformation Matrix for Out-of-Plane Straight Beam Element 599 7.8 Finite Element Method with Straight Beam Elements for In-Plane Vibration of a Curved Beam 601 7.8.1 Property Matrices of Straight Beam Element for In-Plane Vibrations 602 7.8.2 Transformation Matrix for the In-Plane Straight Beam Element 605 References 606 8 Solution for the Equations of Motion 609 8.1 Free Vibration Response of an SDOF System 609 8.2 Response of an Undamped SDOF System Due to Arbitrary Loading 612 8.3 Response of a Damped SDOF System Due to Arbitrary Loading 614 8.4 Numerical Method for the Duhamel Integral 615 8.4.1 General Summation Techniques 615 8.4.2 The Linear Loading Method 629 8.5 Exact Solution for the Duhamel Integral 633 8.6 Exact Solution for a Damped SDOF System Using the Classical Method 636 8.7 Exact Solution for an Undamped SDOF System Using the Classical Method 639 8.8 Approximate Solution for an SDOF Damped System by the Central Difference Method 642 8.9 Solution for the Equations of Motion of an MDOF System 645 8.9.1 Direct Integration Methods 645 8.9.2 The Mode Superposition Method 649 8.10 Determination of Forced Vibration Response Amplitudes 659 8.10.1 Total and Steady Response Amplitudes of an SDOF System 660 8.10.2 Determination of Steady Response Amplitudes of an MDOF System 662 8.11 Numerical Examples for Forced Vibration Response Amplitudes 668 8.11.1 Frequency-Response Curves of an SDOF System 668 8.11.2 Frequency-Response Curves of an MDOF System 670 References 675 Appendices 677 A.1 List of Integrals 677 A.2 Theory of Modified Half-Interval (or Bisection) Method 680 A.3 Determinations of Influence Coefficients 681 A.3.1 Determination of Influence Coefficients aiYM and aiψM 681 A.3.2 Determination of Influence Coefficients aiYQ and aiψQ 683 A.4 Exact Solution of a Cubic Equation 685 A.5 Solution of a Cubic Equation Associated with Its Complex Roots 686 A.6 Coefficients of Matrix [H] Defined by Equation (7.387) 687 A.7 Coefficients of Matrix [H] Defined by Equation (7.439) 689 A.8 Exact Solution for a Simply Supported Euler Arch 691 References 693 Index 695

Read more less

Book SynopsisInsightful working knowledge of friction, lubrication, and wear in machines Applications of tribology are widespread in industries ranging from aerospace, marine and automotive to power, process, petrochemical and construction. With world-renowned expert co-authors from academia and industry, Applied Tribology: Lubrication and Bearing Design, 3rd Edition provides a balance of application and theory with numerous illustrative examples. The book provides clear and up-to-date presentation of working principles of lubrication, friction and wear in vital mechanical components, such as bearings, seals and gears. The third edition has expanded coverage of friction and wear and contact mechanics with updated topics based on new developments in the field. Key features: Includes practical applications, homework problems and state-of-the-art references. Provides presentation of design procedure. Supplies clear and up-to-date information based on the authors' widely referenced books and over 500 archival papers in this field. Applied Tribology: Lubrication and Bearing Design, 3rd Edition provides a valuable and authoritative resource for mechanical engineering professionals working in a wide range of industries with machinery including turbines, compressors, motors, electrical appliances and electronic components. Senior and graduate students in mechanical engineering will also find it a useful text and reference.Table of ContentsSeries Preface ix Preface xi Part I General Considerations 1 1 Tribology – Friction, Wear, and Lubrication 3 2 Lubricants and Lubrication 23 3 Surface Texture and Interactions 63 4 Bearing Materials 89 Part II Fluid-Film Bearings 113 5 Fundamentals of Viscous Flow 115 6 Reynolds Equation and Applications 143 7 Thrust Bearings 173 8 Journal Bearings 201 9 Squeeze-Film Bearings 263 10 Hydrostatic Bearings 299 11 Gas Bearings 321 12 Dry and Starved Bearings 361 Part III Rolling Element Bearings 389 13 Selecting Bearing Type and Size 391 14 Principles and Operating Limits 425 15 Friction, Wear and Lubrication 459 Part IV Seals and Monitoring 16 Seal Fundamentals 487 17 Condition Monitoring and Failure Analysis 531 Appendix A Unit Conversion Factors 551 Appendix B Viscosity Conversions 555 Index 557

Read more less

Book SynopsisA comprehensive coverage of the physical properties and real-world applications of magnetic nanostructures This book discusses how the important properties of materials such as the cohesive energy, and the electronic and vibrational structures are affected when materials have at least one length in the nanometer range.Table of ContentsPreface ix Acknowledgment xi 1 Properties of Nanostructures 1 1.1 Cohesive Energy 1 1.2 Electronic Properties 7 1.3 Quantum Dots 10 1.4 Vibrational Properties 12 1.5 Summary 17 References 17 2 The Physics of Magnetism 19 2.1 Kinds of Magnetism 19 2.2 Paramagnetism 20 2.2.1 Theory of Paramagnetism 20 2.2.2 Methods of Measuring Susceptibility 22 2.3 Ferromagnetism 25 2.3.1 Theory of Ferromagnetism 25 2.3.2 Magnetic Resonance 29 2.4 Antiferromagnetism 32 References 34 3 Properties of Magnetic Nanoparticles 35 3.1 Superparamagnetism 35 3.2 Effect of Particle Size on Magnetization 35 3.3 Dynamical Behavior of Magnetic Nanoparticles 37 3.4 Magnetic Field]Aligned Particles in Frozen Fluids 41 3.5 Magnetism Induced by Nanosizing 47 3.6 Antiferromagnetic Nanoparticles 48 3.7 Magnetoresistive Materials 50 References 53 4 Bulk Nanostructured Magnetic Materials 55 4.1 Ferromagnetic Solids With Nanosized Grains 55 4.2 Low]Dimensional Magnetic Nanostructures 57 4.2.1 Magnetic Quantum Wells 57 4.2.2 Magnetic Quantum Wires 61 4.2.3 Building One]Dimensional Magnetic Arrays One Atom at a Time 65 4.3 Magnetoresistance in Bulk Nanostructured Materials 67 References 74 5 Magnetism in Carbon and Boron Nitride Nanostructures 75 5.1 Carbon Nanostructures 75 5.1.1 Fullerene, C60 75 5.1.2 Carbon and Boron Nitride Nanotubes 78 5.1.3 Graphene 81 5.2 Experimental Observations of Magnetism in Carbon and Boron Nitride Nanostructures 81 5.2.1 Magnetism in C60 81 5.2.2 Ferromagnetism in Carbon and Boron Nitride Nanotubes 87 5.2.3 Magnetism in Graphene 88 References 93 6 Nanostructured Magnetic Semiconductors 95 6.1 Electron–Hole Junctions 95 6.2 MOSFET 98 6.3 N anosized MOSFETs 99 6.4 Dilute Magnetic Semiconductors 100 6.5 N anostructuring in Magnetic Semiconductors 103 6.6 Dms Quantum Wells 106 6.7 DMS Quantum Dots 106 6.8 Storage Devices Based on Magnetic Semiconductors 107 6.9 Theoretical Predictions of Nanostructured Magnetic Semiconductors 108 References 111 7 Applications of Magnetic Nanostructures 113 7.1 Ferrofluids 113 7.2 Magnetic Storage (Hard Drives) 118 7.3 Electric Field Control of Magnetism 121 7.4 Magnetic Photonic Crystals 123 7.5 Magnetic Nanoparticles as Catalysts 125 7.6 Magnetic Nanoparticle Labeling of Hazardous Materials 127 References 129 8 Medical Applications of Magnetic Nanostructures 131 8.1 Targeted Drug Delivery 131 8.2 Magnetic Hyperthermia 132 8.3 Magnetic Separation 134 8.4 Magnetic Nanoparticles For Enhanced Contrast in Magnetic Resonance Imaging 135 8.5 Detection of Bacteria 139 8.6 Analysis of Stored Blood 144 References 146 9 Fabrication of Magnetic Nanostructures 147 9.1 Magnetic Nanoparticles 147 9.2 Magnetic Quantum Wells 149 9.3 Magnetic Nanowires 152 9.4 Magnetic Quantum Dots 153 References 154 APPENDIX A A Table of Number of Atoms Versus Size in Face Centered Cubic Nanoparticles 155 APPENDIX B Definition of a Magnetic Field 157 APPENDIX C Density Functional Theory 159 APPENDIX D Tight Binding Model of Electronic Structure of Metals 163 APPENDIX E Periodic Boundary Conditions 165 Index 167

Read more less

Book SynopsisDeveloped in cooperation with six European truck manufacturers to meet the needs in industry, Guide to Load Analysis for Durability in Vehicle Engineering presents different methods for load analysis with the aim to understand their principles, usage, areas of application, merits, and disadvantages.Table of ContentsAbout the Editors xiii Contributors xv Series Editor’s Preface xvii Preface xix Acknowledgements xxi Part I OVERVIEW 1 Introduction 3 1.1 Durability in Vehicle Engineering 4 1.2 Reliability, Variation and Robustness 6 1.3 Load Description for Trucks 7 1.4 Why Is Load Analysis Important? 9 1.5 The Structure of the Book 10 2 Loads for Durability 15 2.1 Fatigue and Load Analysis 15 2.1.1 Constant Amplitude Load 15 2.1.2 Block Load 16 2.1.3 Variable Amplitude Loading and Rainflow Cycles 16 2.1.4 Rainflow Matrix, Level Crossings and Load Spectrum 18 2.1.5 Other Kinds of Fatigue 20 2.2 Loads in View of Fatigue Design 23 2.2.1 Fatigue Life: Cumulative Damage 23 2.2.2 Fatigue Limit: Maximum Load 23 2.2.3 Sudden Failures: Maximum Load 24 2.2.4 Safety Critical Components 24 2.2.5 Design Concepts in Aerospace Applications 24 2.3 Loads in View of System Response 25 2.4 Loads in View of Variability 27 2.4.1 Different Types of Variability 27 2.4.2 Loads in Different Environments 28 2.5 Summary 29 Part II METHODS FOR LOAD ANALYSIS 3 Basics of Load Analysis 33 3.1 Amplitude-based Methods 35 3.1.1 From Outer Loads to Local Loads 36 3.1.2 Pre-processing of Load Signals 37 3.1.3 Rainflow Cycle Counting 40 3.1.4 Range-pair Counting 49 3.1.5 Markov Counting 51 3.1.6 Range Counting 53 3.1.7 Level Crossing Counting 55 3.1.8 Interval Crossing Counting 56 3.1.9 Irregularity Factor 56 3.1.10 Peak Value Counting 56 3.1.11 Examples Comparing Counting Methods 56 3.1.12 Pseudo Damage and Equivalent Loads 60 3.1.13 Methods for Rotating Components 67 3.1.14 Recommendations and Work-flow 70 3.2 Frequency-based Methods 72 3.2.1 The PSD Function and the Periodogram 73 3.2.2 Estimating the Spectrum Based on the Periodogram 74 3.2.3 Spectrogram or Waterfall Diagram 79 3.2.4 Frequency-based System Analysis 79 3.2.5 Extreme Response and Fatigue Damage Spectrum 85 3.2.6 Wavelet Analysis 86 3.2.7 Relation Between Amplitude and Frequency-based Methods 87 3.2.8 More Examples and Summary 87 3.3 Multi-input Loads 91 3.3.1 From Outer Loads to Local Loads 92 3.3.2 The RP Method 94 3.3.3 Plotting Pseudo Damage and Examples 95 3.3.4 Equivalent Multi-input Loads 99 3.3.5 Phase Plots and Correlation Matrices for Multi-input Loads 101 3.3.6 Multi-input Time at Level Counting 104 3.3.7 Biaxiality Plots 104 3.3.8 The Wang-Brown Multi-axial Cycle Counting Method 105 3.4 Summary 105 4 Load Editing and Generation of Time Signals 107 4.1 Introduction 107 4.1.1 Essential Load Properties 108 4.1.2 Criteria for Equivalence 108 4.2 Data Inspections and Corrections 110 4.2.1 Examples and Inspection of Data 110 4.2.2 Detection and Correction 112 4.3 Load Editing in the Time Domain 115 4.3.1 Amplitude-based Editing of Time Signals 115 4.3.2 Frequency-based Editing of Time Signals 126 4.3.3 Amplitude-based Editing with Frequency Constraints 136 4.3.4 Editing of Time Signals: Summary 138 4.4 Load Editing in the Rainflow Domain 139 4.4.1 Re-scaling 139 4.4.2 Superposition 141 4.4.3 Extrapolation on Length or Test Duration 143 4.4.4 Extrapolation to Extreme Usage 150 4.4.5 Load Editing for 1D Counting Results 154 4.4.6 Summary, Hints and Recommendations 154 4.5 Generation of Time Signals 156 4.5.1 Amplitude- or Cycle-based Generation of Time Signals 156 4.5.2 Frequency-based Generation of Time Signals 163 4.6 Summary 167 5 Response of Mechanical Systems 169 5.1 General Description of Mechanical Systems 169 5.1.1 Multibody Models 170 5.1.2 Finite Element Models 172 5.2 Multibody Simulation (MBS) for Durability Applications or: from System Loads to Component Loads 173 5.2.1 An Illustrative Example 173 5.2.2 Some General Modelling Aspects 175 5.2.3 Flexible Bodies in Multibody Simulation 178 5.2.4 Simulating the Suspension Model 181 5.3 Finite Element Models (FEM) for Durability Applications or: from Component Loads to Local Stress-strain Histories 186 5.3.1 Linear Static Load Cases and Quasi-static Superposition 188 5.3.2 Linear Dynamic Problems and Modal Superposition 189 5.3.3 From the Displacement Solution to Local Stresses and Strains 192 5.3.4 Summary of Local Stress-strain History Calculation 192 5.4 Invariant System Loads 193 5.4.1 Digital Road and Tyre Models 194 5.4.2 Back Calculation of Invariant Substitute Loads 196 5.4.3 An Example 199 5.5 Summary 200 6 Models for Random Loads 203 6.1 Introduction 203 6.2 Basics on Random Processes 206 6.2.1 Some Average Properties of Random Processes∗ 207 6.3 Statistical Approach to Estimate Load Severity 209 6.3.1 The Extrapolation Method 210 6.3.2 Fitting Range-pairs Distribution 210 6.3.3 Semi-parametric Approach 213 6.4 The Monte Carlo Method 215 6.5 Expected Damage for Gaussian Loads 218 6.5.1 Stationary Gaussian Loads 219 6.5.2 Non-stationary Gaussian Loads with Constant Mean∗ 223 6.6 Non-Gaussian Loads: the Role of Upcrossing Intensity 224 6.6.1 Bendat’s Narrow Band Approximation 224 6.6.2 Generalization of Bendat’s Approach∗ 225 6.6.3 Laplace Processes 228 6.7 The Coefficient of Variation for Damage 230 6.7.1 Splitting the Measured Signal into Parts 230 6.7.2 Short Signals 231 6.7.3 Gaussian Loads 232 6.7.4 Compound Poisson Processes: Roads with Pot Holes 233 6.8 Markov Loads 235 6.8.1 Markov Chains∗ 240 6.8.2 Discrete Markov Loads – Definition 242 6.8.3 Markov Chains of Turning Points 243 6.8.4 Switching Markov Chain Loads 244 6.8.5 Approximation of Expected Damage for Gaussian Loads 247 6.8.6 Intensity of Interval Upcrossings for Markov Loads∗ 248 6.9 Summary 249 7 Load Variation and Reliability 253 7.1 Modelling of Variability in Loads 253 7.1.1 The Sources of Load Variability: Statistical Populations 254 7.1.2 Controlled or Uncontrolled Variation 255 7.1.3 Model Errors 255 7.2 Reliability Assessment 256 7.2.1 The Statistical Model Complexity 256 7.2.2 The Physical Model Complexity 257 7.3 The Full Probabilistic Model 258 7.3.1 Monte Carlo Simulations 259 7.3.2 Accuracy of the Full Probabilistic Approach 263 7.4 The First-Moment Method 263 7.5 The Second-Moment Method 264 7.5.1 The Gauss Approximation Formula 264 7.6 The Fatigue Load-Strength Model 265 7.6.1 The Fatigue Load and Strength Variables 265 7.6.2 Reliability Indices 266 7.6.3 The Equivalent Load and Strength Variables 267 7.6.4 Determining Uncertainty Measures 271 7.6.5 The Uncertainty due to the Estimated Damage Exponent 273 7.6.6 The Uncertainty Measure of Strength 275 7.6.7 The Uncertainty Measure of Load 277 7.6.8 Use of the Reliability Index 279 7.6.9 Including an Extra Safety Factor 281 7.6.10 Reducing Uncertainties 283 7.7 Summary 284 Part III LOAD ANALYSIS IN VIEW OF THE VEHICLE DESIGN PROCESS 8 Evaluation of Customer Loads 287 8.1 Introduction 287 8.2 Survey Sampling 288 8.2.1 Why Use Random Samples? 288 8.2.2 Simple Random Sample 289 8.2.3 Stratified Random Sample 290 8.2.4 Cluster Sample 290 8.2.5 Sampling with Unequal Probabilities 291 8.2.6 An Application 292 8.2.7 Simple Random Sampling in More Detail 293 8.2.8 Conclusion 294 8.3 Load Measurement Uncertainty 295 8.3.1 Precision in Load Severity 295 8.3.2 Pair-wise Analysis of Load Severity 301 8.3.3 Joint Analysis of Load Severity 301 8.4 Random Sampling of Customers 303 8.4.1 Customer Survey 303 8.4.2 Characterization of a Market 304 8.4.3 Simplified Model for a New Market 306 8.4.4 Comparison of Markets 308 8.5 Customer Usage and Load Environment 308 8.5.1 Model for Customer Usage 310 8.5.2 Load Environment Uncertainty 312 8.6 Vehicle-Independent Load Descriptions 314 8.7 Discussion and Summary 318 9 Derivation of Design Loads 321 9.1 Introduction 321 9.1.1 Scalar Load Representations 321 9.1.2 Other Load Representations 322 9.1.3 Statistical Aspects 322 9.1.4 Structure of the Chapter 323 9.2 From Customer Usage Profiles to Design Targets 324 9.2.1 Customer Load Distribution and Design Load 324 9.2.2 Strength Distribution and Strength Requirement 324 9.2.3 Defining the Reliability Target 326 9.2.4 Partial Safety Factor for Load-Strength Modelling 328 9.2.5 Safety Factors for Design Loads 329 9.2.6 Summary and Remarks 331 9.3 Synthetic Load Models 333 9.4 Random Load Descriptions 335 9.4.1 Models for External Load Environment 335 9.4.2 Load Descriptions in Design 336 9.4.3 Load Description for Testing 336 9.5 Applying Reconstruction Methods 336 9.5.1 Rainflow Reconstruction 336 9.5.2 1D and Markov Reconstruction 339 9.5.3 Spectral Reconstruction 339 9.5.4 Multi-input Loads 340 9.6 Standardized Load Spectra 341 9.7 Proving Ground Loads 342 9.8 Optimized Combination of Test Track Events 342 9.8.1 Optimizing with Respect to Damage per Channel 343 9.8.2 An Instructive Example 346 9.8.3 Extensions∗ 351 9.8.4 Hints and Practical Aspects 353 9.9 Discussion and Summary 354 10 Verification of Systems and Components 357 10.1 Introduction 357 10.1.1 Principles of Verification 357 10.1.2 Test for Continuous Improvements vs. Tests for Release 358 10.1.3 Specific Problems in Verification of Durability 359 10.1.4 Characterizing or Verification Tests 360 10.1.5 Verification on Different Levels 361 10.1.6 Physical vs. Numerical Evaluation 363 10.1.7 Summary 363 10.2 Generating Loads for Testing 363 10.2.1 Reliability Targets and Verification Loads 364 10.2.2 Generation of Time Signals based on Load Specifications 364 10.2.3 Acceleration of Tests 365 10.3 Planning and Evaluation of Tests 365 10.3.1 Choice of Strength Distribution and Variance 366 10.3.2 Parameter Estimation and Censored Data 368 10.3.3 Verification of Safety Factors 371 10.3.4 Statistical Tests for Quantiles 373 10.4 Discussion and Summary 379 A Fatigue Models and Life Prediction 383 A.1 Short, Long or Infinite Life 383 A.1.1 Low Cycle Fatigue 383 A.1.2 High Cycle Fatigue 383 A.1.3 Fatigue Limit 384 A.2 Cumulative Fatigue 384 A.2.1 Arguments for the Palmgren-Miner Rule 384 A.2.2 When is the Palmgren-Miner Rule Useful? 386 B Statistics and Probability 387 B.1 Further Reading 387 B.2 Some Common Distributions 387 B.2.1 Normal Distribution 387 B.2.2 Log-Normal Distribution 388 B.2.3 Weibull Distribution 388 B.2.4 Rayleigh Distribution 388 B.2.5 Exponential Distribution 388 B.2.6 Generalized Pareto Distribution 388 B.3 Extreme Value Distributions 389 B.3.1 Peak over Threshold Analysis 389 C Fourier Analysis 391 C.1 Fourier Transformation 391 C.2 Fourier Series 392 C.3 Sampling and the Nyquist-Shannon Theorem 393 C.4 DFT/FFT (Discrete Fourier Transformation) 394 D Finite Element Analysis 395 D.1 Kinematics of Flexible Bodies 395 D.2 Equations of Equilibrium 396 D.3 Linear Elastic Material Behaviour 397 D.4 Some Basics on Discretization Methods 397 D.5 Dynamic Equations 399 E Multibody System Simulation 401 E.1 Linear Models 401 E.2 Mathematical Description of Multibody Systems 402 E.2.1 The Equations of Motion 403 E.2.2 Computational Issues 404 F Software for Load Analysis 407 F.1 Some Dedicated Software Packages 407 F.2 Some Software Packages for Fatigue Analysis 408 F.3 WAFO – a Toolbox for Matlab 408 Bibliography 411 Index 423

Read more less

Book SynopsisPresents an approach to analytically determine periodic flows to chaos or quasi-periodic flows in nonlinear dynamical systems with/without time-delay. This title covers the mathematical theory and includes two examples of nonlinear systems with/without time-delay in engineering and physics.Table of ContentsPreface ix 1 Introduction 1 1.1 Brief History 1 1.2 Book Layout 4 2 Nonlinear Dynamical Systems 7 2.1 Continuous Systems 7 2.2 Equilibriums and Stability 9 2.3 Bifurcation and Stability Switching 17 2.3.1 Stability and Switching 17 2.3.2 Bifurcations 26 3 An Analytical Method for Periodic Flows 33 3.1 Nonlinear Dynamical Systems 33 3.1.1 Autonomous Nonlinear Systems 33 3.1.2 Non-Autonomous Nonlinear Systems 44 3.2 Nonlinear Vibration Systems 48 3.2.1 Free Vibration Systems 48 3.2.2 Periodically Excited Vibration Systems 61 3.3 Time-Delayed Nonlinear Systems 66 3.3.1 Autonomous Time-Delayed Nonlinear Systems 66 3.3.2 Non-Autonomous Time-Delayed Nonlinear Systems 80 3.4 Time-Delayed, Nonlinear Vibration Systems 85 3.4.1 Time-Delayed, Free Vibration Systems 85 3.4.2 Periodically Excited Vibration Systems with Time-Delay 102 4 Analytical Periodic to Quasi-Periodic Flows 109 4.1 Nonlinear Dynamical Systems 109 4.2 Nonlinear Vibration Systems 124 4.3 Time-Delayed Nonlinear Systems 134 4.4 Time-Delayed, Nonlinear Vibration Systems 147 5 Quadratic Nonlinear Oscillators 161 5.1 Period-1 Motions 161 5.1.1 Analytical Solutions 161 5.1.2 Frequency-Amplitude Characteristics 165 5.1.3 Numerical Illustrations 173 5.2 Period-m Motions 180 5.2.1 Analytical Solutions 180 5.2.2 Analytical Bifurcation Trees 184 5.2.3 Numerical Illustrations 206 5.3 Arbitrary Periodical Forcing 217 6 Time-Delayed Nonlinear Oscillators 219 6.1 Analytical Solutions 219 6.2 Analytical Bifurcation Trees 238 6.3 Illustrations of Periodic Motions 242 References 253 Index 257

Read more less

Book SynopsisThe development of finely-tuned materials that adjust in a predictable manner by specific environment change is the recent arena of materials research. It is a newly emerging supra-disciplinary field with huge commercial potential. Stimuli-responsive materials answer by a considerable change in their properties to small changes in their environment. Responsive materials are becoming increasingly more prevalent as scientists learn about the chemistry and triggers that induce conformational changes in materials structures and devise ways to take advantage of and control them. Responsive Materials and Method offers state-of-the-art of the stimuli-responsive materials and their potential applications. This collection brings together novel methodologies and strategies adopted in the research and development of responsive materials and technology.Table of ContentsPreface xiii PART 1 Stimuli-Responsive Polymeric Materials 1 1 Smart Thermoresponsive Biomaterials 3 Mohammed Yaseen and Jian R. Lu 1.1 Introduction 3 1.2 Temperature-Responsive Polymers 5 1.3 Development of Thermoresponsive Surfaces 10 1.4 Surface Characterization 15 1.5 Cell Culture and Tissue Engineering Applications 16 1.6 Chromatography 20 1.7 Conclusion 22 References 22 2 Light-Triggered Azobenzenes: From Molecular Architecture to Functional Materials 27 Jaume Garcia-Amorós and Dolores Velasco 2.1 Why Light-Triggered Materials? 28 2.2 Azobenzene-Based Light-Activatable Materials 29 2.3 Photoswitchable Azobenzene-Based Materials 31 2.4 Photodeformable Azobenzene-Based Materials:Artificial Muscle-like Actuation 47 2.5 Conclusion and Perspectives 53 Acknowledgements 54 References 54 3 Functionalization with Interpenetrating Smart Polymer Networks by Gamma Irradiation for Loading and Delivery of Drugs 59 Franklin Muñoz-Muñoz and Emilio Bucio Abbreviations 60 3.1 Introduction 61 3.2 General Concepts 63 3.3 Radiation Synthesis and Modification of Polymers (Approaches) 74 Acknowledgements 88 References 88 4 Biomedical Devices Based on Smart Polymers 105 Angel Contreras-García and Emilio Bucio 4.1 Introduction 106 4.2 Stimuli Responsive Polymers 107 4.3 Sensitive Hydrogels 108 4.4 Responsive Materials for Drug Delivery Systems 109 4.5 Intelligent Polymers for Tissue Engineering 112 4.6 Types of Medical Devices 113 Acknowledgements 117 References 117 5 Stimuli-Responsive Polymers as Adjuvants and Carriers for Antigen Delivery 123 Akhilesh Kumar Shakya and Kutty Selva Nandakumar Abbreviations 124 5.1 Introduction 124 5.2 Responsive Polymers as Antigen Carriers 129 5.3 Factors Affecting Adjuvant Potential of Stimuli-Responsive Polymeric Adjuvant 135 Acknowledgements 136 References 136 6 Cyclodextrins as Advanced Materials for Pharmaceutical Applications 141 Vesna D. Nikolic, Ljubisa B. Nikolic, Ivan M. Savic, and Ivana M. Savic 6.1 Inclusion Complexes 142 6.2 Preparation of Inclusion Complexes 143 6.3 Historical Development of Cyclodextrins 145 6.4 Equilibrium 149 6.5 Confirmation of Formed Inclusion Complexes 152 6.6 Application of Cyclodextrins in the Pharmacy 153 6.7 Cyclodextrins as a Drug Delivery System 154 6.8 Cyclodextrin as Solubilizers 157 6.9 Pharmaceutical Formulation Containing Cyclodextrin 158 6.10 Conclusion 160 References 161 PART 2 Smart Nano-Engineered Materials 167 7 Advances in Smart Wearable Systems 169 Rajesh Kumar Saini, Jaya Bajpai, and A. K. Bajpai 7.1 Introduction 170 7.2 Classification of Smart Polymers 172 7.3 Applications 181 7.4 Current Features of Wearable Systems 192 7.5 Conclusions 194 7.6 Challenges and Future Prospects 194 References 195 8 Functionalization of Smart Nanomaterials 201 Sharda Sundaram Sanjay and Avinash C. Pandey 8.1 Introduction 202 8.2 Functionalizing Agents 205 8.3 Carbon Nanomaterials 217 8.4 Silica Nanoparticles 224 8.5 Confirmation of Functionalization 225 Acknowledgements 229 References 229 9 Role of Smart Nanostructured Materials in Cancers 237 Rizwan Wahab, Farheen Khan, Javed Musarrat, and Abdulaziz A.Al-Khedhairy 9.1 Introduction 238 9.2 Experimental 246 9.3 Results Related to Use of Smart Nanostructured Materials to Control Cancers Cells 258 9.4 Summary and Future Direction 265 Acknowledgement 266 References 266 10 Quantum Cutter and Sensitizer-Based Advanced Materials for their Application in Displays, Fluorescent Lamps and Solar Cells 273 Raghvendra Singh Yadav, Jaromir Havlica, and Avinash Chandra Pandey 10.1 Introduction 274 10.2 Quantum Cutter and Sensitizer-Based Advanced Materials 275 10.3 Conclusion 297 Acknowledgement 297 References 298 11 Nanofibers of Conducting Polymer Nanocomposites 303 Subhash B. Kondawar and Shikha P. Agrawal 11.1 Conducting Polymers 304 11.2 Nanostructure Conducting Polymers 311 11.3 Electrical Conductive Properties of Nanofibers of Conducting Polymer Nanocomposites 337 11.4 Applications of Nanofibers of Conducting Polymers Nanocomposites 341 11.5 Concluding Remarks 347 References 348 PART 3 Smart Biosystems Engineering 357 12 Stimuli-Responsive Redox Biopolymers 359 Sudheesh K. Shukla and Ashutosh Tiwari 12.1 Introduction 359 12.2 Method of Synthesis, Characterization and Mechanism 363 12.3 Stimuli-Responsive Redox and Electrical Conductive Behavior 367 12.4 Biosensor Applications 372 12.5 Conclusion 373 References 374 13 Commodity Thermoplastics with Bespoken Properties using Metallocene Catalyst Systems 377 Nikhil Prakash 13.1 Introduction 378 13.2 Metallocene Catalyst Systems 379 13.3 Metallocene Thermoplastics 385 13.4 Conclusions and Future Prospects 393 References 393 PART 4 Theory and Modeling 397 14 Elastic Constants, Structural Parameters and Elastic Perspectives of Thorium Mono-Chalcogenides in Temperature Sensitive Region 399 Krishna Murti Raju Nomenclature 400 14.1 Introduction 400 14.2 Formulation 404 14.3 Evaluation 410 14.4 Results and Discussions 414 14.5 Conclusions 424 Acknowledgment 424 References 424 Index 429

Read more less

Book SynopsisThe expansion of carbon materials is multidisciplinary and is related to physics, chemistry, biology, applied sciences and engineering. The research on carbon materials has mostly focused on aspects of fundamental physics as they unique electrical, thermal and mechanical properties applicable for the range of applications.Table of ContentsPreface xiii Part 1 Graphene, Carbon Nanotubes and Fullerenes 1 1 Synthesis, Characterization and Functionalization of Carbon Nanotubes and Graphene: A Glimpse of Their Application 3 Mahe Talat and O.N. Srivastava 1.1 Introduction 4 1.2 Synthesis and Characterization of Carbon Nanotubes 5 1.3 Synthesis and Characterization of Graphene 11 1.4 Methods Used in Our Lab: CVD, Thermal Exfoliation, Arc Discharge and Chemical Reduction 14 1.5 Functionalization of Carbon Nanotubes and Graphene 19 1.6 Applications 24 1.7 Conclusion 29 Acknowledgements 29 References 30 2 Surface Modification of Graphene 35 Tapas Kuila, Priyabrata Banerjee and Naresh Chandra Murmu 2.1 Introduction 36 2.2 Surface-Modified Graphene from GO 39 2.3 Application of Surface-Modified Graphene 70 2.4 Conclusions and Future Directions of Research 75 Acknowledgement 77 References 77 3 Graphene and Carbon Nanotube-based Electrochemical Biosensors for Environmental Monitoring 87 G. Alarcon-Angeles, G.A. Álvarez-Romero and A. Merkoçi 3.1 Introduction 88 3.2 Applications of Electrochemical Biosensors 97 3.3 Conclusions and Future Perspectives 121 References 121 4 Catalytic Application of Carbon-based Nanostructured Materials on Hydrogen Sorption Behavior of Light Metal Hydrides 129 Rohit R Shahi and O.N. Srivastava 4.1 Introduction 130 4.2 Different Carbon Allotropes 133 4.3 Carbon Nanomaterials as Catalyst for Different Storage Materials 135 4.4 Key Results with MgH2, NaAlH4 and Li-Mg-N-H Systems 137 4.5 Summary 164 Acknowledgements 165 References 165 5 Carbon Nanotubes and Their Applications 173 Mohan Raja and J. Subha 5.1 Introduction 173 5.2 Carbon Nanotubes Structure 174 5.3 Carbon Nanotube Physical Properties 176 5.4 Carbon Nanotube Synthesis and Processing 177 5.5 Carbon Nanotube Surface Modification 178 5.6 Applications of Carbon Nanotubes 179 5.7 Conclusion 187 References 187 6 Bioimpact of Carbon Nanomaterials 193 A. Djordjevic, R. Injac, D. Jovic, J. Mrdjanovic and M. Seke 6.1 Biologically Active Fullerene Derivatives 194 6.2 Biologically Active Graphene Materials 219 6.3 Bioimpact of Carbon Nanotubes 230 6.4 Genotoxicity of Carbon Nanomaterials 238 6.5 Ecotoxicological Effects of Carbon Nanomaterials 247 References 251 Part 2 Composite Materials 273 7 Advanced Optical Materials Modified with Carbon Nano-Objects 275 Natalia V. Kamanina 7.1 Introduction 275 7.2 Photorefractive Features of the Organic Materials with Carbon Nanoparticles 279 7.3 Homeotropic Alignment of the Nematic Liquid Crystals Using Carbon Nanotubes 297 7.4 Thin Film Polarization Elements and Their Nanostructurization via CNTs 303 7.5 Spectral and Mechanical Properties of the Inorganic Materials via CNTs Application 307 7.6 Conclusion 310 Acknowledgments 311 References 312 8 Covalent and Non-Covalent Functionalization of Carbon Nanotubes 317 Tawfi k A. Saleh and Vinod K. Gupta 8.1 Introduction 317 8.2 Functionalization of Carbon Nanotubes 318 8.3 Covalent Functionalization 318 8.4 Non-Covalent Functionalization 320 8.5 Functionalization of CNT with Nanoparticles 320 8.6 Conclusion 326 Acknowledgment 327 References 327 9 Metal Matrix Nanocomposites Reinforced with Carbon Nanotubes 331 Praveennath G. Koppad, Vikas Kumar Singh, C.S. Ramesh, Ravikiran G. Koppad and K.T. Kashyap 9.1 Introduction 332 9.2 Carbon Nanotubes 333 9.3 Processing and Microstructural Characterization of Metal Matrix Nanocomposites 338 9.4 Mechanical Properties of Carbon Nanotube Reinforced Metal Matrix Nanocomposites 353 9.5 Strengthening Mechanisms 361 9.6 Thermal Properties of Carbon Nanotube Reinforced Metal Matrix Nanocomposites 363 9.7 Tribological Properties of Carbon Nanotube Reinforced Metal Matrix Nanocomposites 366 9.8 Challenges 368 9.9 Concluding Remarks 371 References 371 Part 3 Fly Ash Engineering and Cryogels 377 10 Aluminum/Fly Ash Syntactic Foams: Synthesis, Microstructure and Properties 379 Dung D. Luong, Nikhil Gupta and Pradeep K. Rohatgi 10.1 Introduction 380 10.2 Hollow Particles 382 10.3 Synthesis Methods 388 10.4 Microstructure of Aluminum/Fly Ash Composites 393 10.5 Properties of Aluminum/Fly Ash Syntactic Foams 398 10.6 Applications 409 10.7 Conclusion 411 Acknowledgments 412 References 412 11 Engineering Behavior of Ash Fills 419 Ashutosh Trivedi 11.1 Background 420 11.2 Engineering Evaluation of Cemented Ash Fill 439 11.3 Problems of Uncemented Ash Fill 446 11.4 Ash as a Structural Fill 453 11.5 Conclusions 470 Salutations, Acknowledgement and Disclaimer 470 References 471 12 Carbon-Doped Cryogel Thin Films Derived from Resorcinol Formaldehyde 475 Z. Markoviæ, D. Kleut, B. Babiæ, I. Holclajtner-Antunoviæ , V. Pavlovicæ and B. Todoroviæ-Markoviæ 12.1 Introduction 476 12.2 Experimental Procedure 476 12.3 Results and Discussion 477 12.4 Conclusion 483 Acknowledgements 484 References 484 Index 487

Read more less

Book SynopsisFocusing on the cutting-edge technologies available in the field of photovoltaics, Solar Cell Nanotechnology explores the latest research and development activities related to organic, inorganic, and hybrid materials being used in solar cell manufacturing.Table of ContentsPreface xvii Part 1 Current Developments 1 1 Design Considerations for Efficient and Stable Polymer Solar Cells 3 Prajwal Adhikary, Jing Li, and Qiquan Qiao 1.1 Introduction 4 1.2 Role of Interfacial Layer for Efficient BHJ Solar Cells 11 1.3 Selection of Interfacial Layer for Stable and Longer Lifetime 20 1.4 Materials Used as Interfacial Layer 26 1.5 Conclusion and Outlook 34 Acknowledgement 34 References 35 2 Carbazole-Based Organic Dyes for Dye-Sensitized Solar Cells: Role of Carbazole as Donor, Auxiliary Donor and π-linker 41 A. Venkateswararao and K. R. Justin Thomas 2.1 Introduction 42 2.2 Carbazole as a Donor for Dye-Sensitized Solar Cells 44 2.3 Carbazole as a π-Linker 64 2.4 Carbazole as Auxiliary Donor for DSSC 75 2.5 Carbazole as Donor as Well as Linker for DSSC 87 2.6 Conclusion and Outlook 91 Acknowledgements 92 References 92 3 Colloidal Synthesis of CuInS2 and CuInSe2 Nanocrystals for Photovoltaic Applications 97 Joanna Kolny-Olesiak 3.1 Introduction 97 3.2 Synthesis of CuInS2 and CuInSe2 Nanocrystals 99 3.3 Application of Colloidal CuInS2 and CuInSe2 Nanoparticles in Solar Energy Conversion 109 3.4 Conclusion and Outlook 112 References 112 4 Two Dimensional Layered Semiconductors: Emerging Materials for Solar Photovoltaics 117 Mariyappan Shanmugam and Bin Yu 4.1 Introduction 118 4.2 Material Synthesis 119 4.3 Photovoltaic Device Fabrication 122 4.4 Microstructural and Raman Spectroscopic Studies of MoS2 and WS2 124 4.5 Photovoltaic Performance Evaluation 126 4.6 Electronic Transport and Interfacial Recombination 129 4.7 Conclusion and Outlook 132 References 133 5 Control of ZnO Nanorods for Polymer Solar Cells 135 Hsin-Yi Chen, Ching-Fuh Lin 5.1 Introduction 136 5.2 Preparation and Characterization of ZnO NRs 137 5.3 Application of ZnO NR in Polymer Solar Cells 147 5.4 Conclusion and Outlook 154 References 154 Part 2 Noble Approaches 159 6 Dye-Sensitized Solar Cells 161 Lakshmi V. Munukutla, Aung Htun, Sailaja Radhakrishanan, Laura Main, and Arunachala M. Kannan 6.1 Introduction 161 6.2 Background 163 6.3 DSSC Key Performance Parameters 173 6.4 Device Improvements 174 6.5 DSSC Performance with Different Electrolytes 180 6.6 Conclusion and Outlook 183 References 183 7 Nanoimprint Lithography for Photovoltaic Applications 185 Benjamin Schumm and Stefan Kaskel 7.1 Introduction 186 7.2 Soft Lithography 186 7.3 NIL-Based Techniques for PV 190 7.4 Conclusion and Outlook 198 References 199 8 Indoor Photovoltaics: Efficiencies, Measurements and Design 203 Monika Freunek (Müller) 8.1 Introduction 203 8.2 Indoor Radiation 205 8.3 Maximum Efficiencies 208 8.4 Optimization Strategies 213 8.5 Characterization and Measured Efficiencies 216 8.6 Irradiance Measurements 217 8.7 Characterization 217 8.8 Conclusion and Outlook 219 References 221 9 Photon Management in Rare Earth Doped Nanomaterials for Solar Cells 223 Jiajia Zhou, Jianrong Qiu 9.1 Introduction 223 9.2 Basic Aspects of Solar Cell 224 9.4 Down-Conversion Nanomaterials for Solar Cell Application 232 9.5 Conclusion and Outlook 236 References 238 Part 3 Developments in Prospective 241 10 Advances in Plasmonic Light Trapping in Thin-Film Solar Photovoltaic Devices 243 J. Gwamuri, D. Ö. Güney, and J. M. Pearce 10.1 Introduction 244 10.2 Theoretical Approaches to Plasmonic Light Trapping Mechanisms in Thin-fi lm PV 247 10.3 Plasmonics for Improved Photovoltaic Cells Optical Properties 256 10.4 Fabrication Techniques and Economics 260 10.5 Conclusion and Outlook 263 Acknowledgements 266 References 266 11 Recent Research and Development of Luminescent Solar Concentrators 271 Yun Seng Lim, Shin Yiing Kee, and Chin Kim Lo 11.1 Introduction 272 11.2 Mechanisms of Power Losses in Luminescent Solar Concentrator 274 11.3 Modeling 276 11.4 Polymer Materials 279 11.5 Luminescent Materials for Luminescent Solar Concentrator 280 11.6 New Designs of Luminescent Solar Concentrator 286 11.7 Conclusion and Outlook 287 References 289 12 Luminescent Solar Concentrators – State of the Art and Future Perspectives 293 M. Tonezzer, D. Gutierrez, and D. Vincenzi 12.1 Introduction to the Third Generation of Photovoltaic Systems 294 12.2 Luminescence Solar Concentrators (LSCs) 294 12.3 Components of LSC Devices 299 12.4 Pathways for Improving LSC Efficiency 308 12.5 Conclusion and Outlook 311 Acknowledgments 312 References 312 13 Organic Fluorophores for Luminescent Solar Concentrators 317 Luca Beverina and Alessandro Sanguineti 13.1 Introduction 318 13.2 LSCs: Device Operation and Main Features 321 13.3 Luminophores in LSCs 324 13.4 Conclusion and Outlook 349 References 351 14 PAn-Graphene-Nanoribbon Composite Materials for Organic Photovoltaics: A DFT Study of Their Electronic and Charge Transport Properties 357 Javed Mazher, Asefa A. Desta, and Shabina Khan 14.1 Introduction 358 14.2 Review of Computational Background 379 14.3 Atomistic Computational Simulations: Modeling and Methodology 385 14.4 Results and Discussions 389 14.5 Conclusion and Outlook 398 References 400 15 Analytical Modeling of Thin-Film Solar Cells – Fundamentals and Applications 409 Kurt Taretto 15.1 Introduction 409 15.2 Basics 410 15.3 Fundamental Semiconductor Equations 417 15.4 Analytical Models for Selected Solar Cells 425 15.5 The Importance of the Temperature Dependence of VOC 442 15.6 Conclusions and Outlook 444 Acknowledgements 444 References 444 16 Efficient Organic Photovoltaic Cells: Current Global Scenario 447 Sandeep Rai and Atul Tiwari 16.1 Introduction 448 16.2 Current Developments in OPVs 455 16.3 Economics of Solar Energy 464 16.4 Conclusions and Future Trends in Photovoltaic 468 References 471 17 Real and Reactive Power Control of Voltage Source Converter-Based Photovoltaic Generating Systems 475 S. Mishra and P. C. Sekhar 17.1 Introduction 476 17.2 State of Art 478 17.3 Proposed Solution 479 17.4 Modeling of the PV Generator 480 17.5 Control of the PV Generator 483 17.6 Validation of the Proposed Control Architecture 491 17.7 Conclusion and Outlook 501 References 502 Index 505

Read more less

Book SynopsisThe book comprehensively charts a way for industry to employ adhesively bonded joints to make systems more efficient and cost-effective Adhesively bonded systems have found applications in a wide spectrum of industries (e.g. , aerospace, electronics, construction, ship building, biomedical, etc. ) for a variety of purposes.Table of ContentsPreface xiii Acknowledgements xv 1 Stress and Strain Analysis of Symmetric Composite Single Lap Joints Under Combined Tension and In-Plane Shear Loading 1 Jungmin Lee and Hyonny Kim 1.1 Introduction 2 1.2 Equations and Solution 3 1.3 Solution Verifi cation 13 1.4 Yield Criterion 18 1.5 Case Studies 19 1.6 Summary 21 References 22 2 Finite Element Modeling of Viscoelastic Behavior and Interface Damage in Adhesively Bonded Joints 23 Feifei Cheng, Ö. Özgü Özsoy and J.N. Reddy 2.1 Introduction 23 2.2 Finite Element Analysis of Viscoelastic Adhesively Bonded Joints 27 2.3 Damage Analysis of Viscoelastic Adhesively Bonded Joints 33 2.4 Summary and Conclusions 43 Acknowledgements 44 References 44 3 Modeling of Cylindrical Joints with a Functionally Graded Adhesive Interlayer 47 S. Kumar 3.1 Introduction 48 3.2 Axisymmetric Model 52 3.3 Constitutive Models of the Adherends and FMGB Adhesive 62 3.4 Variational Approach 62 3.5 Solution Procedure 68 3.6 Results and discussion 69 3.7 Summary 80 References 86 4 A Simplifi ed Stress Analysis of Bonded Joints Using Macro-Elements 93 E. Paroissien, F. Lachaud, and T. Jacobs 4.1 Introduction 94 4.2 Linear Elastic 1D-Bar and 1D-Beam Models 96 4.3 Assuming a Non-linear Adhesive Material 110 4.4 Validation 118 4.5 Comparison With Finite Element Predictions 125 4.6 Conclusion 136 Acknowledgment 136 References 145 5 Simulation of Bonded Joints Failure using Progressive Mixed-Mode Damage Models 147 M.F.S.F. de Moura and J.A.G. Chousal 5.1 Introduction 148 5.2 Cohesive Damage Model 149 5.3 Measurement of Cohesive Parameters 153 5.4 Continuum Damage Models 161 5.5 Conclusion 168 References 170 6 Testing of Dual Adhesive Ceramic-Metal Joints for Aerospace Applications 171 E.A.S. Marques, Lucas F.M. da Silva and C. Sato 6.1 Introduction 172 6.2 Experimental Details 173 6.3 Results 181 6.4 Conclusions 188 Acknowledgments 190 References 190 7 Modelling of Composite Sandwich T-Joints Under Tension and Bending 191 J.H. Tang, I. Sridhar, G.B. Chai and C.H. Ong 7.1 Introduction 192 7.2 Description of the Experiment 193 7.3 Description of the Finite Element Model 196 7.4 Description of the Peel Stress Model: Strength of Materials Approach 199 7.5 Results and Discussion 202 7.6 Concluding Remarks 211 Acknowledgement 212 References 217 8 Strength Prediction Methods for Adhesively Bonded Lap Joints between Composite–Composite/Metal Adherends 219 P.K. Sahoo, B. Dattaguru, C.M. Manjunatha and C.R.L. Murthy 8.1 Introduction 220 8.2 Strength Prediction Using Characteristic Distances in Problems with Singular Stresses 224 8.3 Strength Prediction in Aluminium-Aluminium Joints 225 8.4 Strength Prediction in CFRP-Aluminium and CFRP-CFRP Joints 229 8.5 Results and Discussion 232 8.6 Conclusions 234 Acknowledgments 235 References 235 9 Interface Failure Detection in Adhesively Bonded Composite Joints Using a Novel Vibration-Based Approach 237 Ramadan A. Esmaeel and Farid Taheri 9.1 Introduction 238 9.2 Conventionally Used Non-destructive Techniques (NDTs) for Damage Detection 238 9.3 Motivation and Methodology 240 9.4 Experimental Procedure 243 9.5 Experimental Results 248 9.6 Finite Element Modeling Investigation 250 9.7 Summary and Conclusions 258 Acknowledgments 260 References 260

Read more less

Book SynopsisThe first comprehensive book to focus on ultra-high temperature ceramic materials in more than 20 years Ultra-High Temperature Ceramics are a family of compounds that display an unusual combination of properties, including extremely high melting temperatures (>3000C), high hardness, and good chemical stability and strength at high temperatures. Typical UHTC materials are the carbides, nitrides, and borides of transition metals, but the Group IV compounds (Ti, Zr, Hf) plus TaC are generally considered to be the main focus of research due to the superior melting temperatures and stable high-melting temperature oxide that forms in situ. Rather than focusing on the latest scientific results, Ultra-High Temperature Ceramics: Materials for Extreme Environment Applications broadly and critically combines the historical aspects and the state-of-the-art on the processing, densification, properties, and performance of boride and carbide ceramics. In reviewing the historicTable of ContentsAcknowledgments ix Contributors List xi 1 Introduction 1William G. Fahrenholtz, Eric J. Wuchina, William E. Lee, and Yanchun Zhou 2 A Historical Perspective on Research Related to Ultra-High Temperature Ceramics 6William G. Fahrenholtz 3 Reactive Processes for Diboride-Based Ultra-High Temperature Ceramics 33Guo-Jun Zhang, Hai-Tao Liu, Wen-Wen Wu, Ji Zou, De-Wei Ni, Wei-Ming Guo, Ji-Xuan Liu, and Xin-Gang Wang 4 First-Principles Investigation on the Chemical Bonding and Intrinsic Elastic Properties of Transition Metal Diborides TMB2 (TM=Zr, Hf, Nb, Ta, and Y) 60Yanchun Zhou, Jiemin Wang, Zhen Li, Xun Zhan, and Jingyang Wang 5 Near-Net-Shaping of Ultra-High Temperature Ceramics 83Carolina Tallon and George V. Franks 6 Sintering and Densification MECHANISMS of Ultra-High Temperature Ceramics 112Diletta Sciti, Laura Silvestroni, Valentina Medri, and Frédéric Monteverde 7 U HTC Composites for Hypersonic Applications 144Anish Paul, Jon Binner, and Bala Vaidhyanathan 8 Mechanical Properties of Zirconium-Diboride Based UHTCs 167Eric W. Neuman and Greg E. Hilmas 9 Thermal Conductivity of ZrB2 and HfB2 197Gregory J. K. Harrington and Greg E. Hilmas 10 Deformation and Hardness of UHTCs as a Function of Temperature 236J. Wang and L. J. Vandeperre 11 Modeling and Evaluating the Environmental Degradation of UHTCs under Hypersonic Flow 267Triplicane A. Parthasarathy, Michael K. Cinibulk and Mark Opeka 12 Tantalum Carbides: Their Microstructures and Deformation Behavior 291Gregory B. Thompson and Christopher R. Weinberger 13 Titanium Diboride 316Brahma Raju Golla, Twisampati Bhandari, Amartya Mukhopadhyay, and Bikramjit Basu 14 Th e Group IV Carbides and Nitrides 361Eric J. Wuchina and Mark Opeka 15 Nuclear Applications for Ultra-High Temperature Ceramics and MAX Phases 391William E. Lee, Edoardo Giorgi, Robert Harrison, Alexandre Maître, and Olivier Rapaud16 UHTC-Based Hot Structures: Characterization, Design, and On-Ground/In-Flight Testing 416Davide Alfano, Roberto Gardi, Luigi Scatteia, and Antonio Del Vecchio Index 437

Read more less

Book SynopsisThis book introduces the mathematical techniques for turbulence control in a form suitable for inclusion in an engineering degree program at both undergraduate and postgraduate levels whilst also making it useful to researchers and industrial users of the concepts.Trade Review"This book introduces the mathematical techniques for turbulence control in a form suitable for inclusion in an engineering degree program at both undergraduate and postgraduate levels whilst also making it useful to researchers and industrial users of the concepts. It uses a mix of theory, computation and experimental results to present and illustrate the methodologies." (Zentralblatt MATH 2016)Table of ContentsAbout the Authors ix Preface xi Part I WALL TURBULENCE 1 Statistical Analysis and Spectral Method 3 1.1 Statistical Analysis and Spectral Method 3 1.1.1 Average Value 3 1.1.2 Probability Density and Statistical Moments 5 1.1.3 Correlation Function 9 1.2 Statistical Analysis of Turbulence 11 1.2.1 Reynolds Stress and Turbulent Kinetic Energy 11 1.2.2 Variable-Interval Time Average Method 13 1.3 Fourier Transform and Spectrum 16 1.3.1 Harmonic Wave 16 1.3.2 Fourier Transform 18 1.3.3 Energy Spectrum 22 1.4 Spectral Series Expansion of Function 22 1.4.1 Orthogonal Basis 22 1.4.2 Fourier Series 23 1.4.3 Chebyshev Polynomials 24 1.5 Fundamentals of Spectral Methods 26 1.5.1 Fundamental Concepts 26 1.5.2 Fourier–Galerkin Method 29 1.5.3 Chebyshev–Tau Method 31 1.5.4 Helmholtz Equation 34 1.6 Spectral Method of Navier–Stokes Equations 38 1.6.1 Time Integration Method 38 1.6.2 Spectral Method based on Time Marching Algorithms (1) 41 1.6.3 Spectral Method based on Time Marching Algorithms (2) 50 1.6.4 Spectral Method based on Time-Split Method 52 1.7 Closed Remarks 54 References 55 2 Wall Turbulence and Its Coherent Structure 57 2.1 Boundary Layer Flow and Flow Stability 58 2.1.1 Boundary Layer Flow 58 2.1.2 Flow Stability 59 2.1.3 Linear Stability Theory of Flow 61 2.2 Transition of Boundary Layer Flow 63 2.2.1 Basic Process 63 2.2.2 Receptivity Stage 64 2.2.3 Linear Instability and Transient Growth 68 2.2.4 Nonlinear Instability and Turbulent Spot 71 2.2.5 Bypass Transition 75 2.3 Coherent Structure of Wall Turbulence 77 2.3.1 Statistical Properties of Near-Wall Turbulence 78 2.3.2 Structural Features and Identification of Streak 82 2.3.3 Structural Features and Identification of Vortex 83 2.4 Formation and Evolution of a Coherent Structure 89 2.4.1 Formation and Instability of Streak 89 2.4.2 Formation of a Vortex Structure 92 2.4.3 A Novel Coherent Motion: Soliton and Its Relevant Structures 97 2.5 Bursting and Self-Sustaining of Wall Turbulence 102 2.5.1 Bursting Event 103 2.5.2 Self-Sustaining of a Coherent Structure 105 2.6 Closed Remarks 107 References 109 Part II CONTROL OF WALL TURBULENCE 3 Control of Turbulence with Active Wall Motion 115 3.1 Stokes Second Problem 118 3.2 Experiments of Wall Turbulence with Spanwise Wall Oscillation 121 3.2.1 Incompressible Flow with Spanwise Wall Oscillation 121 3.2.2 Compressible Flow with Spanwise Wall Oscillation 127 3.3 Numerical Simulation of Wall Turbulence with Spanwise Wall Oscillation 136 3.3.1 Wall Turblence with Spanwise Wall Oscillation 136 3.3.2 Control Mechanism of Spanwise Wall Oscillation 139 3.3.3 Wall Turbulence with Spanwise Traveling Wave on Wavy Wall 147 3.3.4 Wall Turbulence with Streamwise Traveling Wave on Wavy Wall 150 3.4 Deformed Wall 153 3.4.1 Shape Memory Alloy 155 3.4.2 Piezoceramics 156 3.4.3 Magnet 157 3.4.4 Cam Mechanism 158 3.5 Experiments of Wall Turbulence with Deformed Wall 158 3.5.1 Incompressible Flow with Deformed Wall 158 3.5.2 Compressible Flow with Deformed Wall 160 3.6 Numerical Simulation of Wall Turbulence with Deformed Wall 164 3.6.1 Wall Turbulence with Streamwise-Traveling Surface Deformation Wave 164 3.6.2 Wall Turbulence with Sinusoidally Deformed Wall 173 3.6.3 Wall Turbulence with Opposition Wall Deformation Control 177 3.6.4 Control Mechanism of Deformed Wall 188 3.7 Closed Remarks 192 References 193 4 Control of Turbulence by Lorentz Force 195 4.1 Lorentz Force 197 4.2 Experiments of Wall Turbulence with Spanwise Lorentz Force 200 4.2.1 Control with Uniform Spanwise Oscillating Lorentz Force 200 4.2.2 Control with Wavy Lorentz Force 206 4.3 Numerical Simulation of Wall Turbulence with Spanwise Lorentz Force 214 4.3.1 Spanwise Lorentz Force 214 4.3.2 Generalized Stokes Layer Induced by Oscillating Lorentz Force 216 4.3.3 Control with Spanwise Oscillating Lorentz Force 219 4.3.4 Control with Wavy Lorentz Force 239 4.4 Wall Turbulence with Wall-Normal Lorentz Force 260 4.4.1 Three-Dimensional Lorentz Force Field 260 4.4.2 Experiments on Wall Normal EM Actuator Tile 261 4.4.3 Numerical Simulation of Wall Turbulence with Normal Lorentz Force 263 4.5 Closed Remarks 265 References 267 Part III OPTIMAL FLOW CONTROL 5 Linear Optimal Flow Control 271 5.1 Optimal Control 273 5.1.1 Introduction 273 5.1.2 Optimal Control for Ordinary Differential Equations 277 5.2 Optimal Control of Linear Quadratic Systems 280 5.2.1 Linear Quadratic Optimal Control 280 5.2.2 Discrete Linear Quadratic Systems 287 5.2.3 Linear Quadratic Gaussian (LQG) Control in the Presence of Noise 288 5.3 Linear Process in Near-Wall Turbulent Flow 290 5.4 Linear Optimal Control of Two-Dimensional Flow 294 5.4.1 Linearization of Navier–Stokes Equations 294 5.4.2 Spectral Decomposition of Linearized Flow 296 5.4.3 Standard State-Space Representations of Linearized Flow 299 5.4.4 Linear Optimal Control of Channel Flow 302 5.5 Linear Optimal Control of Three-Dimensional Flow 305 5.6 Closed Remarks 309 References 310 6 Nonlinear Optimal Flow Control 313 6.1 Fundamentals of Optimal Flow Control 314 6.1.1 Closed-Loop Flow Control 314 6.1.2 Cost Functional 315 6.1.3 Fréchet Differential 316 6.2 Spectrum-based Suboptimal Control 316 6.2.1 Control of Channel Flow 316 6.2.2 Control of Backward-Facing Step Flow 323 6.2.3 Control of Cylinder Flow 329 6.3 Adjoint-based Suboptimal Control 341 6.3.1 Fundamentals of Adjoint-based Suboptimal Control 341 6.3.2 Adjoint-based Suboptimal Control 344 6.3.3 Near-Wall Turbulence Controlled by Blowing–Suction Wall 347 6.3.4 Cylinder Flow Controlled by Lorentz Force 348 6.4 Neural Network in Flow Control 360 6.4.1 Neural Network 360 6.4.2 Near-Wall Turbulence Controlled by Blowing–Suction Wall 361 6.4.3 Near-Wall Turbulence Controlled by Deformed Wall 367 6.4.4 Near-Wall Turbulence Controlled by Lorentz Force 370 6.5 Closed Remarks 372 References 373 Index 375

Read more less

Book SynopsisCorrosion costs billions of dollars to each and every single economy in the world. Corrosion is a chemical process, and it is crucial to understand the dynamics from a chemical perspective before proceeding with analyses, designs and solutions from an engineering aspect.Table of ContentsForeword xiii Preface xv 1 Corrosion of Materials 1 1.1 Deterioration or Corrosion of Ceramic Materials 2 1.2 Degradation or Deterioration of Polymers 3 1.3 Corrosion or Deterioration of Metals 4 2 Cost of Corrosion 21 2.1 Corrosion Preventative Measures 22 2.2 Lost Production Due to Plants Going out of Service or Shutdowns 22 2.3 Product Loss Due to Leakages 22 2.4 Contamination of the Product 23 2.5 Maintenance Costs 23 2.6 Overprotective Measures 23 3 Factors Influencing Corrosion 25 3.1 Nature of the Metal 27 3.2 Nature of the Corroding Environment 29 4 Corrosion Mechanisms 35 4.1 Direct Chemical Attack or Chemical or Dry Corrosion 35 4.2 Electrochemical or Aqueous or Wet Corrosion 38 4.3 Differences between Chemical and Electrochemical Corrosion 41 5 Types of Corrosion 43 5.1 Uniform Corrosion 43 5.2 Non-Uniform Corrosion 56 6 The Thermodynamics of Corrosion 83 6.1 Gibbs Free Energy (ΔG) 84 6.2 Passivity 85 6.3 Pourbaix Diagrams 87 6.4 Corrosion Equilibrium and Adsorptions 89 6.5 Concentration Corrosion Cells 91 6.6 Polarization 93 6.7 Polarization Curves 96 7 Corrosion Prevention and Protection 101 7.1 Proper Design 103 7.2 Choice of Material 105 7.3 Protective Coatings 109 7.4 Changing the Environmental Factors that Accelerate Corrosion 124 7.5 Changing the Electrochemical Characteristic of the Metal Surface 147 8 Corrosion and Corrosion Prevention of Concrete Structures 171 8.1 Concrete’s Chemical Composition 172 8.2 Corrosion Reactions of Concrete 173 8.3 Factors Affecting Corrosion Rate in Reinforced Concrete Structures 174 8.4 Corrosion Measurements in Reinforced Concrete Structures 183 8.5 Corrosion Prevention of Reinforced Concrete 186 9 Corrosion and Corrosion Prevention of Metallic Structures in Seawater 191 9.1 Factors Affecting Corrosion Rate of Metallic Structures in Seawater 192 9.2 Cathodic Protection of Metallic Structures in the Sea 195 10 Corrosion and Corrosion Prevention in Petroleum Industry 199 10.1 Chemicals that Cause Corrosion in Petroleum Industry 201 10.2 Petroleum or Crude Oil Pipeline Systems 211 10.3 Crude Oil or Petroleum Storage Tanks 214 11 Corrosion and Corrosion Prevention in Water Transportation and Storage Industry 217 11.1 Water Pipeline Systems 217 11.2 Cooling Water Systems 221 11.3 Potable Water Tanks 222 11.4 Boilers 222 11.5 Geothermal Systems 229 References 231 Index 263

Read more less

Book SynopsisTRANSFER MATRIX METHOD FOR MULTIBODY SYSTEMS: THEORY AND APPLICATIONS Xiaoting Rui, Guoping Wang and Jianshu Zhang - Nanjing University of Science and Technology, China Featuring a new method of multibody system dynamics, this book introduces the transfer matrix method systematically for the first time. First developed by the lead author and his research team, this method has found numerous engineering and technological applications. Readers are first introduced to fundamental concepts like the body dynamics equation, augmented operator and augmented eigenvector before going in depth into precision analysis and computations of eigenvalue problems as well as dynamic responses. The book also covers a combination of mixed methods and practical applications in multiple rocket launch systems, self-propelled artillery as well as launch dynamics of on-ship weaponry. Comprehensively introduces a new method of analyzing multibody dynamics for engineers PrTable of ContentsIntroduction xi About the Author xiii Foreword One for the Chinese Edition xv Foreword Two for the Chinese Edition xvii Foreword Three for the Chinese Edition xix Foreword Four for the Chinese Edition xxi Professor Rui’s Method—Discrete Time Transfer Matrix Method for Multibody System Dynamics xxiii Preface xxv 1 Introduction 1 1.1 The Status of the Multibody System Dynamics Method 1 1.2 The Transfer Matrix Method and the Finite Element Method 3 1.3 The Status of the Transfer Matrix Method for a Multibody System 5 1.4 Features of the Transfer Matrix Method for Multibody Systems 7 1.5 Launch Dynamics 12 1.6 Features of this Book 13 1.7 Sign Conventions 14 Part I Transfer Matrix Method for Linear Multibody Systems 19 2 Transfer Matrix Method for Linear Multibody Systems 21 2.1 Introduction 21 2.2 State Vector, Transfer Equation and Transfer Matrix 22 2.3 Overall Transfer Equation, Overall Transfer Matrix and Boundary Conditions 31 2.4 Characteristic Equation 32 2.5 Computation for State Vector and Vibration Characteristics 36 2.6 Vibration Characteristics of Multibody Systems 41 2.7 Eigenvalues of Damped Vibration 56 2.8 Steady-state Response to Forced Vibration 63 2.9 Steady-state Response of Forced Damped Vibration 70 3 Augmented Eigenvector and System Response 79 3.1 Introduction 79 3.2 Body Dynamics Equation and Parameter Matrices 80 3.3 Basic Theory of the Orthogonality of Eigenvectors 83 3.4 Augmented Eigenvectors and their Orthogonality 86 3.5 Examples of the Orthogonality of Augmented Eigenvectors 96 3.6 Transient Response of a Multibody System 102 3.7 Steady-state Response of a Damped Multibody System 111 3.8 Steady-state Response of a Multibody System 117 3.9 Static Response of a Multibody System 124 4 Transfer Matrix Method for Nonlinear and Multidimensional Multibody Systems 129 4.1 Introduction 129 4.2 Incremental Transfer Matrix Method for Nonlinear Systems 129 4.3 Finite Element Transfer Matrix Method for Two-dimensional Systems 140 4.4 Finite Element Riccati Transfer Matrix Method for Two-dimensional Nonlinear Systems 154 4.5 Fourier Series Transfer Matrix Method for Two-dimensional Systems 162 4.6 Finite Difference Transfer Matrix Method for Two-dimensional Systems 167 4.7 Transfer Matrix Method for Two-dimensional Systems 170 Part II Transfer Matrix Method for Multibody Systems 181 5 Transfer Matrix Method for Multi-rigid-body Systems 183 5.1 Introduction 183 5.2 State Vectors, Transfer Equations and Transfer Matrices 184 5.3 Overall Transfer Equation and Overall Transfer Matrix 185 5.4 Transfer Matrix of a Planar Rigid Body 185 5.5 Transfer Matrix of a Spatial Rigid Body 187 5.6 Transfer Matrix of a Planar Hinge 188 5.7 Transfer Matrix of a Spatial Hinge 189 5.8 Transfer Matrix of an Acceleration Hinge 192 5.9 Algorithm of the Transfer Matrix Method for Multibody Systems 193 5.10 Numerical Examples of Multibody System Dynamics 194 6 Transfer Matrix Method for Multi-flexible-body Systems 199 6.1 Introduction 199 6.2 State Vector, Transfer Equation and Transfer Matrix 200 6.3 Overall Transfer Equation and Overall Transfer Matrix 201 6.4 Transfer Matrix of a Planar Beam 201 6.5 Transfer Matrix of a Spatial Beam 205 6.6 Numerical Examples of Multi-flexible-body System Dynamics 211 Part III Discrete Time Transfer Matrix Method for Multibody Systems 217 7 Discrete Time Transfer Matrix Method for Multibody Systems 219 7.1 Introduction 219 7.2 State Vector, Transfer Equation and Transfer Matrix 221 7.3 Step-by-step Time Integration Method and Linearization 225 7.4 Transfer Matrix of a Planar Rigid Body 235 7.5 Transfer Matrices of Spatial Rigid Bodies 242 7.6 Transfer Matrices of Planar Hinges 251 7.7 Transfer Matrices of Spatial Hinges 256 7.8 Algorithm of the Discrete Time Transfer Matrix Method for Multibody Systems 259 7.9 Numerical Examples of Multibody System Dynamics 259 8 Discrete Time Transfer Matrix Method for Multi-flexible-body Systems 265 8.1 Introduction 265 8.2 Dynamics of a Flexible Body with Large Motion 266 8.3 State Vector, Transfer Equation and Transfer Matrix 276 8.4 Transfer Matrix of a Beam with Large Planar Motion 277 8.5 Transfer Matrices of Smooth Hinges Connected to a Beam with Large Planar Motion 282 8.6 Transfer Matrices of Spring Hinges Connected to a Beam with Large Planar Motion 286 8.7 Transfer Matrix of a Fixed Hinge Connected to a Beam 292 8.8 Dynamics Equation of a Spatial Large Motion Beam 296 8.9 Transfer Matrix of a Spatial Large Motion Beam 300 8.10 Transfer Matrices of Fixed Hinges Connected to a Beam with Large Spatial Motion 305 8.11 Transfer Matrices of Smooth Hinges Connected to a Beam with Large Spatial Motion 309 8.12 Transfer Matrices of Spring Hinges Connected to a Beam with Large Spatial Motion 313 8.13 Algorithm of the Discrete Time Transfer Matrix Method for Multi-flexible-body Systems 318 8.14 Planar Multi-flexible-body System Dynamics 318 8.15 Spatial Multi-flexible-body System Dynamics 322 9 Transfer Matrix Method for Controlled Multibody Systems 327 9.1 Introduction 327 9.2 Mixed Transfer Matrix Method for Multibody Systems 328 9.3 Finite Element Transfer Matrix Method for Multibody Systems 338 9.4 Finite Segment Transfer Matrix Method for Multibody Systems 341 9.5 Transfer Matrix Method for Controlled Multibody Systems I 348 9.6 Transfer Matrix Method for Controlled Multibody Systems II 362 10 Derivation and Computation of Transfer Matrices 377 10.1 Introduction 377 10.2 Derivation from Dynamics Equations 378 10.3 Derivation from an nth-order Differential Equation 388 10.4 Derivation from n First-order Differential Equations 398 10.5 Derivation from Stiffness Matrices 401 10.6 Computational Method of the Transfer Matrix 402 10.7 Improved Algorithm for Eigenvalue Problems 406 10.8 Properties of the Inverse Matrix of a Transfer Matrix 408 10.9 Riccati Transfer Matrix Method for Multibody Systems 417 10.10 Stability of the Transfer Matrix Method for Multibody Systems 428 11 Theorem to Deduce the Overall Transfer Equation Automatically 433 11.1 Introduction 433 11.2 Topology Figure of Multibody Systems 433 11.3 Automatic Deduction of the Overall Transfer Equation of a Closed-loop System 435 11.4 Automatic Deduction of the Overall Transfer Equation of a Tree System 435 11.5 Automatic Deduction of the Overall Transfer Equation of a General System 439 11.6 Automatic Deduction Theorem of the Overall Transfer Equation 442 11.7 Numerical Example of Closed-loop System Dynamics 443 11.8 Numerical Example of Tree System Dynamics 451 11.9 Numerical Example of Multi-level System Dynamics 470 11.10 Numerical Example of General System Dynamics 474 Part IV Applications of the Transfer Matrix Method for Multibody Systems 489 12 Dynamics of Multiple Launch Rocket Systems 491 12.1 Introduction 491 12.2 Launch Dynamics Model of the System and its Topology 492 12.3 State Vector, Transfer Equation and Transfer Matrix 496 12.4 Overall Transfer Equation of the System 502 12.5 Vibration Characteristics of the System 504 12.6 Dynamics Response of the System 506 12.7 Launch Dynamics Equation and Forces Acting on the System 512 12.8 Dynamics Simulation of the System and its Test Verifying 516 12.9 Low Rocket Consumption Technique for the System Test 533 12.10 High Launch Precision Technique for the System 541 13 Dynamics of Self-propelled Launch Systems 545 13.1 Introduction 545 13.2 Dynamics Model of the System and its Topology 545 13.3 State Vector, Transfer Equation and Transfer Matrix 549 13.4 Overall Transfer Equation of the System 555 13.5 Vibration Characteristics of the System 555 13.6 Dynamic Response of the System 557 13.7 Launch Dynamic Equations and Forces Analysis 563 13.8 Dynamics Simulation of the System and its Test Verifying 570 14 Dynamics of Shipboard Launch Systems 581 14.1 Introduction 581 14.2 Dynamics Model of Shipboard Launch Systems 581 14.3 State Vector, Transfer Equation and Transfer Matrix 583 14.4 Overall Transfer Equation of the System 587 14.5 Launch Dynamics Equation and Forces of the System 589 14.6 Solution of Shipboard Launch System Motion 598 14.7 Dynamics Simulation of the System and its Test Verifying 599 15 Transfer Matrix Library for Multibody Systems 607 15.1 Introdution 607 15.2 Springs 607 15.3 Rotary Springs 609 15.4 Elastic Hinges 610 15.5 Lumped Mass Vibrating in a Longitudinal Direction 611 15.6 Vibration of Rigid Bodies 612 15.7 Beam with Transverse Vibration 615 15.8 Shaft with Torsional Vibration 620 15.9 Rod with Longitudinal Vibration 621 15.10 Euler–Bernoulli Beam 622 15.11 Rectangular Plate 624 15.12 Disk 629 15.13 Strip Element of a Two-dimensional Thin Plate 635 15.14 Thick-walled Cylinder 638 15.15 Thin-walled Cylinder 640 15.16 Coordinate Transformation Matrix 642 15.17 Linearization and State Vectors 645 15.18 Spring and Damper Hinges Connected to Rigid Bodies 646 15.19 Smooth Hinges Connected to Rigid Bodies 648 15.20 Rigid Bodies Moving in a Plane 649 15.21 Spatial Rigid Bodies with Large Motion and Various Connections 651 15.22 Planar Beam with Large Motion 654 15.23 Spatial Beam with Large Motion 656 15.24 Fixed Hinges Connected to a Planar Beam with Large Motion 658 15.25 Fixed Hinges Connected to a Spatial Beam with Large Motion 660 15.26 Smooth Hinges Connected to a Beam with Large Planar Motion 663 15.27 Smooth Hinges Connected to a Beam with Large Spatial Motion 666 15.28 Elastic Hinges Connected to a Beam with Large Planar Motion 668 15.29 Elastic Hinges Connected to a Beam Moving in Space 672 15.30 Controlled Elements of a Linear System 675 15.31 Controlled Elements of a General Time-variable System 676 Appendix I Rotation Formula Around an Axis 681 Appendix II Orientation of a Body-fixed Coordinate System 683 Appendix III List of Symbols 687 Appendix IV International Academic Communion for the Transfer Matrix Method for Multibody Systems 693 References 707 Index 729

Read more less

Book SynopsisAsymptotic Methods in the Theory of Plates with Mixed Boundary Conditions comprehensively covers the theoretical background of asymptotic approaches and their use in solving mechanical engineering-oriented problems of structural members, primarily plates (statics and dynamics) with mixed boundary conditions.Table of ContentsPreface ix List of Abbreviations xiii 1 Asymptotic Approaches 1 1.1 Asymptotic Series and Approximations 1 1.1.1 Asymptotic Series 1 1.1.2 Asymptotic Symbols and Nomenclatures 5 1.2 Some Nonstandard Perturbation Procedures 8 1.2.1 Choice of Small Parameters 8 1.2.2 Homotopy Perturbation Method 10 1.2.3 Method of Small Delta 13 1.2.4 Method of Large Delta 17 1.2.5 Application of Distributions 19 1.3 Summation of Asymptotic Series 21 1.3.1 Analysis of Power Series 21 1.3.2 Padé Approximants and Continued Fractions 24 1.4 Some Applications of PA 29 1.4.1 Accelerating Convergence of Iterative Processes 29 1.4.2 Removing Singularities and Reducing the Gibbs-Wilbraham Effect 31 1.4.3 Localized Solutions 32 1.4.4 Hermite-Padé Approximations and Bifurcation Problem 34 1.4.5 Estimates of Effective Characteristics of Composite Materials 34 1.4.6 Continualization 35 1.4.7 Rational Interpolation 36 1.4.8 Some Other Applications 37 1.5 Matching of Limiting Asymptotic Expansions 38 1.5.1 Method of Asymptotically Equivalent Functions for Inversion of Laplace Transform 38 1.5.2 Two-Point PA 41 1.5.3 Other Methods of AEFs Construction 43 1.5.4 Example: Schrödinger Equation 45 1.5.5 Example: AEFs in the Theory of Composites 46 1.6 Dynamical Edge Effect Method 49 1.6.1 Linear Vibrations of a Rod 49 1.6.2 Nonlinear Vibrations of a Rod 51 1.6.3 Nonlinear Vibrations of a Rectangular Plate 54 1.6.4 Matching of Asymptotic and Variational Approaches 58 1.6.5 On the Normal Forms of Nonlinear Vibrations of Continuous Systems 60 1.7 Continualization 61 1.7.1 Discrete and Continuum Models in Mechanics 61 1.7.2 Chain of Elastically Coupled Masses 62 1.7.3 Classical Continuum Approximation 64 1.7.4 "Splashes" 65 1.7.5 Envelope Continualization 66 1.7.6 Improvement Continuum Approximations 68 1.7.7 Forced Oscillations 69 1.8 Averaging and Homogenization 71 1.8.1 Averaging via Multiscale Method 71 1.8.2 Frozing in Viscoelastic Problems 74 1.8.3 The WKB Method 75 1.8.4 Method of Kuzmak-Whitham (Nonlinear WKB Method) 77 1.8.5 Differential Equations with Quickly Changing Coefficients 79 1.8.6 Differential Equation with Periodically Discontinuous Coefficients 84 1.8.7 Periodically Perforated Domain 88 1.8.8 Waves in Periodically Nonhomogenous Media 92 References 95 2 Computational Methods for Plates and Beams with Mixed Boundary Conditions 105 2.1 Introduction 105 2.1.1 Computational Methods of Plates with Mixed Boundary Conditions 105 2.1.2 Method of Boundary Conditions Perturbation 107 2.2 Natural Vibrations of Beams and Plates 109 2.2.1 Natural Vibrations of a Clamped Beam 109 2.2.2 Natural Vibration of a Beam with Free Ends 114 2.2.3 Natural Vibrations of a Clamped Rectangular Plate 118 2.2.4 Natural Vibrations of the Orthotropic Plate with Free Edges Lying on an Elastic Foundation 123 2.2.5 Natural Vibrations of the Plate with Mixed Boundary Conditions "Clamping-Simple Support" 128 2.2.6 Comparison of Theoretical and Experimental Results 133 2.2.7 Natural Vibrations of a Partially Clamped Plate 135 2.2.8 Natural Vibrations of a Plate with Mixed Boundary Conditions "Simple Support-Moving Clamping" 140 2.3 Nonlinear Vibrations of Rods, Beams and Plates 144 2.3.1 Vibrations of the Rod Embedded in a Nonlinear Elastic Medium 144 2.3.2 Vibrations of the Beam Lying on a Nonlinear Elastic Foundation 153 2.3.3 Vibrations of the Membrane on a Nonlinear Elastic Foundation 155 2.3.4 Vibrations of the Plate on a Nonlinear Elastic Foundation 158 2.4 SSS of Beams and Plates 160 2.4.1 SSS of Beams with Clamped Ends 160 2.4.2 SSS of the Beam with Free Edges 163 2.4.3 SSS of Clamped Plate 166 2.4.4 SSS of a Plate with Free Edges 170 2.4.5 SSS of the Plate with Mixed Boundary Conditions "Clamping–Simple Support" 172 2.4.6 SSS of a Plate with Mixed Boundary Conditions "Free Edge–Moving Clamping" 180 2.5 Forced Vibrations of Beams and Plates 184 2.5.1 Forced Vibrations of a Clamped Beam 184 2.5.2 Forced Vibrations of Beam with Free Edges 189 2.5.3 Forced Vibrations of a Clamped Plate 190 2.5.4 Forced Vibrations of Plates with Free Edges 194 2.5.5 Forced Vibrations of Plate with Mixed Boundary Conditions "Clamping-Simple Support" 197 2.5.6 Forced Vibrations of Plate with Mixed Boundary Conditions "Free Edge – Moving Clamping" 202 2.6 Stability of Beams and Plates 207 2.6.1 Stability of a Clamped Beam 207 2.6.2 Stability of a Clamped Rectangular Plate 209 2.6.3 Stability of Rectangular Plate with Mixed Boundary Conditions "Clamping-Simple Support" 211 2.6.4 Comparison of Theoretical and Experimental Results 219 2.7 Some Related Problems 221 2.7.1 Dynamics of Nonhomogeneous Structures 221 2.7.2 Method of Ishlinskii-Leibenzon 224 2.7.3 Vibrations of a String Attached to a Spring-Mass-Dashpot System 230 2.7.4 Vibrations of a String with Nonlinear BCs 233 2.7.5 Boundary Conditions and First Order Approximation Theory 238 2.8 Links between the Adomian and Homotopy Perturbation Approaches 240 2.9 Conclusions 263 References 264 Index 269

Read more less

Book SynopsisThis book focuses on the dynamic response of lattice materials, which is greatly inspired by concepts from crystal physics. Methods and analyses covered directly apply to periodic materials in general, including phononic crystals and elastic metamaterials.Table of ContentsList of Contributors xiii Foreword xv Preface xxv 1 Introduction to Lattice Materials 1A. Srikantha Phani andMahmoud I. Hussein 1.1 Introduction 1 1.2 Lattice Materials and Structures 2 1.2.1 Material versus Structure 3 1.2.2 Motivation 3 1.2.3 Classification of Lattices and Maxwell’s Rule 4 1.2.4 ManufacturingMethods 6 1.2.5 Applications 7 1.3 Overview of Chapters 8 Acknowledgment 10 References 10 2 Elastostatics of Lattice Materials 19D. Pasini and S. Arabnejad 2.1 Introduction 19 2.2 The RVE 21 2.3 Surface Average Approach 22 2.4 Volume Average Approach 25 2.5 Force-based Approach 25 2.6 Asymptotic Homogenization Method 26 2.7 Generalized Continuum Theory 29 2.8 Homogenization via BlochWave Analysis and the Cauchy–Born Hypothesis 32 2.9 Multiscale Matrix-based Computational Technique 34 2.10 Homogenization based on the Equation of Motion 36 2.11 Case Study: Property Predictions for a Hexagonal Lattice 38 2.12 Conclusions 42 References 43 3 Elastodynamics of Lattice Materials 53A. Srikantha Phani 3.1 Introduction 53 3.2 One-dimensional Lattices 55 3.2.1 Bloch’s Theorem 57 3.2.2 Application of Bloch’s Theorem 59 3.2.3 Dispersion Curves and Unit-cell Resonances 59 3.2.4 Continuous Lattices: Local Resonance and sub-Bragg Band Gaps 61 3.2.5 Dispersion Curves of a Beam Lattice 62 3.2.6 Receptance Method 64 3.2.7 Synopsis of 1D Lattices 67 3.3 Two-dimensional Lattice Materials 67 3.3.1 Application of Bloch’s Theorem to 2D Lattices 67 3.3.2 Discrete Square Lattice 70 3.4 Lattice Materials 72 3.4.1 Finite Element Modelling of the Unit Cell 75 3.4.2 Band Structure of Lattice Topologies 77 3.4.3 Directionality ofWave Propagation 84 3.5 Tunneling and EvanescentWaves 85 3.6 Concluding Remarks 87 3.7 Acknowledgments 87 References 87 4 Wave Propagation in Damped Lattice Materials 93Dimitri Krattiger, A. Srikantha Phani andMahmoud I. Hussein 4.1 Introduction 93 4.2 One-dimensionalMass–Spring–DamperModel 95 4.2.1 1D Model Description 95 4.2.2 Free-wave Solution 96 State-spaceWave Calculation 97 Bloch–Rayleigh Perturbation Method 97 4.2.3 Driven-wave Solution 98 4.2.4 1D Damped Band Structures 98 4.3 Two-dimensional Plate–Plate Lattice Model 99 4.3.1 2D Model Description 99 4.3.2 Extension of Driven-wave Calculations to 2D Domains 100 4.3.3 2D Damped Band Structures 101 References 104 5 Wave Propagation in Nonlinear Lattice Materials 107Kevin L.Manktelow,Massimo Ruzzene andMichael J. Leamy 5.1 Overview 107 5.2 Weakly Nonlinear Dispersion Analysis 108 5.3 Application to a 1D Monoatomic Chain 114 5.3.1 Overview 114 5.3.2 Model Description and Nonlinear Governing Equation 114 5.3.3 Single-wave Dispersion Analysis 115 5.3.4 Multi-wave Dispersion Analysis 116 Case 1. GeneralWave–Wave Interactions 117 Case 2. Long-wavelength LimitWave–Wave Interactions 119 5.3.5 Numerical Verification and Discussion 122 5.4 Application to a 2D Monoatomic Lattice 123 5.4.1 Overview 123 5.4.2 Model Description and Nonlinear Governing Equation 124 5.4.3 Multiple-scale Perturbation Analysis 125 5.4.4 Analysis of Predicted Dispersion Shifts 127 5.4.5 Numerical Simulation Validation Cases 129 Analysis Method 130 Orthogonal and Oblique Interaction 131 5.4.6 Application: Amplitude-tunable Focusing 133 Summary 134 Acknowledgements 135 References 135 6 Stability of Lattice Materials 139Filippo Casadei, PaiWang and Katia Bertoldi 6.1 Introduction 139 6.2 Geometry, Material, and Loading Conditions 140 6.3 Stability of Finite-sized Specimens 141 6.4 Stability of Infinite Periodic Specimens 142 6.4.1 Microscopic Instability 142 6.5 Post-buckling Analysis 145 6.6 Effect of Buckling and Large Deformation on the Propagation Of Elastic Waves 146 6.7 Conclusions 150 References 151 7 Impact and Blast Response of Lattice Materials 155Matthew Smith,Wesley J. Cantwell and Zhongwei Guan 7.1 Introduction 155 7.2 Literature Review 155 7.2.1 Dynamic Response of Cellular Structures 155 7.2.2 Shock- and Blast-loading Responses of Cellular Structures 157 7.2.3 Dynamic Indentation Performance of Cellular Structures 158 7.3 Manufacturing Process 159 7.3.1 The Selective Laser Melting Technique 159 7.3.2 Sandwich Panel Manufacture 160 7.4 Dynamic and Blast Loading of Lattice Materials 161 7.4.1 ExperimentalMethod – Drop-hammer Impact Tests 161 7.4.2 ExperimentalMethod – Blast Tests on Lattice Cubes 162 7.4.3 ExperimentalMethod – Blast Tests on Composite-lattice Sandwich Structures 163 7.5 Results and Discussion 165 7.5.1 Drop-hammer Impact Tests 165 7.5.2 Blast Tests on the Lattice Structures 167 7.5.3 Blast Tests on the Sandwich Panels 170 Concluding Remarks 173 Acknowledgements 174 References 174 8 Pentamode Lattice Structures 179Andrew N. Norris 8.1 Introduction 179 8.2 Pentamode Materials 183 8.2.1 General Properties 183 8.2.2 Small Rigidity and Poisson’s Ratio of a PM 185 8.2.3 Wave Motion in a PM 186 8.3 Lattice Models for PM 187 8.3.1 Effective PM Properties of 2D and 3D Lattices 187 8.3.2 Transversely Isotropic PM Lattice 188 Effective Moduli: 2D 190 8.4 Quasi-static Pentamode Properties of a Lattice in 2D and 3D 192 8.4.1 General Formulation with Rigidity 192 8.4.2 Pentamode Limit 194 8.4.3 Two-dimensional Results for Finite Rigidity 195 8.5 Conclusion 195 Acknowledgements 196 References 196 9 Modal Reduction of Lattice Material Models 199Dimitri Krattiger and Mahmoud I. Hussein 9.1 Introduction 199 9.2 Plate Model 200 9.2.1 Mindlin–Reissner Plate Finite Elements 200 9.2.2 Bloch Boundary Conditions 202 9.2.3 Example Model 203 9.3 Reduced Bloch Mode Expansion 204 9.3.1 RBME Formulation 204 9.3.2 RBME Example 205 9.3.3 RBME Additional Considerations 207 9.4 Bloch Mode Synthesis 208 9.4.1 BMS Formulation 208 9.4.2 BMS Example 210 9.4.3 BMS Additional Considerations 210 9.5 Comparison of RBME and BMS 212 9.5.1 Model Size 212 9.5.2 Computational Efficiency 213 9.5.3 Ease of Implementation 214 References 214 10 Topology Optimization of Lattice Materials 217Osama R. Bilal and Mahmoud I. Hussein 10.1 Introduction 217 10.2 Unit-cell Optimization 218 10.2.1 Parametric, Shape, and Topology Optimization 218 10.2.2 Selection of Studies from the Literature 218 10.2.3 Design Search Space 219 10.3 Plate-based Lattice Material Unit Cell 220 10.3.1 Equation of Motion and FE Model 221 10.3.2 Mathematical Formulation 222 10.4 Genetic Algorithm 223 10.4.1 Objective Function 223 10.4.2 Fitness Function 224 10.4.3 Selection 224 10.4.4 Reproduction 224 10.4.5 Initialization and Termination 225 10.4.6 Implementation 225 10.5 Appendix 226 References 228 11 Dynamics of Locally Resonant and Inertially Amplified Lattice Materials 233Cetin Yilmaz and Gregory M. Hulbert 11.1 Introduction 233 11.2 Locally Resonant Lattice Materials 234 11.2.1 1D Locally Resonant Lattices 234 11.2.2 2D Locally Resonant Lattices 241 11.2.3 3D Locally Resonant Lattices 243 11.3 Inertially Amplified Lattice Materials 246 11.3.1 1D Inertially Amplified Lattices 246 11.3.2 2D Inertially Amplified Lattices 248 11.3.3 3D Inertially Amplified Lattices 253 11.4 Conclusions 255 References 256 12 Dynamics of Nanolattices: Polymer-Nanometal Lattices 259Craig A. Steeves, Glenn D. Hibbard,Manan Arya, and Ante T. Lausic 12.1 Introduction 259 12.2 Fabrication 259 12.2.1 Case Study 262 12.3 Lattice Dynamics 263 12.3.1 Lattice Properties 264 Geometries of 3D Lattices 264 Effective Material Properties of Nanometal-coated Polymer Lattices 265 12.3.2 Finite-elementModel 266 Displacement Field 266 Kinetic Energy 268 Strain Potential Energy 269 Collected Equation of Motion 270 12.3.3 Floquet–Bloch Principles 271 Generalized Forces in Bloch Analysis 272 Reduced Equation of Motion 274 12.3.4 Dispersion Curves for the Octet Lattice 275 12.3.5 Lattice Tuning 277 Bandgap Placement 277 Lattice Optimization 277 12.4 Conclusions 278 12.5 Appendix: Shape Functions for a Timoshenko Beam with Six Nodal Degrees of Freedom 279 References 280 Index 283

Read more less

Book SynopsisAlgebraic Identification and Estimation Methods in Feedback Control Systems presents a model-based algebraic approach to online parameter and state estimation in uncertain dynamic feedback control systems. This approach evades the mathematical intricacies of the traditional stochastic approach, proposing a direct model-based scheme with several easy-to-implement computational advantages. The approach can be used with continuous and discrete, linear and nonlinear, mono-variable and multi-variable systems. The estimators based on this approach are not of asymptotic nature, and do not require any statistical knowledge of the corrupting noises to achieve good performance in a noisy environment. These estimators are fast, robust to structured perturbations, and easy to combine with classical or sophisticated control laws. This book uses module theory, differential algebra, and operational calculus in an easy-to-understand manner and also details how to apply these in the coTable of ContentsSeries Preface xiii Preface xv 1 Introduction 1 1.1 Feedback Control of Dynamic Systems 2 1.1.1 Feedback 2 1.1.2 Why Do We Need Feedback? 3 1.2 The Parameter Identification Problem 3 1.2.1 Identifying a System 4 1.3 A Brief Survey on Parameter Identification 4 1.4 The State Estimation Problem 5 1.4.1 Observers 6 1.4.2 Reconstructing the State via Time Derivative Estimation 7 1.5 Algebraic Methods in Control Theory: Differences from Existing Methodologies 8 1.6 Outline of the Book 9 References 12 2 Algebraic Parameter Identification in Linear Systems 15 2.1 Introduction 15 2.1.1 The Parameter-Estimation Problem in Linear Systems 16 2.2 Introductory Examples 17 2.2.1 Dragging an Unknown Mass in Open Loop 17 2.2.2 A Perturbed First-Order System 24 2.2.3 The Visual Servoing Problem 30 2.2.4 Balancing of the Plane Rotor 35 2.2.5 On the Control of the Linear Motor 38 2.2.6 Double-Bridge Buck Converter 42 2.2.7 Closed-Loop Behavior 43 2.2.8 Control of an unknown variable gain motor 47 2.2.9 Identifying Classical Controller Parameters 50 2.3 A Case Study Introducing a “Sentinel” Criterion 53 2.3.1 A Suspension System Model 54 2.4 Remarks 67 References 68 3 Algebraic Parameter Identification in Nonlinear Systems 71 3.1 Introduction 71 3.2 Algebraic Parameter Identification for Nonlinear Systems 72 3.2.1 Controlling an Uncertain Pendulum 74 3.2.2 A Block-Driving Problem 80 3.2.3 The Fully Actuated Rigid Body 84 3.2.4 Parameter Identification Under Sliding Motions 90 3.2.5 Control of an Uncertain Inverted Pendulum Driven by a DC Motor 92 3.2.6 Identification and Control of a Convey Crane 96 3.2.7 Identification of a Magnetic Levitation System 103 3.3 An Alternative Construction of the System of Linear Equations 105 3.3.1 Genesio–Tesi Chaotic System 107 3.3.2 The Ueda Oscillator 108 3.3.3 Identification and Control of an Uncertain Brushless DC Motor 112 3.3.4 Parameter Identification and Self-tuned Control for the Inertia Wheel Pendulum 119 3.3.5 Algebraic Parameter Identification for Induction Motors 128 3.3.6 A Criterion to Determine the Estimator Convergence: The Error Index 136 3.4 Remarks 141 References 141 4 Algebraic Parameter Identification in Discrete-Time Systems 145 4.1 Introduction 145 4.2 Algebraic Parameter Identification in Discrete-Time Systems 145 4.2.1 Main Purpose of the Chapter 146 4.2.2 Problem Formulation and Assumptions 147 4.2.3 An Introductory Example 148 4.2.4 Samuelson’s Model of the National Economy 150 4.2.5 Heating of a Slab from Two Boundary Points 155 4.2.6 An Exact Backward Shift Reconstructor 157 4.3 A Nonlinear Filtering Scheme 160 4.3.1 Hénon System 161 4.3.2 A Hard Disk Drive 164 4.3.3 The Visual Servo Tracking Problem 166 4.3.4 A Shape Control Problem in a Rolling Mill 170 4.3.5 Algebraic Frequency Identification of a Sinusoidal Signal by Means of Exact Discretization 175 4.4 Algebraic Identification in Fast-Sampled Linear Systems 178 4.4.1 The Delta-Operator Approach: A Theoretical Framework 179 4.4.2 Delta-Transform Properties 181 4.4.3 A DC Motor Example 181 4.5 Remarks 188 References 188 5 State and Parameter Estimation in Linear Systems 191 5.1 Introduction 191 5.1.1 Signal Time Derivation Through the “Algebraic Derivative Method” 192 5.1.2 Observability of Nonlinear Systems 192 5.2 Fast State Estimation 193 5.2.1 An Elementary Second-Order Example 193 5.2.2 An Elementary Third-Order Example 194 5.2.3 A Control System Example 198 5.2.4 Control of a Perturbed Third-Order System 201 5.2.5 A Sinusoid Estimation Problem 203 5.2.6 Identification of Gravitational Wave Parameters 205 5.2.7 A Power Electronics Example 210 5.2.8 A Hydraulic Press 213 5.2.9 Identification and Control of a Plotter 218 5.3 Recovering Chaotically Encrypted Signals 222 5.3.1 State Estimation for a Lorenz System 227 5.3.2 State Estimation for Chen’s System 229 5.3.3 State Estimation for Chua’s Circuit 231 5.3.4 State Estimation for Rossler’s System 232 5.3.5 State Estimation for the Hysteretic Circuit 234 5.3.6 Simultaneous Chaotic Encoding–Decoding with Singularity Avoidance 239 5.3.7 Discussion 240 5.4 Remarks 241 References 242 6 Control of Nonlinear Systems via Output Feedback 245 6.1 Introduction 245 6.2 Time-Derivative Calculations 246 6.2.1 An Introductory Example 247 6.2.2 Identifying a Switching Input 253 6.3 The Nonlinear Systems Case 255 6.3.1 Control of a Synchronous Generator 256 6.3.2 Control of a Multi-variable Nonlinear System 261 6.3.3 Experimental Results on a Mechanical System 267 6.4 Remarks 278 References 279 7 Miscellaneous Applications 281 7.1 Introduction 281 7.1.1 The Separately Excited DC Motor 282 7.1.2 Justification of the ETEDPOF Controller 285 7.1.3 A Sensorless Scheme Based on Fast Adaptive Observation 287 7.1.4 Control of the Boost Converter 292 7.2 Alternative Elimination of Initial Conditions 298 7.2.1 A Bounded Exponential Function 299 7.2.2 Correspondence in the Frequency Domain 300 7.2.3 A System of Second Order 301 7.3 Other Functions of Time for Parameter Estimation 304 7.3.1 A Mechanical System Example 304 7.3.2 A Derivative Approach to Demodulation 310 7.3.3 Time Derivatives via Parameter Identification 312 7.3.4 Example 314 7.4 An Algebraic Denoising Scheme 318 7.4.1 Example 321 7.4.2 Numerical Results 322 7.5 Remarks 325 References 326 Appendix A Parameter Identification in Linear Continuous Systems: A Module Approach 329 A.1 Generalities on Linear Systems Identification 329 A.1.1 Example 330 A.1.2 Some Definitions and Results 330 A.1.3 Linear Identifiability 331 A.1.4 Structured Perturbations 333 A.1.5 The Frequency Domain Alternative 337 References 338 Appendix B Parameter Identification in Linear Discrete Systems: A Module Approach 339 B.1 A Short Review of Module Theory over Principal Ideal Rings 339 B.1.1 Systems 340 B.1.2 Perturbations 340 B.1.3 Dynamics and Input–Output Systems 341 B.1.4 Transfer Matrices 341 B.1.5 Identifiability 342 B.1.6 An Algebraic Setting for Identifiability 342 B.1.7 Linear identifiability of transfer functions 344 B.1.8 Linear Identification of Perturbed Systems 345 B.1.9 Persistent Trajectories 347 References 348 Appendix C Simultaneous State and Parameter Estimation: An Algebraic Approach 349 C.1 Rings, Fields and Extensions 349 C.2 Nonlinear Systems 350 C.2.1 Differential Flatness 351 C.2.2 Observability and Identifiability 352 C.2.3 Observability 352 C.2.4 Identifiable Parameters 352 C.2.5 Determinable Variables 352 C.3 Numerical Differentiation 353 C.3.1 Polynomial Time Signals 353 C.3.2 Analytic Time Signals 353 C.3.3 Noisy Signals 354 References 354 Appendix D Generalized Proportional Integral Control 357 D.1 Generalities on GPI Control 357 D.2 Generalization to MIMO Linear Systems 365 References 368 Index 369

Read more less

Book SynopsisPresents a diverse perspective of successful, inspirational and progressive women in science and engineering Women of today from 29 countries provide overviews of their successful careers, the challenges they faced, and offer advice. They have lived in the same era, and perhaps also the same environment as you. Successful Women Ceramic and Glass Scientists and Engineers: 100 Inspirational Profiles features women born in the 1920's to 1970's. Reflecting a diversity of backgrounds and different sectors of the workforce, their profiles include: ?- Affiliation, points of contact, accomplishments (most-cited publication, most prestigious recognitions/awards, etc.), personal insight on her best career moment ? Brief biography, highlights of her successes, images from her career ? Personal commentary on her own career and pointers for younger scientists building careers This book provides novelty, inspiration, motivationTrade Review"Madsen has created a tome such that no one can deny that woman are now major contributors to the Physical Sciences" Karen Swinder Lyons on behalf of the MRS Bulletin, Sept 2017Table of ContentsForeword Dean Cristina Amon Preface About the Author Quick Guide to Select Groups Government and Non-Profit Organizations Industry/Business Australia, Russia and Asia Europe The Americas (excluding the United States of America (USA)) Women of Colour in the United States of America Women in Academe in the United States of America Introduction Why this book? For Whom? The Writing Journey Words of Praise for the Book The Women Afterword by Dr. Shirley Malcom Acknowledgments ConclusionAfterwordShirley M. Malcom

Read more less

Book SynopsisContains contributed 38 papers from the following seven symposia held during the 2012 Materials Science and Technology (MS&T'12) meeting: Innovative Processing and Synthesis of Ceramics, Glasses and Composites Advances in Ceramic Matrix Composites Solution Based Processing for Ceramic Materials Novel Sintering Processes and News in the Conventional Sintering and Grain Growth Nanotechnology for Energy, Healthcare and Industry Dielectric Ceramic Materials and Electronic Devices Controlled Synthesis, Processing, and Applications of Structure and Functional Nanomaterials Table of ContentsPreface ix CERAMIC MATRIX COMPOSITES Development of Continuous SiC Fiber Reinforced HfB2-SiC Composites for Aerospace Applications 3Clifford J. Leslie, Emmanuel E. Boakye, Kristin A. Keller, and Michael K. Cinibulk Effect of Primary Grain Size of SrZr03/Zr02 Nano-Dispersed Composite Abrasive on Glass Polishing Properties 13Takayuki Honma, Koichi Kawahara, Seiichi Suda, and Masasuke Takata Thermal Effect Studies on Flexural Strength of SiCf/C/SiC Composites for Typical Aero Engine Application 21Vijay Petley, Shweta Verma, Shankar, S.N. Ashritha, S. N. Narendra Babu, and S. Ramachandra Effect of Phase Architecture on the Thermal Expansion Behavior of Interpenetrating Metal/Ceramic Composites 33Siddhartha Roy, Pascal Albrecht, Lars Przybilla, Kay Andre Weidenmann, Martin Heilmaier, and Alexander Wanner High Temperature Interactions in Platinum/Alumina System 45Ali Karbasi, Ali Hadjikhani, Rostislav Hrubiak, Andriy Durygin, and Kinzy Jones Fracture Mechanics of Recycled PET-Based Composite Materials Reinforced with Zinc Particles 55Jessica J. Osorio-Ramos, Elizabeth Refugio- Garcia, Victor Cortes-Suarez, and Enrique Rocha-Rangel INNOVATIVE PROCESSING Fabrication of GaSb Optical Fibers 65Brian L. Scott and Gary R. Pickrell Characterization and Synthesis of Samarium-Doped Ceria Solid Solutions 71Aliye Arabaci Influence of Precursors Stoichiometry on SHS Synthesis of Ti3AIC2 Powders 79L. Chlubny and J. Lis Chemical Vapor Deposition and Characterization of Thick Silicon Carbide Tubes for Nuclear Applications 87P. Drieux, G. Chollon, A. Allemand, and S. Jacques Uniform Microwave Plasma Pyrolysis for the Production of Metastable Nanomaterials 99Kamal Hadidi, Makhlouf Redjdal, Eric H. Jordan, Olivia A. Graeve, and Colby M. Brunet Characterization of the Conductive Layer Formed During u-Electric Discharge Machining of Non-Conductive Ceramics 105Nirdesh Ojha, Tim Hosel, Claas Muller, and Holger Reinecke Forming Mullite-Ceramics Reinforced with ZrO2-t Starting from Mullite-ZrO2-t and Kyanite-AI2O3-ZrO2-t Mixtures 111Elizabeth Refugio-Garcia, Jessica Osorio-Ramos, Jose G. Miranda-Hernandez, Jose A. Rodriguez-Garcia, and Enrique Rocha-Rangel Impact of Nanoparticle-Microstructure on Cosmeceuticals UV Protection, Transparency and Good Texture 119Yasumasa Takao Piezoelectric Thick-Film Structures for High-Frequency Applications Prepared by Electrophoretic Deposition 131Danjela Kuscer, Andre-Pierre Abelard, Marija Kosec, and Franck Levassort Low Temperature Growth of Oxide Thin Films by Photo-Induced Chemical Solution Deposition 143Tetsuo Tsuchiya, Tomohiko Nakajima, and Kentaro Shinoda The Effect of Active Species during TiN Thin Film Deposition by the Cathodic Cage Plasma Process 149Natalia de Freitas Daudt, Julio Cesar Pereira Barbosa, Danilo Cavalcante Braz, Marina de Oliveira Cardoso Macedo, Marcelo Barbalho Pereira, and Clodomiro Alves Junior Cathode Ray Tube Glasses in Glass Ceramics 159M. Reben and J. Wasylak Application of Alum from Kankara Kaolinite in Catalysis: A Preliminary Report 167L.C. Edomwonyi-Otu, B.O. Aderemi, A.S. Ahmed, N.J. Coville, and M. Maaza Grain Boundary Resistivity in Yttria-Stabilized Zirconia 175Jun Wang and Hans Conrad Multiscale Thermal Processes in High Voltage Consolidation of Powders 189Evgeny G. Grigoryev and Eugene A. Olevsky NANOTECHNOLOGY Nanotechnology Development in Arab States 199Bassam Alfeeli and Ma'moun Al-Rawashdeh Viscosity of Ethylene Glycol + Water Based Al203 Nanofluids with Addition of SDBS Dispersant 211Babak LotfizadehDehkordi, Salim. N. Kazi, and Mohd Hamdi Clustering Theory Evaluation for Thermal Conductivity Enhancement of Titania Nanofluid 219Azadeh Ghadimi and Hendrik Simon Cornells Metselaar An Environmentally-Benign Electrochemical Method for Formation of a Chitosan-Based Coating on Stainless Steel as a Substrate for Deposition of Noble Metal Nanoparticles 229Gary P. Halada, Prashant Jha, Michael Cuiffo, James Ging, and Kweku Acquah Synthesis and Characterization of Nanocrystalline Nickel/Zinc Oxide Particles by Ultrasonic Spray Pyrolysis 239llayda Koc, Burcak Ebin, and Sebahattin Gurmen Iron-Nickel-Cobalt (Fe-Ni-Co) Alloy Particles Prepared by Ultrasonic Spray Pyrolysis and Hydrogen Reduction (USP-HR) Method 247Cigdem Toparli, Burcak Ebin, and Sebahattin Gurmen ELECTRONIC AND FUNCTIONAL CERAMICS Synthesis and Characterization of Polyvinilidene Fluoride (PVDF) Cerium Doped 257Evaristo Alexandre Falcao, Lais Weber Aguiar, Eriton Rodrigo Botero, Anderson Rodrigues Lima Caires, Nelson Luis Domingues, Claudio Teodoro de Carvalho, and Andrelson Wellinghton Rinaldi Effect of Poling Field on Elastic Constants in Piezoelectric Ceramics 267Toshio Ogawa, Keisuke Ishii, Tsubasa Matsumoto, and Takayuki Nishina Energy Harvesting Utilized Resonance Phenomena of Piezoelectric Unimorph 277Toshio Ogawa, Hiroshi Aoshima, Masahito Hikida, and Hiroshi Akaishi Internal Strain and Dielectric Losses by Compositional Ordering on the Microwave Dielectrics Pseudo-Tungstenbronze Ba6.3xR8+2XTi18054 (R=Rare Earth) Solid Solutions 283Hitoshi Ohsato Characteristics of BaTi03/(Ba,Sr)Ti03 Superlattices Synthesized by Pulsed Laser Deposition 293N. Ortega, Ashok Kumar, J. F. Scott, and Ram S. Katiyar Novel Devices using Oxide Semiconductors in Fe-Ti-0 Family 301R. K. Pandey, William A. Stapleton, Anup K. Bandyopadhyay, Ivan Sutanto, and Amanda A. Scantlin Fabrication and Improvement of the Properties of Mn-Doped Bismuth Ferrite-Barium Titanate Thin Films 313Yuya Ito, Makoto Moriya, Wataru Sakamoto, and Toshinobu Yogo Correlating the Crystal Structure and the Phase Transitions with the Dielectric Properties of KyBa1-xGa2-xGe2+xO8 Solid Solutions 321Marjeta Macek Krzmanc, Qin Ni, and Danilo Suvorov The Effect of A-Site Vacancies on Cell Volume and Tolerance Factor of Perovskites 331Rick Ubic, Kevin Tolman, Kokfoong Chan, Nicole Lundy, Steven Letourneau, and Waltraud Kriven Sintering Effects on Microstructure and Electrical Properties of CaCu3Ti4012 Ceramics 337S. Markovic, M. Lukic, C. Jovalekic, S.D. Skapin, D. Suvorov, and D. Uskokovic Crystal Chemistry and Phase Diagrams of Three Thermoelectric Alkaline-Earth Cobaltate (Ca-M-Co-O, M=Sr, Zn and La) Systems 349W. Wong-Ng Author Index 363

Read more less

Book SynopsisThis volume contains14 contributed papers from the following 2012 Materials Science and Technology (MS&T'12) symposia: Next Generation Biomaterials Surface Properties of Biomaterials Table of ContentsPreface vii Characterization of Calcium Phosphate Reinforced Ti-6AI-4V Composites for Load-Bearing Implants 1Jeffrey Wu, Stan Dittrick, Pavlo Rudenko, Susmita Bose, and Amit Bandyopadhyay Characterization of Next-Generation Nickel-Titanium Rotary Endodontic Instruments 11William A. Brantley, Jie Liu, Scott R. Schricker, Fengyuan Zheng, John M. Nusstein, Masahiro lijima, William A.T. Clark, and Satish B. Alapati Effect of Cold Work and Aging on a Cobalt-Nickel Based Alloy 19S. Cai, A. T. W. Barrow, R. Yang, and L. E. Kay Surface Coating of Poly-D-L-Lactide/Nano-Hydroxyapatite Composite Scaffolds for Dexamethasone-Releasing Function and Wettability Enhancement 29Ling Chen, Chak Yin Tang, Harry Siu-lung Ku, Da Zhu Chen, and Chi Pong Tsui Mechanical Behavior in Compression and Flexure of Bioactive Glass (13-93) Scaffolds Prepared by Robotic Deposition 37Xin Liu, Mohamed N. Rahaman, and Greg E. Hilmas Phase Stability and Young's Modulus of Ti-Cr-Sn-Zr Alloys 47Yonosuke Murayama, Hiromasa Sakashita, Daichi Abe, Hisamichi Kimura, and Akihiko Chiba Sol-Gel Preparation of Silica-Based Nano-Fibers for Biomedical Applications 55Song Chen, Hiroki Yoshihara, Nobutaka Hanagata, Yuki Shirosaki, Mark Blevins, Yuri Nakamura, Satoshi Hayakawa, Artemis Stamboulis, and Akiyoshi Osaka Bioactive Rosette Nanotube Composites for Cartilage Applications 63Linlin Sun, Usha D. Hemraz, Hicham Fenniri, and Thomas J. Webster Optical Properties of Dental Bioceramics Evaluated by Kubelka-Munk Model 71Humberto Naoyuki Yoshimura, Marcelo Mendes Pinto, Erick de Lima, and Paulo Francisco Cesar Frequency Effect on Electrochemical Characteristics of MAO Coated Magnesium Alloy in Simulated Body Fluid 81Jing Zhang, Jiayang Liu, Yi Zhang, Weijie Zhang, Zaixin Feng, and Chengyun Ning Influence of Tantalum and Tungsten Doping on Polarizability and Bioactivity of Hydroxyapatite Ceramics 93Jharana Dhal, Susmita Bose, and Amit Bandyopadhyay Quantitative Evaluation of the Hydrophilic Properties of Polarized Hydroxyapatite 103Akiko Nagai, Naohiro Horiuchi, Kosuke Nozaki, Miho Nakamura, and Kimihiro Yamashita Mechanisms of Platelet Activation by Biomaterials and Fluid Shear Flow 113Sri R. Madabhushi and Sriram Neelamegham Processing and Bioactivity Evaluation of Ultrafine-Grained Titanium 125A. Thirugnanam, T. S. Sampath Kumar, and Uday Chakkingal Controlling Biological Functionaiization of Surfaces by Engineered Peptides 137Marketa Hnilova, Deniz Tanil Yucesoy, Mehmet Sarikaya, and Candan Tamerler Author Index 151

Read more less

Book SynopsisThese proceedings contains a collection of 24 papers from five 2012 Materials Science and Technology (MS&T 12) symposia.Table of ContentsPreface ix MATERIALS FOR NUCLEAR WASTE DISPOSAL AND ENVIRONMENTAL CLEANUP Boron and Lead Based Chemically Bonded Phosphates Ceramics for Nuclear Waste and Radiation Shielding Applications 3 Henry A. Colorado, Jason Pleitt, Jenn-M. Yang, and Carlos H. Castano Advanced Ceramic Wasteforms for the Immobilisation of Radwastes 11 M.C. Stennett, L.D. Casey, C.L. Corkhill, C.L Freeman, A.S. Gandy, P.G. Heath, I.J. Pinnock, D.P. Reid, and N.C. Hyatt Migration of Iodine Solidified in Ettringite into Compacted Bentonite 23 Kazuya Idemitsu, Yoshihiko Matsuki, Masanao Kishimoto, Yaohiro Inagaki, Tatsumi Arima, Yoshiko Haruguchi, Yu Yamashita, and Michitaka Sasoh Radioactive Demonstrations of Fluidized Bed Steam Reforming (FBSR) with Hanford Low Activity Wastes 35 C. M. Jantzen, C. L Crawford, P. R. Burket, C. J. Bannochie, W. G. Daniel, C. A. Nash, A. D. Cozzi, and C. C. Herman Advances in JHCM HLW Vitrification Technology at VSL through Scaled Melter Testing 47 Keith S. Matlack and Ian L. Pegg Impact of Particle Agglomeration on Accumulation Rates in the Glass Discharge Riser of HLW Melter 59 J. Matyäs, D. P. Jansik, A. T. Owen, CA. Rodriguez, J. B. Lang, and A. A. Kruger Systematic Development of Alkaline-Earth Borosilicate Glasses for Caesium Loaded Ion Exchange Resin Vitrification 69 O. J. McGann, P. A. Bingham, and N. C. Hyatt Effect of Temperature on the Crevice Corrosion Susceptibility of Passivating Nickel Based Alloys 81 Edgar C. Hornus, C. Mabel Giordano, Martin A. Rodriguez, Ricardo M. Carranza, and Raul B. Rebak Determining the Thermal Conductivity of a Melter Feed 91 Jarrett Rice, Richard Pokorny, Michael Schweiger, and Pavel Hrma Electrochemical Properties of Lanthanum Chloride-Containing Molten LiCI-KCI for Nuclear Waste Separation Studies 103 S. O. Martin, J. C. Sager, K. Sridharan, M. Mohammadian, and T. R. Allen Radionuclide Behaviour and Geochemistry in Boom Clay within the Framework of Geological Disposal of High-Level Waste 113 S. Salah, C. Bruggeman, N. Maes, D., Liu P., L. Wang, and P. Van Iseghem GREEN TECHNOLOGIES FOR MATERIALS MANUFACTURING AND PROCESSING Reclaiming Fibrous Material in Manufacturing Processes 129 Kevin D. Baker Directional Drivers of Sustainable Manufacturing: The Impact of Sustainable Building Codes and Standards on the Manufacturers of Materials 135 Amy A. Costello and Marsha S. Bischel Developing Thermal Processes with Energy Efficiency in Mind 147 Brian Fuller, Bruce Dover, and Tom Mroz Joining of Silicon Nitride Ceramics by Local Heating Technique—Strength and Microstructure 155 Mikinori Hotta, Naoki Kondo, Hideki Kita, and Tatsuki Ohji Development of Thermal Spraying and Patterning Techniques by using Thixotropic Slurries Including Metals and Ceramics Particles 163 Soshu Kirihara, Yusuke Itakura, Satoko Tasaki, and Yusuke Itakura Novel Joining Method for Alumina by Surface Modification and Reduction Reaction 169 Ken'ichiro Kita and Naoki Kondo Ionic Liquids used as Cleaning Solvent Replacements 181 Melissa Klingenberg, Janelle Yerty, Elizabeth Berman, and Natasha Voevodin Evaluation of PYCAL 94 as an Environmentally Friendly Plasticizer for Polyvinyl Butyral for use in Tape Casting 191 Richard E. Mistier, Ernest Bianchi, and William McNamee MATERIALS AND SYSTEMS FOR ENERGY APPLICATIONS Conduction Plane Geometry Factors for the ß''-Alumina Structure 201 Emma Kennedy and Dunbar P. Birnie, III Phase Change Materials and Their Impact on the Thermal Performance of Buildings 209 Marsha S. Bischel and William H. Frantz Hydrogen-Exposed Welded Specimens in Bending and Rotational Bending Fatigue 221 Patrick Ferro, Reza Miresmaeili, Rana Mitra, Jason Ross, Will Tiedemann, Casey Hebert, Taylor Goade, Duncan Howard, and Keith Davidson 3-D Tin-Carbon Fiber Paper Electrodes for Electrochemically Converting C02 to Formate/Formic Acid 231 Shan Guan, Arun Agarwal, Edward Rode, Davion Hill, and Narasi Sridhar Analysis of the Theory of Frequent Charge Collapses in a 25500KVA Hermetic Calcium Carbide Furnace 245 Hui Sun, Jian-Iiang Zhang, Zheng-jian Liu, Ye-xiao Chen, Ke-xin Jiao, Feng-guang Li Corrosion Behavior of AISI 304L Stainless Steel for Applications in Nuclear Waste Reprocessing Equipment 257 Negin Jahangiri, A. G. Raraz, J. E. Indacochea, and S. McDeavitt Author Index 267

Read more less

Book SynopsisA timely comprehensive reference consolidates the research and development of electric vehicle machines and drives for electric and hybrid propulsions Focuses on electric vehicle machines and drives Covers the major technologies in the area including fundamental concepts and applications Emphasis the design criteria, performance analyses and application examples or potentials of various motor drives and machine systems Accompanying website includes the simulation models and outcomes as supplementary materialTable of ContentsPreface xiii Organization of This Book xv Acknowledgments xvii About the Author xix 1 Introduction 1 1.1 What Is an Electric Vehicle? 1 1.2 Overview of EV Challenges 3 1.2.1 Pure Electric Vehicle 4 1.2.2 Hybrid Electric Vehicle 4 1.2.3 Gridable Hybrid Electric Vehicle 5 1.2.4 Fuel-Cell Electric Vehicle 5 1.3 Overview of EV Technologies 6 1.3.1 Motor Drive Technology 6 1.3.2 Energy Source Technology 9 1.3.3 Battery Charging Technology 11 1.3.4 Vehicle-to-Grid Technology 14 References 16 2 dc Motor Drives 19 2.1 System Configurations 19 2.2 dc Machines 20 2.2.1 Structure of DC Machines 20 2.2.2 Principle of DC Machines 22 2.2.3 Modeling of DC Machines 22 2.3 DC–DC Converters 24 2.3.1 DC–DC Converter Topologies 24 2.3.2 Soft-Switching DC–DC Converter Topologies 27 2.4 dc Motor Control 28 2.4.1 Speed Control 29 2.4.2 Regenerative Braking 31 2.5 Design Criteria of DC Motor Drives for EVs 33 2.6 Design Example for EVs 34 2.7 Application Examples of DC Motor Drives in EVs 35 2.8 Fading Technology for EVs? 38 References 38 3 Induction Motor Drives 39 3.1 System Configurations 39 3.2 Induction Machines 40 3.2.1 Structure of Induction Machines 41 3.2.2 Principle of Induction Machines 42 3.2.3 Modeling of Induction Machines 44 3.3 Inverters for Induction Motors 46 3.3.1 PWM Switching Inverters 47 3.3.2 Soft-Switching Inverters 50 3.4 Induction Motor Control 51 3.4.1 Variable-Voltage Variable-Frequency Control 51 3.4.2 Field-Oriented Control 53 3.4.3 Direct Torque Control 57 3.5 Design Criteria of Induction Motor Drives for EVs 61 3.6 Design Example of Induction Motor Drives for EVs 64 3.7 Application Examples of Induction Motor Drives in EVs 67 3.8 Matured Technology for EVs? 67 References 68 4 Permanent Magnet Brushless Motor Drives 69 4.1 PM Materials 69 4.2 System Configurations 70 4.3 PM Brushless Machines 72 4.3.1 Structure of PM Brushless Machines 72 4.3.2 Principle of PM Brushless Machines 75 4.3.3 Modeling of PM Brushless Machines 78 4.4 Inverters for PM Brushless Motors 82 4.4.1 Inverter Requirements 82 4.4.2 Switching Schemes for Brushless AC Operation 83 4.4.3 Switching Schemes for Brushless DC Operation 84 4.5 PM Brushless Motor Control 87 4.5.1 PM Synchronous Motor Control 87 4.5.2 PM Brushless DC Motor Control 91 4.6 Design Criteria of PM Brushless Motor Drives for EVs 93 4.7 Design Examples of PM Brushless Motor Drives for EVs 96 4.7.1 Planetary-Geared PM Synchronous Motor Drive 96 4.7.2 Outer-Rotor PM Brushless DC Motor Drive 100 4.8 Application Examples of PM Brushless Motor Drives in EVs 103 4.9 Preferred Technology for EVs? 104 References 106 5 Switched Reluctance Motor Drives 108 5.1 System Configurations 108 5.2 SR Machines 110 5.2.1 Structure of SR Machines 110 5.2.2 Principle of SR Machines 112 5.2.3 Modeling of SR Machines 115 5.3 SR Converters 117 5.3.1 SR Converter Topologies 118 5.3.2 Soft-Switching SR Converter Topologies 119 5.3.3 Comparison of SR Converters for EVs 123 5.4 SR Motor Control 124 5.4.1 Speed Control 124 5.4.2 Torque-Ripple Minimization Control 126 5.4.3 Position Sensorless Control 128 5.5 Design Criteria of SR Motor Drives for EVs 131 5.5.1 Machine Initialization 132 5.5.2 Suppression of Acoustic Noise 136 5.6 Examples of SR Motor Drives for EVs 137 5.6.1 Planetary-Geared SR Motor Drive 137 5.6.2 Outer-Rotor In-Wheel SR Motor Drive 141 5.7 Application Examples of SR Motor Drives in EVs 144 5.8 Maturing Technology for EVs? 144 References 145 6 Stator-Permanent Magnet Motor Drives 147 6.1 Stator-PM versus Rotor-PM 147 6.2 System Configurations 148 6.3 Doubly-Salient PM Motor Drives 149 6.4 Flux-Reversal PM Motor Drives 157 6.5 Flux-Switching PM Motor Drives 160 6.6 Hybrid-Excited PM Motor Drives 161 6.7 Flux-Mnemonic PM Motor Drives 165 6.8 Design Criteria of Stator-PM Motor Drives for EVs 173 6.9 Design Examples of Stator-PM Motor Drives for EVs 177 6.9.1 Outer-Rotor Hybrid-Excited DSPM Motor Drive 177 6.9.2 Outer-Rotor Flux-Mnemonic DSPM Motor Drive 181 6.10 Potential Applications of Stator-PM Motor Drives in EVs 192 References 194 7 Magnetic-Geared Motor Drives 195 7.1 System Configurations 195 7.2 Magnetic Gears 197 7.2.1 Converted Magnetic Gears 198 7.2.2 Field-Modulated Magnetic Gears 200 7.3 MG Machines 203 7.3.1 Principle of MG Machines 205 7.3.2 Modeling of MG Machines 211 7.4 Inverters for MG Motors 211 7.5 MG Motor Control 212 7.6 Design Criteria of MG Motor Drives for EVs 213 7.7 Design Examples of MG Motor Drives for EVs 215 7.7.1 MG PM Brushless DC In-Wheel Motor Drive 215 7.7.2 MG PM Brushless AC In-Wheel Motor Drive 218 7.8 Potential Applications of MG Motor Drives in EVs 224 References 225 8 Vernier Permanent Magnet Motor Drives 227 8.1 System Configurations 227 8.2 Vernier PM Machines 228 8.2.1 Vernier PM versus Magnetic-Geared PM 228 8.2.2 Structure of Vernier PM Machines 229 8.2.3 Principle of Vernier PM Machines 234 8.2.4 Modeling of Vernier PM Machines 237 8.3 Inverters for Vernier PM Motors 238 8.4 Vernier PM Motor Control 239 8.5 Design Criteria of Vernier PM Motor Drives for EVs 240 8.6 Design Examples of Vernier PM Motor Drives for EVs 242 8.6.1 Outer-Rotor Vernier PM Motor Drive 242 8.6.2 Outer-Rotor Flux-Controllable Vernier PM Motor Drive 245 8.7 Potential Applications of Vernier PM Motor Drives in EVs 251 References 251 9 Advanced Magnetless Motor Drives 253 9.1 What Is Advanced Magnetless? 253 9.2 System Configurations 254 9.3 Synchronous Reluctance Motor Drives 255 9.4 Doubly-Salient DC Motor Drives 257 9.5 Flux-Switching DC Motor Drives 260 9.6 Vernier Reluctance Motor Drives 264 9.7 Doubly-Fed Vernier Reluctance Motor Drives 266 9.8 Axial-Flux Magnetless Motor Drives 269 9.9 Design Criteria of Advanced Magnetless Motor Drives for EVs 272 9.10 Design Examples of Advanced Magnetless Motor Drives for EVs 272 9.10.1 Multi-tooth Doubly-Salient DC Motor Drive 272 9.10.2 Multi-tooth Flux-Switching DC Motor Drive 274 9.10.3 Axial-Flux Doubly-Salient DC Motor Drive 276 9.10.4 Axial-Flux Flux-Switching DC Motor Drive 283 9.11 Potential Applications of Advanced Magnetless Motor Drives in EVs 288 References 289 10 Integrated-Starter-Generator Systems 291 10.1 Classification of HEVs 291 10.2 ISG System Configurations 295 10.3 ISG Machines 296 10.4 ISG Operations 298 10.4.1 Cranking 298 10.4.2 Electricity Generation 298 10.4.3 Idle Stop-Start 298 10.4.4 Regenerative Braking 299 10.4.5 Power Assistance 300 10.5 Design Criteria of ISG Systems 300 10.6 Design Examples of ISG Systems 301 10.6.1 Double-Stator PM Synchronous Machine-Based ISG System 301 10.6.2 Hybrid-Excited Doubly-Salient PM Machine-Based ISG System 303 10.7 Application Examples of ISG Systems in HEVs 312 10.8 Matured Technology for HEVs? 313 References 313 11 Planetary-Geared Electric Variable Transmission Systems 315 11.1 System Configurations 315 11.2 Planetary Gears 316 11.3 Input-Split PG EVT Systems 319 11.3.1 Toyota Hybrid System 319 11.3.2 Ford Hybrid System 324 11.4 Compound-Split PG EVT Systems 326 11.4.1 GM Two-Mode Hybrid System 327 11.4.2 Renault Hybrid System 331 11.4.3 Timken Hybrid System 332 11.5 Design Criteria of PG EVT Systems 333 11.6 Design Example of PG EVT Systems 334 11.6.1 PM Synchronous PG EVT System Configuration 334 11.6.2 PM Synchronous Machine Design 335 11.6.3 PM Synchronous Machine Analysis 336 11.7 Application Examples of PG EVT Systems in HEVs 339 11.8 Matured Technology for HEVs? 341 References 342 12 Double-Rotor Electric Variable Transmission Systems 343 12.1 System Configurations 343 12.2 Double-Rotor Machines 345 12.2.1 Multi-port Machine Concept 345 12.2.2 DR Machine Structure 346 12.3 Basic Double-Rotor EVT Systems 347 12.3.1 DR EVT Structure 347 12.3.2 DR EVT Modeling 349 12.3.3 DR EVT Operation 350 12.4 Advanced Double-Rotor EVT Systems 351 12.4.1 PM DR EVT System 353 12.4.2 SR DR EVT System 354 12.4.3 Axial-Flux DR EVT System 356 12.4.4 Advanced Magnetless DR EVT System 357 12.5 Design Criteria of DR EVT Systems 359 12.6 Design Example of DR EVT Systems 359 12.6.1 DSDC DR EVT System Configuration 360 12.6.2 DSDC DR Machine Design 360 12.6.3 DSDC DR Machine Analysis 360 12.7 Potential Applications of DR EVT Systems in HEVs 364 References 365 13 Magnetic-Geared Electric Variable Transmission Systems 367 13.1 System Configurations 367 13.2 Multi-port Magnetic Gears 369 13.2.1 Magnetic Planetary Gears 369 13.2.2 Magnetic Concentric Gears 371 13.3 Magnetic Planetary-Geared EVT System 373 13.4 Magnetic Concentric-Geared EVT System 375 13.5 Design Criteria of MG EVT Systems 380 13.6 Design Example of MG EVT Systems 382 13.6.1 MCG EVT System Configuration 382 13.6.2 Integrated MCG Machine Design 384 13.6.3 Integrated MCG Machine Analysis 386 13.7 Potential Applications of MG EVT Systems in HEVs 392 References 392 Index 393

Read more less

Book SynopsisNanomaterial Characterization Providing various properties of nanomaterials and the various methods available for their characterization Over the course of the last few decades, research activity on nanomaterials has gained considerable press coverage. The use of nanomaterials has meant that consumer products can be made lighter, stronger, esthetically more pleasing, and less expensive. The significant role of nanomaterials in improving the quality of life is clear, resulting in faster computers, cleaner energy production, target-driven pharmaceuticals, and better construction materials. It is not surprising, therefore, that nanomaterial research has really taken off, spanning across different scientific disciplines from material science to nanotoxicology. A critical part of any nanomaterial research, however, is the need to characterize physicochemical properties of the nanomaterials, which is not a trivial matter. Nanomaterial Characterization: An IntroduTrade Review"For those actively involved in the nanosafety and other relevant research fields involving nanomaterials, as well as those new to the field, this book represents an excellent reference point and source of knowledge." (Andy Booth 2016)Table of ContentsList of Contributors xv Editor’s Preface xix 1 Introduction 1 1.1 Overview 1 1.2 Properties Unique to Nanomaterials 3 1.3 Terminology 4 1.3.1 Nanomaterials 4 1.3.2 Physicochemical Properties 7 1.4 Measurement of Good Practice 8 1.4.1 Method Validation 8 1.4.2 Standard Documents 13 1.5 Typical Methods 16 1.5.1 Sampling 16 1.5.2 Dispersion 19 1.6 Potential Errors Due to Chosen Methods 20 1.7 Summary 20 Acknowledgments 21 References 21 2 Nanomaterial Syntheses 25 2.1 Introduction 25 2.2 Bottom–Up Approach 26 2.2.1 Arc-Discharge 26 2.2.2 Inert-Gas Condensation 26 2.2.3 Flame Synthesis 27 2.2.4 Vapor-Phase Deposition 27 2.2.5 Colloidal Synthesis 27 2.2.6 Biologically synthesized nanomaterials 28 2.2.7 Microemulsion Synthesis 28 2.2.8 Sol–Gel Method 29 2.3 Synthesis: Top–Down Approach 29 2.3.1 Mechanical Milling 29 2.3.2 Laser Ablation 30 2.4 Bottom–Up and Top–Down: Lithography 30 2.5 Bottom–Up or Top–Down? Case Example: Carbon Nanotubes (CNTs) 30 2.6 Particle Growth: Theoretical Considerations 32 2.6.1 Nucleation 32 2.6.2 Particle Growth and Growth Kinetics 33 2.6.2.1 Diffusion-Limited Growth 33 2.6.2.2 Ostwald Ripening 34 2.7 Case Study: Microreactor for the Synthesis of Gold Nanoparticles 34 2.7.1 Introduction 34 2.7.2 Method 36 2.7.2.1 Materials 36 2.7.2.2 Protocol: Nanoparticles Batch Synthesis 37 2.7.2.3 Protocol: Nanoparticle Synthesis via Continuous Flow Microfluidics 37 2.7.2.4 Protocol: Nanoparticles Synthesis via Droplet-Based Microfluidics 38 2.7.2.5 Protocol: Dynamic Light Scattering 38 2.7.3 Results Interpretation and Conclusion 39 2.8 Summary 42 Acknowledgments 43 References 43 3 Reference Nanomaterials 49 3.1 Definition, Development, and Application Fields 49 3.2 Case Studies 50 3.2.1 Silica Nanomaterial as Potential Reference Material to Establish Possible Size Effects on Mechanical Properties 50 3.2.1.1 Introduction 50 3.2.1.2 Findings So Far 53 3.2.2 Silica Nanomaterial as Potential Reference Material in Nanotoxicology 55 3.3 Summary 57 Acknowledgments 58 References 58 4 Particle Number Size Distribution 63 4.1 Introduction 63 4.2 Measuring Methods 65 4.2.1 Particle Tracking Analysis 65 4.2.2 Resistive Pulse Sensing 67 4.2.3 Single Particle Inductively Coupled Plasma Mass Spectrometry 69 4.2.4 Electron Microscopy 71 4.2.5 Atomic Force Microscopy 73 4.3 Summary of Capabilities of the Counting Techniques 74 4.4 Experimental Case Study 74 4.4.1 Introduction 74 4.4.2 Method 76 4.4.3 Results and Interpretation 76 4.4.4 Conclusion 77 4.5 Summary 78 References 78 5 Solubility Part 1: Overview 81 5.1 Introduction 82 5.2 Separation Methods 84 5.2.1 Filtration, Centrifugation, Dialysis, and Ultrafiltration 84 5.2.2 Ion Exchange 85 5.2.3 High-Performance Liquid Chromatography, Electrophoresis, Field Flow Fractionation 87 5.3 Quantification Methods: Free Ions (And Labile Fractions) 90 5.3.1 Electrochemical Methods 90 5.3.2 Colorimetric Methods 93 5.4 Quantification Methods to Measure Total Dissolved Species 94 5.4.1 Indirect Measurements 94 5.4.2 Direct Measurements 95 5.5 Theoretical Modeling Using Speciation Software 96 5.6 Which Method? 97 5.7 Case Study: Miniaturized Capillary Electrophoresis with Conductivity Detection to Determine Nanomaterial Solubility 99 5.7.1 Introduction 99 5.7.2 Method 100 5.7.2.1 Materials 100 5.7.2.2 Dispersion Protocol 100 5.7.2.3 Instrumentation: CE-Conductivity Device 100 5.7.2.4 CE-Conductivity Microchip: Measurement Protocol 101 5.7.2.5 Protocol: To Assess the Feasibility of Measuring the Zn2+ (from ZnO Nanomaterial) Signal above the Fish Medium Background 102 5.7.2.6 Protocol: To Assess Data Variability between Different Microchips 102 5.7.3 Results and Interpretation 103 5.7.3.1 Study 1: Assessing Feasibility of the CE-Conductivity Microchip to Detect Free Zn2+ Arising from Dispersion of ZnO in Fish Medium 103 5.7.3.2 Study 2: Assessing Performance of Microchips Using Reference Test Material 103 5.7.4 Conclusion 105 5.8 Summary 105 Acknowledgments 105 References 106 6 Solubility Part 2: Colorimetry 117 6.1 Introduction 117 6.2 Materials and Method 119 6.2.1 Materials 119 6.2.2 Mandatory Protocol: NanoGenotox Dispersion for Nanomaterials 119 6.2.3 Mandatory Protocol: Simulated In Vitro Digestion Model 120 6.2.4 Colorimetry Analysis 121 6.2.5 SEM Analysis 122 6.3 Results and Interpretation 123 6.4 Conclusion 127 Acknowledgments 128 A6. 1 Materials and Method 128 A6.1.1 Materials 128 A6.1.2 Mandatory Protocol: Ultrasonic Probe Calibration 128 A6.1.3 Mandatory Protocol: Benchmarking of SiO2 (NM 200) 129 A6.1.4 Mandatory Protocol: Preliminary Characterization of ZnO (NM 110) 129 A6.1.5 Mandatory Protocol: Dynamic Light Scattering (DLS) 130 A6. 2 Results and Interpretation 130 A6.2.1 Probe Sonication 130 A6.2.2 Benchmarking with SiO2 (NM 200) 130 A6.2.3 NM 110: Characterizing Batch Dispersions ZnO (NM 110) 131 References 131 7 Surface Area 133 7.1 Introduction 133 7.2 Measurement Methods: Overview 134 7.3 Case Study: Evaluating Powder Homogeneity Using NMR Versus Bet 140 7.3.1 Background: NMR for Surface Area Measurements 141 7.3.2 Method 142 7.3.2.1 Materials 142 7.3.2.2 Sample Preparation for NMR 142 7.3.2.3 Protocol: NMR Analysis 142 7.3.2.4 BET Protocol 143 7.3.3 Results and Interpretation 143 7.3.4 Conclusion 145 7.4 Summary 145 Acknowledgments 145 References 149 8 Surface Chemistry 153 8.1 Introduction 153 8.2 Measurement Challenges 155 8.3 Analytical Techniques 157 8.3.1 Electron Spectroscopies 158 8.3.1.1 X-ray Photoelectron Spectroscopy (XPS) 158 8.3.1.2 Auger Electron Spectroscopy (AES) 159 8.3.2 Incident Ion Techniques 160 8.3.2.1 Secondary Ion Mass Spectrometry (SIMS) 160 8.3.2.2 Low- and Medium-Energy Ion Scattering (LEIS and MEIS) 160 8.3.3 Scanning Probe Microscopies 161 8.3.4 Optical Techniques 161 8.3.5 Other Techniques 162 8.4 Case Studies 163 8.4.1 Part I: Surface Characterization of Biomolecule-Coated Nanoparticles 163 8.4.2 Part II: Surface Characterization of Commercial Metal-Oxide Nanomaterials by TOF-SIMS 169 8.4.2.1 Effect of Sample Topography 171 8.4.2.2 Chemical Analysis of Nanopowders 171 8.5 Summary 174 References 174 9 Mechanical Tribological Properties and Surface Characteristics of Nanotextured Surfaces 179 9.1 Introduction 179 9.2 Fabricating Nanotextured Surfaces 181 9.2.1 Plasma Treatment Processes 181 9.2.2 Randomly Nanotextured Surfaces by Plasma Etching 182 9.2.3 Ordered Hierarchical Nanotextured by Plasma Etching 185 9.2.4 Carbon Nanotube Forests by Chemical Vapor Deposition (CVD) 185 9.3 Mechanical Property Characterization 187 9.3.1 Nanoindentation Testing 187 9.3.2 Tribological Characterization by Nanoscratching 190 9.4 Case Study: Nanoscratch Tests to Characterize Mechanical Stability of PS/PMMA Surfaces 191 9.4.1 Method 191 9.4.2 Results and Discussion 192 9.5 Case Study: Structural Integrity of Multiwalled CNT Forest 194 9.6 Case Study: Mechanical Characterization of Plasma-Treated Polylactic Acid (PLA) for Packaging Applications 197 9.7 Conclusions 201 Acknowledgments 202 References 202 10 Methods for Testing Dustiness 209 10.1 Introduction 209 10.2 Cen Test Methods (Under Consideration) 213 10.2.1 The EN 15051 Rotating Drum (RD) Method 213 10.2.2 The EN 15051 Continuous Drop (CD) Method 215 10.2.3 The Small Rotating Drum (SRD) Method 217 10.2.4 The Vortex Shaker (VS) Method 219 10.2.5 Dustiness Test: Comparison of Methods 223 10.3 Case Studies: Application of Dustiness Data 225 10.4 Summary 226 Acknowledgments 227 References 227 11 Scanning Tunneling Microscopy and Spectroscopy for Nanofunctionality Characterization 231 11.1 Introduction 231 11.2 Extreme Field STM: a Brief History 234 11.3 STM/STS for the Extraction of Surface Local Density of States (LDOS): Theoretical Background 234 11.4 Scanning Tunneling Spectroscopy (STS) at Low Temperatures: Background 238 11.5 STM Instrumentation at Extreme Conditions: Specification Requirements and Design 239 11.6 STM/STS Imaging Under Extreme Environments: a Review on Applications 242 11.6.1 Atomic-Scale STM Imaging 242 11.6.2 Interference of Low-Dimensional Electron Waves 244 11.6.3 Interesting Phenomena Related to High-Magnetic Fields 246 11.7 Summary and Future Outlook 248 Acknowledgments 248 References 249 12 Biological Characterization of Nanomaterials 253 12.1 Introduction 253 12.1.1 Importance of Nanomaterial Characterization 253 12.1.2 Extrinsic NMs Characterization 254 12.1.3 The Proposal for Measuring “extrinsic” Properties 255 12.2 Measurement Methods 255 12.2.1 Review of Existing Approaches 255 12.2.2 Introducing Acetylcholinesterase as a Model Biosensor Protein 256 12.3 Experimental Case Study 257 12.3.1 Introduction 257 12.3.2 Method: Assay of AChE Activity 258 12.3.3 Results and Discussion 260 12.3.4 Conclusions 262 12.4 Summary 263 Acknowledgments 263 References 263 13 Visualization of Multidimensional Data for Nanomaterial Characterization 269 13.1 Introduction 269 13.2 Case Study: Structure–Activity Relationship (SAR) Analysis of Nanoparticle Toxicity 271 13.2.1 Introduction 271 13.2.2 Parallel Coordinates: Background 273 13.2.3 Case Study Data 274 13.2.4 Method 276 13.2.5 Results and Interpretation 277 13.2.5.1 Analysis of the 14 Dry Powder Samples Using BET and DTT Data Only 277 13.2.5.2 Analysis of the Structural Properties of Zinc Oxide (N14) and Nickel Oxide (N12) (Excluding BET and DTT Data) 278 13.2.5.3 Metal-Content-Only Analysis of the 18 Samples Excluding Structural Descriptors 279 13.2.5.4 Analysis of the Structural Properties of Nanotubes (N3) 281 13.2.5.5 Analysis of the Structural Properties of Aminated Beads (N6) (Excluding BET and DTT Data) 281 13.2.6 Conclusion 283 13.3 Summary 283 References 284 Index 287

Read more less

Book SynopsisComprehensive and up to date coverage of robust control theory and its application* Presented in a well-planned and logical way* Written by a respected leading author, with extensive experience in robust control* Accompanying website provides solutions manual and other supplementary materialTable of ContentsPreface xvii List of Abbreviations xix Notations xxi 1 Introduction 1 1.1 Engineering Background of Robust Control 1 1.2 Methodologies of Robust Control 4 1.3 A Brief History of Robust Control 8 2 Basics of Linear Algebra and Function Analysis 10 2.1 Trace, Determinant, Matrix Inverse, and Block Matrix 10 2.2 Elementary Linear Transformation of Matrix and Its Matrix Description 12 2.3 Linear Vector Space 14 2.4 Norm and Inner Product of Vector 18 2.5 Linear Subspace 22 2.6 Matrix and Linear Mapping 23 2.7 Eigenvalue and Eigenvector 28 2.8 Invariant Subspace 30 2.9 Pseudo-Inverse and Linear Matrix Equation 34 2.10 Quadratic Form and Positive Definite Matrix 35 2.11 Norm and Inner Product of Matrix 37 2.12 Singular Value and Singular Value Decomposition 40 2.13 Calculus of Vector and Matrix 43 2.14 Kronecker Product 44 2.15 Norm and Inner Product of Function 45 3 Basics of Convex Analysis and LMI 57 3.1 Convex Set and Convex Function 57 3.2 Introduction to LMI 72 3.3 Interior Point Method* 81 4 Fundamentals of Linear System 85 4.1 Structural Properties of Dynamic System 85 4.2 Stability 100 4.3 Lyapunov Equation 108 4.4 Linear Fractional Transformation 114 5 System Performance 119 5.1 Test Signal 120 5.2 Steady-State Response 122 5.3 Transient Response 130 5.4 Comparison of Open-Loop and Closed-Loop Controls 140 6 Stabilization of Linear Systems 148 6.1 State Feedback 148 6.2 Observer 160 6.3 Combined System and Separation Principle 167 7 Parametrization of Stabilizing Controllers 173 7.1 Generalized Feedback Control System 174 7.2 Parametrization of Controllers 178 7.3 Youla Parametrization 184 7.4 Structure of Closed-Loop System 186 7.5 2-Degree-of-Freedom System 188 8 Relation between Time Domain and Frequency Domain Properties 197 8.1 Parseval’s Theorem 197 8.2 KYP Lemma 200 9 Algebraic Riccati Equation 215 9.1 Algorithm for Riccati Equation 215 9.2 Stabilizing Solution 218 9.3 Inner Function 223 10 Performance Limitation of Feedback Control 225 10.1 Preliminaries 226 10.2 Limitation on Achievable Closed-loop Transfer Function 228 10.3 Integral Relation 231 10.4 Limitation of Reference Tracking 237 11 Model Uncertainty 245 11.1 Model Uncertainty: Examples 245 11.2 Plant Set with Dynamic Uncertainty 248 11.3 Parametric System 253 11.4 Plant Set with Phase Information of Uncertainty 264 11.5 LPV Model and Nonlinear Systems 266 11.6 Robust Stability and Robust Performance 269 12 Robustness Analysis 1: Small-Gain Principle 272 12.1 Small-Gain Theorem 272 12.2 Robust Stability Criteria 276 12.3 Equivalence between H∞ Performance and Robust Stability 277 12.4 Analysis of Robust Performance 279 12.5 Stability Radius of Norm-Bounded Parametric Systems 282 13 Robustness Analysis 2: Lyapunov Method 288 13.1 Overview of Lyapunov Stability Theory 288 13.2 Quadratic Stability 290 13.3 Lur'e System 296 13.4 Passive Systems 307 14 Robustness Analysis 3: IQC Approach 312 14.1 Concept of IQC 312 14.2 IQC Theorem 314 14.3 Applications of IQC 316 14.4 Proof of IQC Theorem* 319 15 H2 Control 322 15.1 H2 Norm of Transfer Function 322 15.2 H2 Control Problem 329 15.3 Solution to Nonsingular H2 Control Problem 331 15.4 Proof of Nonsingular Solution 332 15.5 Singular H2 Control 335 15.6 Case Study: H2 Control of an RTP System 337 16 H∞ Control 346 16.1 Control Problem and H∞ Norm 346 16.2 H∞ Control Problem 348 16.3 LMI Solution 1: Variable Elimination 349 16.4 LMI Solution 2: Variable Change 351 16.5 Design of Generalized Plant and Weighting Function 352 16.6 Case Study 354 16.7 Scaled H∞ Control 355 17 μ Synthesis 360 17.1 Introduction to μ 360 17.2 Definition of μ and Its Implication 364 17.3 Properties of μ 365 17.4 Condition for Robust H∞ Performance 368 17.5 D–K Iteration Design 369 17.6 Case Study 371 18 Robust Control of Parametric Systems 375 18.1 Quadratic Stabilization of Polytopic Systems 375 18.2 Quadratic Stabilization of Norm-Bounded Parametric Systems 379 18.3 Robust H∞ Control Design of Polytopic Systems 379 18.4 Robust H∞ Control Design of Norm-Bounded Parametric Systems 382 19 Regional Pole Placement 384 19.1 Convex Region and Its Characterization 384 19.2 Condition for Regional Pole Placement 387 19.3 Composite LMI Region 392 19.4 Feedback Controller Design 394 19.5 Analysis of Robust Pole Placement 396 19.6 Robust Design of Regional Pole Placement 402 20 Gain-Scheduled Control 407 20.1 General Structure 407 20.2 LFT-Type Parametric Model 408 20.3 Case Study: Stabilization of a Unicycle Robot 414 20.4 Affine LPV Model 422 20.5 Case Study: Transient Stabilization of a Power System 428 21 Positive Real Method 436 21.1 Structure of Uncertain Closed-Loop System 436 21.2 Robust Stabilization Based on Strongly Positive Realness 438 21.3 Robust Stabilization Based on Strictly Positive Realness 441 21.4 Robust Performance Design for Systems with Positive Real Uncertainty 442 21.5 Case Study 445 Exercises 448 Notes and References 449 References 450 Index 455

Read more less

Book SynopsisAmorphous semiconductors are subtances in the amorphous solid state that have the properties of a semiconductor and which are either covalent or tetrahedrally bonded amorphous semiconductors or chelcogenide glasses. Developed from both a theoretical and experimental viewpoint Deals with, amongst others, preparation techniques, structural, optical and electronic properties, and lightinduced phenomena Explores different types of amorphous semiconductorsincluding amorphous silicon, amorphous semiconducting oxides and chalcogenide glasses Applications include solar cells, thin film transistors, sensors, optical memory devices and flat screen devices including televisions Table of ContentsSeries Preface xi Preface xiii 1 Introduction 1 1.1 General Aspects of Amorphous Semiconductors 1 1.2 Chalcogenide Glasses 3 1.3 Applications of Amorphous Semiconductors 3 References 3 2 Preparation Techniques 5 2.1 Growth of a‐Si:H Films 5 2.1.1 PECVD Technique 5 2.1.2 HWCVD Technique 6 2.2 Growth of Amorphous Chalcogenides 6 References 8 3 Structural Properties of Amorphous Silicon and Amorphous Chalcogenides 11 3.1 General Aspects 11 3.1.1 Definitions of Crystalline and Noncrystalline 11 3.2 Optical Spectroscopy 12 3.2.1 Raman Scattering 12 3.2.2 Infrared Absorption 13 3.3 Neutron Diffraction 15 3.3.1 Diffraction Measurements on Amorphous Silicon 17 3.3.2 Diffraction Measurements on Hydrogenated Amorphous Silicon 18 3.3.3 Diffraction Measurements on Amorphous Germanium 19 3.3.4 Diffraction Measurements on Amorphous Selenium 19 3.4 Computer Simulations 20 3.4.1 Monte Carlo‐Type Methods for Structure Derivation 20 3.4.2 Atomic Interactions 21 3.4.3 a‐Si Models Constructed by Monte Carlo Simulation 25 3.4.4 Reverse Monte Carlo Methods 26 3.4.5 a‐Si Model Constructed by RMC Simulation 28 3.4.6 a‐Se Model Constructed by RMC Simulation 30 3.4.7 Molecular Dynamics Simulation 32 3.4.8 a‐Si Model Construction by Molecular Dynamics Simulation 34 3.4.9 a‐Si:H Model Construction by Molecular Dynamics Simulation 34 3.4.10 a‐Se Model Construction by Molecular Dynamics Simulation 35 3.4.11 Car and Parrinello Method 38 References 38 4 Electronic Structure of Amorphous Semiconductors 43 4.1 Bonding Structures 43 4.1.1 Bonding Structures in Column IV Elements 44 4.1.2 Bonding Structures in Column VI Elements 45 4.2 Electronic Structure of Amorphous Semiconductors 46 4.3 Fermi Energy of Amorphous Semiconductors 47 4.4 Differences between Amorphous and Crystalline Semiconductors 49 4.5 Charge Distribution in Pure Amorphous Semiconductors 49 4.6 Density of States in Pure Amorphous Semiconductors 52 4.7 Dangling Bonds 54 4.8 Doping 57 References 58 5 Electronic and Optical Properties of Amorphous Silicon 61 5.1 Introduction 61 5.2 Band Tails and Structural Defects 62 5.2.1 Introduction 62 5.2.2 Band Tails 62 5.2.3 Structural Defects 66 5.3 Recombination Processes 68 5.3.1 Introduction 68 5.3.2 Radiative Recombination 68 5.3.3 Nonradiative Recombination 70 5.3.4 Recombination Processes and Recombination Centers in a‐Si:H 72 5.3.5 Spin‐Dependent Recombination 73 5.4 Electrical Properties 74 5.4.1 DC Conduction 74 5.4.2 AC Conduction 80 5.4.3 Hall Effect 87 5.4.4 Thermoelectric Power 88 5.4.5 Doping Effect 89 5.5 Optical Properties 92 5.5.1 Fundamental Optical Absorption 92 5.5.2 Weak Absorption 94 5.5.3 Photoluminescence 96 5.5.4 Frequency‐Resolved Spectroscopy (FRS) 96 5.5.5 Photoconductivity 101 5.5.6 Dispersive Photoconduction 109 5.6 Electron Magnetic Resonance and Spin‐Dependent Properties 112 5.6.1 Introduction 112 5.6.2 Electron Magnetic Resonance 112 5.6.3 Spin‐Dependent Properties 128 5.7 Light‐Induced Phenomena and Light‐Induced Defect Creation 131 5.7.1 Introduction 131 5.7.2 Light‐Induced Phenomena 132 5.7.3 Light‐Induced Defect Creation 134 References 145 6 Electronic and Optical Properties of Amorphous Chalcogenides 157 6.1 Historical Overview of Chalcogenide Glasses 157 6.1.1 Applications 157 6.1.2 Science 158 6.2 Basic Glass Science 159 6.2.1 Glass Formation 159 6.2.2 Glass Transition Temperature 160 6.2.3 Crystallization of Glasses 162 6.3 Electrical Properties 165 6.3.1 Electronic Transport 165 6.3.2 Ionic Transport 170 6.4 Optical Properties 175 6.4.1 Fundamental Optical Absorption 175 6.4.2 Urbach and Weak Absorption Tails 178 6.4.3 Photoluminescence 179 6.4.4 Photoconduction 183 6.5 The Nature of Defects, and Defect Spectroscopy 191 6.5.1 Electron Spin Resonance 196 6.5.2 Optical Absorption 197 6.5.3 Primary Photoconductivity 197 6.5.4 Secondary Photoconductivity 197 6.5.5 Electrophotography 199 6.5.6 Electronic Transport 199 6.6 Light‐Induced Effects in Chalcogenides 200 6.6.1 Electron Spin Resonance 200 6.6.2 Optical Absorption 202 6.6.3 Photoluminescence 203 6.6.4 Photoconductivity 205 6.6.5 Electronic Transport 206 6.6.6 Defect Creation Kinetics 207 6.6.7 Structure‐Related Properties 210 References 218 7 Other Amorphous Material Systems 231 7.1 Amorphous Carbon and Related Materials 231 7.1.1 Basic Structure of a‐C (sp2 Hybrids) 232 7.1.2 Preparation Techniques 233 7.1.3 Brief Review of Structural Studies on Amorphous Carbon 233 7.1.4 Applications 234 7.2 Amorphous Oxide Semiconductors 235 7.2.1 Preparation Techniques 235 7.2.2 Optical Properties 236 7.2.3 Electronic Properties 237 7.2.4 Applications 239 7.3 Metal‐Containing Amorphous Chalcogenides 239 7.3.1 Preparation Techniques 240 7.3.2 Structure of Ag‐Chs and Related Physical Properties 240 7.3.3 Photodoping 241 7.3.4 Applications 242 References 242 8 Applications 247 8.1 Devices Using a‐Si:H 247 8.1.1 Photovoltaics 247 8.1.2 Thin‐Film Transistors 248 8.2 Devices Using a‐Chs 249 8.2.1 Phase‐Change Materials 249 8.2.2 Direct X‐ray Image Sensors for Medical Use 257 8.2.3 High‐Gain Avalanche Rushing Amorphous Semiconductor Vidicon 258 8.2.4 Optical Fibers and Waveguides 260 References 261 Index 265

Read more less

Book SynopsisContains a collection of papers from the below symposia held during the 10th Pacific Rim Conference on Ceramic and Glass Technology (PacRim10), June 2-7, 2013, in Coronado, California 2012: Engineering Ceramics and Ceramic Matrix Composites: Design, Development, and Application Advanced Ceramic Coatings: Processing, Properties, and Application Geopolymers Low Energy, Environmentally Friendly, Inorganic Polymeric Ceramic Multifunctional Metal Oxide Nanostructures and Heteroarchitectures for Energy and Device Application Advanced Characterization and Modeling of Ceramic Interfaces Table of ContentsPreface ix ENGINEERING CERAMICS AND CERAMIC MATRIX COMPOSITES: DESIGN, DEVELOPMENT, AND APPLICATIONS Design and Testing of a C/C-SiC Nozzle Extension Manufactured Via Filament Winding Technique and Liquid Silicon Infiltration 3 Fabian Breeds, Raouf Jemmali, Heinz Voggenreiter, and Dietmar Koch Preparation of Zirconium Phosphate Bonded Silicon Nitride Porous Ceramics Reinforced by In-Situ Reacted Silicon Nitride Nanowires 15 Fei Chen, Feiyu Li, Kaiyu Wang, Qiang Shen, and Lianmeng Zhang Residual Strains in Structural Stone: A Degradation Mechanism 25 Victoria Shushakova, Edwin R. Fuller, Jr., Florian Heidelbach, and Siegfried Siegesmund Joining of SiC/SiC Ceramic Matrix Composites Using REABOND Technology 39 Michael C. Halbig, Mrityunjay Singh, and Craig E. Smith Fracture Criterion of Short Carbon Fiber-Dispersed SiC Matrix Composite under Mixed Mode Loading Condition 53 Ryo Inoue, Hideki Kakisawa, and Yutaka Kagawa Ceramic Matrix Composites Manufactured by Multistep Densification of Si-O-C Fiber Preform 61 L. Maille, M. A. Dourges, S. Le Ber, and R. Pailler Effects of Particle Size and Crystalline Phases Developed after Thermal Shock Cycles on the Physical Properties and Mechanical Resistance of Cordierite-Mullite Concrete Mixes 71 Ana Ma Paniagua Mercado, Arturo Mendez Sanchez, Elvia Diaz Valdes, and Concepcion Mejia Garcia ADVANCED CERAMIC COATINGS: PROCESSING, PROPERTIES, AND APPLICATIONS Development of New Observation System used for Deformation Measurement of Ceramic Matrix Composites at High Temperature 81 Y. L. Dong, H. Kakisawa, and Y. Kagawa Anti-Reflective Surface Structures in Spinel Ceramic Windows 89 Catalin M. Florea, Lynda E. Busse, Shyam Bayya, Brandon Shaw, Ishwar D. Aggarwal, and Jas S. Sanghera Ta-O-N Thin Films Deposited by Low Vacuum Reactive Sputtering 101 Takashi Hashizume, Atsushi Saiki, and Kiyoshi Terayama Control of Mass-Transfer through Grain Boundaries in a Protective Alumina Layer by Dopant Configuration in Advanced EBCs 107 Satoshi Kitaoka, Tsuneaki Matsudaira, Masashi Wada, Makoto Tanaka,Takafumi Ogawa, and Yutaka Kagawa Fabrication of K2Ta206 Films by Hydrothermal Method and their Optical Property 119 Atsushi Saiki and Takashi Hashizume Finite Element Modeling of Compressor Blade Leading Edge Curl, Erosion and Deformation 127 George M. Slota and Douglas E. Wolfe GEOPOLYMERS-LOW ENERGY, ENVIRONMENTALLY FRIENDLY, INORGANIC POLYMERIC CERAMICS Development of Thai Fly Ash Blended with Rice Husk Ash Geopolymers 145 Duangrudee Chaysuwan, Chayanee Tippayasam, Pimpawee Keawpapasson, Parjaree Thavorniti, Thammarat Panyathanmaporn, Sirithan Jiemsirilers, and Cristina Leonelli Characterization of Cotton Fabric Reinforced Geopolymer Composites Modified with Portland Cement 155 T. Alomayri, F. U. A. Shaikh, and I. M. Low MULTIFUNCTIONAL METAL OXIDE NANOSTRUCTURES AND HETEROARCHITECTURES FOR ENERGY AND DEVICE APPLICATIONS Synthesis of yMnOOH and ß-MnO2 Nanowires and their Electrochemical Capacitive Behavior 171 Indra B. Singh and Su Moon Park ADVANCED CHARACTERIZATION AND MODELING OF CERAMIC INTERFACES The Effect of Interface and Micro-Crack on Physical Property and Performance of Ceramic Materials 181 Justin Gao Author Index 195

Read more less

Book SynopsisA collection of papers from the below symposia held during the 10th Pacific Rim Conference on Ceramic and Glass Technology (PacRim10), June 2-7, 2013, in Coronado, California 2012: Solid Oxide Fuel Cells and Hydrogen Technology Direct Thermal to Electrical Energy Conversion Materials and Applications Photovoltaic Materials and Technologies Ceramics for Next Generation Nuclear Energy Advances in Photocatalytic Materials for Energy and Environmental Applications Ceramics Enabling Environmental Protection: Clean Air and Water Advanced Materials and Technologies for Electrochemical Energy Storage Systems Glasses and Ceramics for Nuclear and Hazardous Waste Treatment Table of ContentsPreface ix Recent Research Activities for Future Challenges in Global Energy and Environment in Toyota Central R&D Labs., Inc. (TCRDL) 1Tomoyoshi Motohiro SOLID OXIDE FUEL CELLS AND HYDROGEN TECHNOLOGY Structural and Electrical Characterization of PrxCe0.95-xGd0.05O2.s (0.15 less than/equal to x less than/equal to 0.40) as Cathode Materials for Low Temperature SOFC 13Rajalekshmi Chockalingam, Suddhasatwa Basu, and Ashok Kumar Ganguli Solid Oxide Metal-Air Batteries for Advanced Energy Storage 25Xuan Zhao, Yunhui Gong, Xue Li, Nansheng Xu, and Kevin Huang Fabrication of Ce02/Al Multilayer Thin Films and the Thermal Behavior 33Shumpei Kurokawa, Takashi Hashizume, Masateru Nose, and Atsushi Saiki DIRECT THERMAL TO ELECTRICAL ENERGY CONVERSION MATERIALS AND APPLICATIONS Reduced Strontium Titanate Thermoelectric Materials 45Lisa A. Moore and Charlene M. Smith PHOTOVOLTAIC MATERIALS AND TECHNOLOGIES Densification and Properties of Fluorine Doped Tin Oxide (FTO) Ceramics by Spark Plasma Sintering 59Meijuan Li, Kun Xiang, Qiang Shen, and Lianmeng Zhang Interfacial Character and Electronic Passivation in Amorphous Thin-Film Alumina for Si Photovoltaics 65L.R. Hubbard, J.B. Kana-Kana, and B.G. Potter, Jr. CERAMICS FOR NEXT GENERATION NUCLEAR ENERGY SiC/SiC Fuel Cladding by NITE Process for Innovative LWR Pre-Composite Ribbon Design and Fabrication 79Yuuki Asakura, Daisuke Hayasaka, Joon-Soo Park, Hirotatsu Kishimoto, and Akira Kohyama SiC/SiC Fuel Cladding by NITE Process for Innovative Light Water Reactor - Compatibility with High Temperature Pressurized Water 85C. Kanda, Y. Kanda, H. Kishimoto, and A. Kohyama SiC/SiC Fuel Cladding by NITE Process for Innovative LWR-Concept and Process Development of Fuel Pin Assembly Technologies 93Hirotatsu Kishimoto, Tamaki Shibayama, Yuuki Asakura, Daisuke Hayasaka, Yutaka Kohno, and Akira Kohyama "INSPIRE" Project for R&D of SiC/SiC Fuel Cladding by NITE Method 99Akira Kohyama SiC/SiC Fuel Cladding by NITE Process for Innovative LWR-Cladding Forming Process Development 109Naofumi Nakazato, Hirotatsu Kishimoto, Yutaka Kohno, and Akira Kohyama ADVANCES IN PHOTOCATALYTIC MATERIALS FOR ENERGY AND ENVIRONMENTAL APPLICATIONS Preparation of Brookite-Type Titanium Oxide Nanocrystal by Hydrothermal Synthesis 119S. Kitahara, T. Hashizume, and A. Saiki Effect of Atmosphere on Crystallisation Kinetics and Phase Relations in Electrospun Ti02 Nanofibres 125H. Albetran, H. Haroosh, Y. Dong, B. H. O'Connor, and I. M. Low Electronic and Optical Properties of Nitrogen-Doped Layered Manganese Oxides 135Giacomo Giorgi and Koichi Yamashita CERAMICS ENABLING ENVIRONMENTAL PROTECTION: CLEAN AIR AND WATER Understanding the Effect of Dynamic Feed Conditions on Water Recovery from IC Engine Exhaust by Capillary Condensation with Inorganic Membranes 143Melanie Moses DeBusk, Brian Bischoff, James Hunter, James Klett, Eric Nafziger, and Stuart Daw Reliability of Ceramic Membranes of BSCF for Oxygen Separation in a Pilot Membrane Reactor 153E. M. Pfaff, M. Oezel, A. Eser, and A. Bezold ADVANCED MATERIALS AND TECHNOLOGIES FOR ELECTROCHEMICAL ENERGY STORAGE SYSTEMS In Situ Experimentation with Batteries using Neutron and Synchrotron X-Ray Diffraction 167Neeraj Sharma Electrochemical Performance of LiNi1/3Co1/3Mn1/302 Lithium Polymer Battery Based on PVDF-HFP/m-SBA15 Composite Polymer Membranes 181Chun-Chen Yang and Zuo-Yu Lian GLASSES AND CERAMICS FOR NUCLEAR AND HAZARDOUS WASTE TREATMENT Borosilicate Glass Foams from Glass Packaging Residues 205R. K.Chinnam, Silvia Molinaro, Enrico Bernardo, and Aldo R. Boccaccini The Durability of Simulated UK High Level Waste Glass Compositions Based on Recent Vitrification Campaigns 211Mike T. Harrison and Carl J. Steele Scaled Melter Testing of Noble Metals Behavior with Japanese HLW Streams 225Keith S. Matlack, Hao Gan, Ian L. Pegg, Innocent Joseph, Bradley W. Bowan, Yoshiyuki Miura, Norio Kanehira, Eiji Ochi, Tamotsu Ebisawa, Atsushi Yamazaki, Toshiro Oniki, and Yoshihiro Endo Suppression of Yellow Phase Formation during Japanese HLW Vitrification 237Hao Gan, Keith S. Matlack, Ian L. Pegg, Innocent Joseph, Bradley W. Bowan, Yoshiyuki Miura, Norio Kanehira, Eiji Ochi, Toshiro Oniki, and Yoshihiro Endo Cold Crucible Vitrification of Hanford HLW Surrogates in Aluminum-Iron-Phosphate Glass 251S. V. Stefanovsky, S. Y. Shvetsov, V. V. Gorbunov, A. V. Lekontsev, A. V. Efimov, I. A. Knyazev, O. I. Stefanovsky, M. S. Zen'kovskaya, and J. A. Roach Hafnium and Samarium Speciation in Vitrified Radioactive Incinerator Slag 265G. A. Malinina, S. V. Stefanovsky, A. A. Shiryaev, and Y. V. Zubavichus Author Index 273

Read more less

Book SynopsisContains a collection of papers from the below symposia held during the 10th Pacific Rim Conference on Ceramic and Glass Technology (PacRim10), June 2-7,2013, in Coronado, California 2012: Advances in Electroceramics Microwave Materials and Their Applications Oxide Materials for Nonvolatile Memory Technology and ApplicationsTable of ContentsPreface vii ADVANCES IN ELECTROCERAMICS Pyroelectric Performances of Relaxor-Based Ferroelectric Single Crystals and their Applications in Infrared Detectors 3 Long Li, Haosu Luo, Xiangyong Zhao, Xiaobing Li, Bo Ren, Qing Xu, and Wenning Di Formation of Tough Foundation Layer for Electrical Plating on Insulator using Aerosol Deposition Method of Cu-Al203 Mixed Powder 17 Naoki Seto, Shingo Hirose, Hiroki Tsuda and Jun Akedo Formation and Electromagnetic Properties of 0.1 BTO/0.9NZFO Ceramic Composite with High Density Prepared by Three-Step Sintering Method 23 Bin Xiao, Juncong Wang, Ning Ma, and Piyi Du MICROWAVE MATERIALS AND THEIR APPLICATIONS Thin Glass Characterization in the Radio Frequency Range 37 Alfred Ebberg, Jürgen Meggers, Kai Rathjen, Gerhard Fotheringham, Ivan Ndip, Florian Ohnimus, Christian Tschoban, Isa Pieper, Andreas Kilian, Sebastian Methfessel, Martin Letz, and Ulrich Fotheringham Formation of Silver Nano Particles in Percolative Ag-PbTi03 Composite Dielectric Thin Film 51 Tao Hu, Zongrong Wang, Liwen Tang, Ning Ma, and Piyi Du Software for Calculating Permittivity of Resonators: HakCol & ErCalc 65 Rick Ubic Effects of MgO Additive on Structural, Dielectric Properties and Breakdown Strength of Mg2Ti04 Ceramics Doped with ZnO-B203 Glass 17 Xiaohong Wang, Mengjie Wang, Zhaoqiang Li, and Wenzhong Lu Design of Microwave Dielectrics Based on Crystallography 87 Hitoshi Ohsato OXIDE MATERIALS FOR NONVOLATILE MEMORY TECHNOLOGY AND APPLICATIONS Stable Resistive Switching Characteristics of Al203 Layers Inserted in Hf02 Based RRAM Devices 103 Chun-Yang Huang, Jheng-Hong Jieng, and Tseung-Yuen Tseng Improvement of Resistive Switching Properties of Ti/Zr02/Pt with Embedded Germanium 111 Chun-An Lin, Debashis Panda, and Tseung-Yuen Tseng Nonvolatile Memories Using Single Electron Tunneling Effects in Si Quantum Dots Inside Tunnel Silicon Oxide 117 Ryuji Ohba Resistive Switching and Rectification Characteristics with CoO/Zr02 Double Layers 123 Tsung-Ling Tsai, Jia-Woei Wu, and Tseng-Yuen Tseng Research Of Nano-Scaled Transition Metal Oxide Resistive Non-Volatile Memory (R-RAM) 129 ChiaHua Ho, Cho-Lun Hsu, Chun-Chi Chen, Ming-Taou Lee, Hsin-Hau Huang, Kai-Shin Li, Lu-Mei Lu, Tung-Yen Lai, Wen-Cheng Chiu, Bo-Wei Wu, MeiYi Li, Min-Cheng Chen, Cheng-San Wu, Yi-Ping Hsieh, and Fu-Liang Yang Author Index 137

Read more less

Book SynopsisA collection of papers from the below symposia held during the 10th Pacific Rim Conference on Ceramic and Glass Technology (PacRim10), June 2-7, 2013, in Coronado, California 2012: Advances in Biomineralized Ceramics, Bioceramics, and Bioinspired Designs Nanostructured Bioceramics and Ceramics for Biomedical ApplicationsTable of ContentsPreface ix ADVANCES IN BIOMINERALIZED CERAMICS, BIOCERAMICS, AND BIOINSPIRED DESIGN Vapor Deposition Polymerization as an Alternative Method to Enhance the Mechanical Properties of Bio-Inspired Scaffolds 3Pei Chun Chou, Michael M. Porter, Joanna McKittrick, and Po-Yu Chen The Natural Process of Biomineralization and In-Vitro Remineralization of Dentin Lesions 13Stefan Habelitz, Tiffany Hsu, Paul Hsiao, Kuniko Saeki, Yung-Ching Chien, Sally J. Marshall, and Grayson W. Marshall Synthesis of Highly Branched Zinc Oxide Nanowires 25Wenting Hou, Louis Lancaster, Dongsheng Li, Ana Bowlus, and David Kisailus A Comparison on the Structural and Mechanical Properties of Untreated and Deproteinized Nacre 37Maria I. Lopez, Po-Yu Chen, Joanna McKittrick, and Marc A. Meyers Reinforcing Structures in Avian Wing Bones 47E. Novitskaya, M.S. Ribero Vairo, J. Kiang, M.A. Meyers, and J. McKittrick Structural Differences between Alligator Pipehorse and Bay Pipefish Tails 57Zherrina Manilay, Vanessa Nguyen, Ekaterina Novitskaya, Michael Porter, Ana Bertha Castro-Cesena, and Joanna McKittrick Initial Investigations in Applying a PILP-Mineralization System to Calcium Oxalate Formation using Vapor Diffusion 65Douglas E. Rodriguez, Saeed R. Khan, and Laurie B. Gower Utilizing Kaolinite and Amorphous Calcium Carbonate Precursors to Synthesize Oriented Aragonitic Structures 75Jong Seto Use of Biomineralization Media in Biomimetic Synthesis of Hard Tissue Substitutes 91A. Cuneyt Tas Structural Characterization and Compressive Behavior of the Boxfish Horn 105Wen Yang, Vanessa Nguyen, Michael M. Porter, Marc A. Meyers, and Joanna McKittrick Comparative Evaluation of Crystallization Behavior, Micro Structure Properties and Biocompatibility of Fluorapatite-Mullite Glass-Ceramics 113S. Mollazadeh, A. Youssefi, B. Eftekhari Yekta, J. Javadpour, T.S. Jafarzadeh, M. Mehrju, and M. A. Shokrgozar NANOSTRUCTURED BIOCERAMICS AND CERAMICS FOR BIOMEDICAL APPLICATIONS Size Control of Magnetite Nanoparticles and their Surface Modification for Hyperthermia Application 127Eun-Hee Lee and Chang-Yeoul Kim Design, Synthesis, and Evaluation of Polydopamine-Laced Gelatinous Hydroxyapatite Nanocomposites for Orthopedic Applications 135Ching-Chang Ko, Zhengyan Wang, Henry Tseng, Dong Joon Lee, and Camille Guez Application of Scratch Hardness Tests for Evaluation of Partially Sintered Zirconia CAD/CAM Blocks for All-Ceramic Prosthesis 149Da-Jeong Lee, Seung-Won Seo, Hyung-Jun Yoon, Hye-Lee Kim, Jung-Suk Han, and Dae-Joon Kim Functionalized Alkoxysilane Mediated Synthesis of Nano-Materials and their Application 155P. C. Pandey and Ashish K. Pandey Development of Bioactive Glass Scaffolds for Structural Bone Repair 167Mohamed N. Rahaman, Xin Liu, and B. Sonny Bal Fabrication, Characterization and In-Vitro Evaluation of Apatite-Based Microbeads for Bone Implant Science 179J. Feng, M. Chong, J. Chan, Z.Y. Zhang, S.H. Teoh, and E.S. Thian A Functionalized Nanoporous Alumina Membrane Electrochemical Sensor for DNA Detection with Gold Nanoparticle Amplification 191Weiwei Ye and Mo Yang Author Index 199

Read more less

Book SynopsisContains collection of papers from the below symposia held during the 10th Pacific Rim Conference on Ceramic and Glass Technology (PacRim10), June 2-7, 2013, in Coronado, California 2012: Novel, Green, and Strategic Processing and Manufacturing Technologies Polymer Derived Ceramics and Composites Advanced Powder Processing and Manufacturing Technologies Synthesis and Processing of Materials Using Electric Fields/Currents Table of ContentsPreface ix NOVEL, GREEN, AND STRATEGIC PROCESSING AND MANUFACTURING TECHNOLOGIES Optimized Shaping Process for Transparent Spinel Ceramic 3 Alfred Kaiser, Thomas Hutzler, Andreas Krell, and Robert Kremer Thermal Diffusion Coatings for Wear-Resistant Components for Oil and Gas Industry 13 E. Medvedovski, F.A. Chinski, and J. Stewart POLYMER DERIVED CERAMICS AND COMPOSITES Polymer-Derived Ceramics for Development of Ultra-High Temperature Composites 33 C. J. Leslie, H. J. Kim, H. Chen, K. M. Walker, E. E. Boakye, C. Chen, C. M. Carney, M. K. Cinibulk, and M.-Y. Chen Siliconboronoxycarbide (SIBOC) Foam from Methyl Borosiloxane 47 Sreejith Krishnan, Tobias Fey, and Peter Greil Synthesis of a Porous SiC Material from Poiycarbosilane by Direct Foaming and Radiation Curing 61 Akira Idesaki, Masaki Sugimoto, and Masahito Yoshikawa Fabrication of SiOC/C Coatings on Stainless Steel using Poly(Phenyl Carbosilane) and their Anti-Corrosion Properties 71 Yoon Joo Lee, Jong II Kim, Soo Ryong Kim, Woo Teck Kwon, Dong-Geun Shin, and Yonghee Kim Photo Luminescent Properties of Polymer Derived Ceramics at Near Stoichiometric Si02-xSiC-y(H) Compositions 79 Masaki Narisawa and Akihiro Iwase, Seiji Watase and Kimihiro Matsukawa, and Taketoshi Kawai Synthesis of Hierarchical Porous SiCO Monoliths from Preceramic Polymer Impregnated with Porous Templates 85 Xuehua Yan, Jianmei Pan, Xiaonong Cheng, Chenghua Zhang, and Guifang Xu ADVANCED POWDER PROCESSING AND MANUFACTURING TECHNOLOGIES Solid Reaction Mechanism of Li2C03 and FePOyC Powder 95 Takashi Hashizume, Atsushi Saiki, and Kiyoshi Terayama Development of New Synthesis Route of Lanthanum Germanate Oxyapatite from Homogeneous Aqueous Solution 103 Shouta Kitajima, Kiyoshi Kobayashi, Toru Higuchi, and Yoshio Sakka Magnetic Orientation of Bismuth Nano-Particles in a Transparent Medium 109 Naoyuki Kitamura, Kohki Takahashi, Iwao Mogi, Satoshi Awaji, and Kazuo Watanabe Control of Dispersion and Agglomeration of CNTS for their Networking—Mechanical and Electrical Properties of CNT/Alumina Composites 117 Mitsuaki Matsuoka, Junichi Tatami, and Toru Wakihara Synthesis and Microstructure Development in Yttria-Magnesia Ceramics for Infrared Transparency 121 J. A. Miller and I. E. Reimanis Fabrication of Flake-Like Boehmite/Ceria or Zinc Oxide Composites for UV Shield Coating 131 Seizo Obata, Susumu Kawai, Michiyuki Yoshida, Osamu Sakurada, and Kenji Kido Thermal Degradation Control Study of Carbon Fiber/Polyamide 6 Composite using Hexagonal Boron Nitride Powder 141 Daisuke Shimamoto, Yusuke Imai, and Yuji Hotta Sol-Gel Auto-Combustion Synthesis of Co-Doped ZnO Diluted Magnetic Semiconductor Nanopowders 149 Chuanbin Wang, Xuan Zhou, Fei Chen, Qiang Shen, and Lianmeng Zhang SYNTHESIS AND PROCESSING OF MATERIALS USING ELECTRIC FIELDS/CURRENTS Advanced Usage of SPS Technology for Producing Innovative Materials 159 Foad Naimi, Ludivine Minier, Cedric Morin, Sophie Le Gallet, and Frederic Bernard Fabrication of Transparent MgAI204 Spinel by Optimizing Loading Schedule during Spark-Plasma-Sintering 173 Koji Morita, Byung-Nam Kim, Hidehiro Yoshida, Yoshio Sakka, and Keijiro Hiraga Properties of WCCo/Diamond Composites Produced by PPS Method Intended for Drill Bits for Machining of Building Stones 181 Marcin Rosinski, Joanna Wachowicz, Tomasz Plocinski, Tomasz Truszkowski, and Andrzej Michalski Surface Morphology of YSZ Thin Films Deposited from a Precursor Solution under the Electrical Fields 193 Atsushi Saiki, Kento Hamada, and Takashi Hashizume Author Index 201

Read more less